Thermo King SB-230 Operator Guide
SB-130, SB-230
and SB-330
TK 54731-2-OP (Rev. 1, 04/2011)
Copyright© 2010 Thermo King Corp., Minneapolis, MN, USA
Printed in USA
SB-130, SB-230
and SB-330
TK 54731-2-OP (Rev. 1, 04/2011)
Copyright© 2010 Thermo King Corp., Minneapolis, MN, USA
Printed in USA
Disclaimer
This manual is published for informational purposes only. Thermo King Corporation makes no
representations or warranties, express or implied, with respect to the information, recommendations
and descriptions contained in this manual and such information, recommendations and descriptions
should not be regarded as all-inclusive or covering all contingencies. In the event you have any
questions or require further information, please contact your local Thermo King dealer.
The procedures described herein should only be undertaken by suitably qualified personnel. Failure to
implement these procedures correctly may cause damage to the Thermo King unit or other property or
personal injury.
Thermo King Corporation and its affiliates shall have no liability in contract or tort (including negligence
and/or strict liability) or otherwise, to any person or entity for any personal injury, property damage or
any other direct, indirect, special or consequential damage or liability whatsoever, arising out of or
resulting from any actions by any person that are contrary to this manual or any of the information,
recommendations or descriptions contained herein or the failure of any person to implement the
procedures described herein correctly or to follow caution and safety decals located on the Thermo
King unit.
2
Disclaimer
This manual is published for informational purposes only. Thermo King Corporation makes no
representations or warranties, express or implied, with respect to the information, recommendations
and descriptions contained in this manual and such information, recommendations and descriptions
should not be regarded as all-inclusive or covering all contingencies. In the event you have any
questions or require further information, please contact your local Thermo King dealer.
The procedures described herein should only be undertaken by suitably qualified personnel. Failure to
implement these procedures correctly may cause damage to the Thermo King unit or other property or
personal injury.
Thermo King Corporation and its affiliates shall have no liability in contract or tort (including negligence
and/or strict liability) or otherwise, to any person or entity for any personal injury, property damage or
any other direct, indirect, special or consequential damage or liability whatsoever, arising out of or
resulting from any actions by any person that are contrary to this manual or any of the information,
recommendations or descriptions contained herein or the failure of any person to implement the
procedures described herein correctly or to follow caution and safety decals located on the Thermo
King unit.
2
Table of Contents
Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
List of Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
EPA Emission Control System Warranty
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Thermo King Corporation Responsibilities . . . . . . 16
Owner Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Safety Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Start/Stop Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Refrigerant Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19
19
20
20
20
21
First Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
First Aid–Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
First Aid–Refrigerant Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Safety Decals and Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Unit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Unit Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Design Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Diesel Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
ELC (Extended Life Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
EMI 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Thermo King X426L and X430L Reciprocating
Compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Electronic Throttling Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
SMART REEFER 3 (SR-3) Control System . . . . . . . . .32
CYCLE-SENTRY Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Continuous Run Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
CYCLE-SENTRY Start-Stop Controls . . . . . . . . . .33
Data Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
OptiSet Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
3
Table of Contents
Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
List of Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
EPA Emission Control System Warranty
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Thermo King Corporation Responsibilities . . . . . . 16
Owner Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Safety Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Start/Stop Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Refrigerant Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19
19
20
20
20
21
First Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
First Aid–Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
First Aid–Refrigerant Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Safety Decals and Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Unit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Unit Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Design Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Diesel Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
ELC (Extended Life Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
EMI 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Thermo King X426L and X430L Reciprocating
Compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Electronic Throttling Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
SMART REEFER 3 (SR-3) Control System . . . . . . . . .32
CYCLE-SENTRY Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Continuous Run Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
CYCLE-SENTRY Start-Stop Controls . . . . . . . . . .33
Data Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
OptiSet Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
3
FreshSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Opening the Front Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Opening the Secondary Door Latch . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Closing the Front Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Unit Protection Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Remote Status Display (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Manual Pretrip Inspection
(Before Starting the Unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
SMART REEFER 3 (SR-3) Controller Overview . . . . . 51
HMI Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Control Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Control Panel Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Turning Unit On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
More Than One Language Enabled . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Turning Unit Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Standard Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Standard Display Variations when OptiSet Plus
is in Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Temperature Watch Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Alarm Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the Diesel Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unit Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
After Start Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric Standby Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the Unit on Electric Standby Operation .
Unit Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching from Diesel to Electric . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching from Electric to Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection of Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting CYCLE-SENTRY or Continuous Mode . . .
Initiating a Manual Defrost Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Terminating a Defrost Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Gauge Readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gauges Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Sensor Readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sensors Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigating the Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main Menu Choices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Language Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Return to English at Any Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarms Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Important Alarm Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
65
66
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
74
77
78
81
83
84
84
87
87
91
92
94
97
98
99
Alarm Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the Diesel Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unit Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
After Start Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric Standby Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the Unit on Electric Standby Operation .
Unit Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching from Diesel to Electric . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching from Electric to Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection of Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting CYCLE-SENTRY or Continuous Mode . . .
Initiating a Manual Defrost Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Terminating a Defrost Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Gauge Readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gauges Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Sensor Readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sensors Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigating the Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main Menu Choices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Language Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Return to English at Any Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarms Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Important Alarm Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
65
66
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
74
77
78
81
83
84
84
87
87
91
92
94
97
98
99
4
FreshSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Opening the Front Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Opening the Secondary Door Latch . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Closing the Front Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Unit Protection Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Remote Status Display (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Manual Pretrip Inspection
(Before Starting the Unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
SMART REEFER 3 (SR-3) Controller Overview . . . . . 51
HMI Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Control Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Control Panel Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Turning Unit On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
More Than One Language Enabled . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Turning Unit Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Standard Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Standard Display Variations when OptiSet Plus
is in Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Temperature Watch Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
4
Datalogger Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Initiating a Start of Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Printing a Trip Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Hourmeters Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Turn Cycle Sentry On or Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Select Temperature Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Keypad Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Start Sleep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Turning CYCLE-SENTRY On or Off . . . . . . . . . . 112
Selecting Keypad Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Selecting Sleep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Pretrip Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Pretrip Test Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Conditions where Pretrip Tests are not allowed . . . . 120
Full Pretrip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Running Pretrip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Pretrip Test Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Initiating a Pretrip Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Stopping a Pretrip Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Electric Standby/Diesel Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Adjust Brightness Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Time Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
OptiSet Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Selecting a Named Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Selecting the Setpoint for a Named Product . . . . . . .137
Changing the Setpoint for a Named Product . . . .139
Selecting a Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Optional Rear Remote Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . .145
Rear Remote Control Panel Functionality . . . . . . . . .145
Rear Remote Control Action set to Run . . . . . . .145
Rear Remote Control Action Set to Stand By . . .146
Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Reading a Typical Remote Standard Display . . . . . .150
Remote Control Panel Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Turning the Unit ON or OFF (Configured for
STAND BY Operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Turning the Unit On and Off (Configured for
RUN Operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Changing the Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Selecting Cycle-Sentry or Continuous Mode . . . . . . .153
Displaying the Discharge Air Temperature . . . . . . . .154
Viewing and Clearing Alarm Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Starting a Manual Defrost Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Sending a Start of Trip Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Running a Pretrip Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
5
Datalogger Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Initiating a Start of Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Printing a Trip Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Hourmeters Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Turn Cycle Sentry On or Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Select Temperature Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Keypad Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Start Sleep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Turning CYCLE-SENTRY On or Off . . . . . . . . . . 112
Selecting Keypad Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Selecting Sleep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Pretrip Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Pretrip Test Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Conditions where Pretrip Tests are not allowed . . . . 120
Full Pretrip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Running Pretrip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Pretrip Test Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Initiating a Pretrip Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Stopping a Pretrip Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Electric Standby/Diesel Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Adjust Brightness Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Time Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
OptiSet Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Selecting a Named Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Selecting the Setpoint for a Named Product . . . . . . .137
Changing the Setpoint for a Named Product . . . .139
Selecting a Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Optional Rear Remote Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . .145
Rear Remote Control Panel Functionality . . . . . . . . .145
Rear Remote Control Action set to Run . . . . . . .145
Rear Remote Control Action Set to Stand By . . .146
Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Reading a Typical Remote Standard Display . . . . . .150
Remote Control Panel Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Turning the Unit ON or OFF (Configured for
STAND BY Operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Turning the Unit On and Off (Configured for
RUN Operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Changing the Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Selecting Cycle-Sentry or Continuous Mode . . . . . . .153
Displaying the Discharge Air Temperature . . . . . . . .154
Viewing and Clearing Alarm Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Starting a Manual Defrost Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Sending a Start of Trip Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Running a Pretrip Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
5
Loading and Enroute Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Pre-Loading Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Post-Loading Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Enroute Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Inspection Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Inspection Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Electric Fuel Heater (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Maintenance Inspection Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Alarm Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Alarm Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Pretrip Alarm Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Clearing Alarm Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Serial Number Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Emergency Cold Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Recover Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning . . . . . . . . . 221
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Belt Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Refrigeration System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Electrical Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Electrical Standby (Model 50 Units Only) . . . . . . . . . 198
Electric Motor and Overload Relay . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Electric Heater Strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Standby Power Cord Requirements . . . . . . . . . . 199
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
6
Loading and Enroute Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Pre-Loading Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Post-Loading Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Enroute Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Inspection Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Inspection Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Electric Fuel Heater (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Maintenance Inspection Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Alarm Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Alarm Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Pretrip Alarm Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Clearing Alarm Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Serial Number Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Emergency Cold Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Recover Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning . . . . . . . . . 221
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Belt Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Refrigeration System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Electrical Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Electrical Standby (Model 50 Units Only) . . . . . . . . . 198
Electric Motor and Overload Relay . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Electric Heater Strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Standby Power Cord Requirements . . . . . . . . . . 199
6
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
List of Figures
ELC (Extended Life Coolant) Nameplate. . . . .22
Belt Warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Belt Replacement Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Automatic Start Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Fan Caution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Door Latch Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
TK486V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
HMI Controller and Data Ports . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Door Latch Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Opening Secondary Door Latch . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Engine Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Control Box With Service Door Open . . . . . . .42
Control Box With Control Box Door Open . . .43
Base Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Remote Status Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Normal Operation No Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Check Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Shutdown Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Remote Status Display with Fuel Level . . . . .47
Remote Status Display
with Fuel Level and Temperature . . . . . . . . . .47
SR-3 HMI Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Control Box With Service Door Open . . . . . . .52
Control Panel Display and Keys . . . . . . . . . . .53
Press On Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Turning Unit On Screen Sequence,
One Language Enabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
NO Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Language Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
New Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Standard Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
7
List of Figures
ELC (Extended Life Coolant) Nameplate. . . . .22
Belt Warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Belt Replacement Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Automatic Start Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Fan Caution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Door Latch Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
TK486V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
HMI Controller and Data Ports . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Door Latch Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Opening Secondary Door Latch . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Engine Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Control Box With Service Door Open . . . . . . .42
Control Box With Control Box Door Open . . .43
Base Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Remote Status Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Normal Operation No Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Check Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Shutdown Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Remote Status Display with Fuel Level . . . . .47
Remote Status Display
with Fuel Level and Temperature . . . . . . . . . .47
SR-3 HMI Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Control Box With Service Door Open . . . . . . .52
Control Panel Display and Keys . . . . . . . . . . .53
Press On Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Turning Unit On Screen Sequence,
One Language Enabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
NO Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Language Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
New Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Standard Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
7
Press Off Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Turning Unit Off Screen Sequence. . . . . . . . . .61
Standard Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Standard Display Variations . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Temperature Watch Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Alarm Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Electric Power Receptacle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Electric Standby Detected Screen . . . . . . . . . .69
Electric Motor Starting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Electric Standby Detected Screen . . . . . . . . . .71
Programming Electric Standby Screen . . . . . .71
Electric Standby Undetected Screen . . . . . . . .72
Programming Diesel Mode Screen . . . . . . . . .72
Changing Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Changing the Setpoint Screen Sequence. . . . . 76
Changing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Screen Sequence for Changing from
CYCLE-SENTRY Mode to Continuous Mode 79
Screen Sequence for Changing from
Continuous Mode to CYCLE-SENTRY Mode 80
Initiating a Manual Defrost Cycle . . . . . . . . . .81
Initiating Manual Defrost Screen Sequence . . .82
Viewing Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Viewing Gauges Screen Sequence . . . . . . . . .86
Viewing Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
NEXT, BACK, LOCK Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Viewing Sensors Screen Sequence . . . . . . . . .89
Accessing Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Main Menu Choices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Standard Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Change Language Screen Sequence . . . . . . . .96
Standard Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
+ or - Keys, YES Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Standard Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Viewing and Clearing Alarms
Screen Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
8
Press Off Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Turning Unit Off Screen Sequence. . . . . . . . . .61
Standard Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Standard Display Variations . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Temperature Watch Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Alarm Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Electric Power Receptacle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Electric Standby Detected Screen . . . . . . . . . .69
Electric Motor Starting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Electric Standby Detected Screen . . . . . . . . . .71
Programming Electric Standby Screen . . . . . .71
Electric Standby Undetected Screen . . . . . . . .72
Programming Diesel Mode Screen . . . . . . . . .72
Changing Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Changing the Setpoint Screen Sequence. . . . . 76
Changing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Screen Sequence for Changing from
CYCLE-SENTRY Mode to Continuous Mode 79
8
Screen Sequence for Changing from
Continuous Mode to CYCLE-SENTRY Mode 80
Initiating a Manual Defrost Cycle . . . . . . . . . .81
Initiating Manual Defrost Screen Sequence . . .82
Viewing Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Viewing Gauges Screen Sequence . . . . . . . . .86
Viewing Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
NEXT, BACK, LOCK Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Viewing Sensors Screen Sequence . . . . . . . . .89
Accessing Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Main Menu Choices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Standard Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Change Language Screen Sequence . . . . . . . .96
Standard Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
+ or - Keys, YES Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Standard Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Viewing and Clearing Alarms
Screen Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Standard Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Start of Trip Screen Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Printer Port Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Standard Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Print Report Screen Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Sample Delivery Ticket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Sample Trip Ticket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Standard Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Viewing Hourmeters Screen Sequence . . . . .108
Standard Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Selecting Mode Screen Sequence . . . . . . . . .113
Standard Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Mode Menu Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Keypad Lockout Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Standard Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Selecting Sleep Mode Screen Sequence . . . .119
Standard Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
No Pretrip Alarm Active Display . . . . . . . . .123
Pretrip Test Screen Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Standard Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Programming Diesel Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Programming Electric Standby Mode . . . . . .128
Standard Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Adjusting Display Brightness Screen
Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Time and Date Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Standard Display with Product Soft Key . . . .132
Standard Display with Product/Setpoint
Soft Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Selecting Named Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Selecting or Changing Named Product
Screen Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Selecting Setpoint for Named Product
Screen Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Changing Setpoint for Named Product . . . . .139
Changing Setpoint for Named Product
Screen Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
9
Standard Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Start of Trip Screen Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Printer Port Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Standard Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Print Report Screen Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Sample Delivery Ticket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Sample Trip Ticket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Standard Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Viewing Hourmeters Screen Sequence . . . . .108
Standard Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Selecting Mode Screen Sequence . . . . . . . . .113
Standard Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Mode Menu Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Keypad Lockout Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Standard Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Selecting Sleep Mode Screen Sequence . . . .119
Standard Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
No Pretrip Alarm Active Display . . . . . . . . .123
Pretrip Test Screen Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Standard Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Programming Diesel Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Programming Electric Standby Mode . . . . . .128
Standard Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Adjusting Display Brightness Screen
Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Time and Date Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Standard Display with Product Soft Key . . . .132
Standard Display with Product/Setpoint
Soft Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Selecting Named Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Selecting or Changing Named Product
Screen Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Selecting Setpoint for Named Product
Screen Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Changing Setpoint for Named Product . . . . .139
Changing Setpoint for Named Product
Screen Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
9
Selecting or Changing Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . .142
Selecting or Changing Numeric Setpoint
Screen Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Rear Remote Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Rear Remote Control Panel Display . . . . . . .147
Unit HMI Control Panel Display . . . . . . . . . .147
Press Select Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Rear Remote Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Rear Remote Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Remote Standard Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Remote Lock Out Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Stand By Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Standard Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Press Up or Down Arrow Keys . . . . . . . . . . .152
Press Enter Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Press Select Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Press Up or Down Arrow Keys . . . . . . . . . . .154
Press Enter Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Press Select Key Twice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Press Select Key Three Times . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Press Enter Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
No Alarms Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Press Defrost Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Press Enter Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Defrost Icon Displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Press TK Logo Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Press Enter Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Press Pretrip Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Press Enter Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Pretrip Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Pass Pretrip Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Loading Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Log Alarms Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Alarm Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Shutdown Alarm Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Unit Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
10
Selecting or Changing Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . .142
Selecting or Changing Numeric Setpoint
Screen Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Rear Remote Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Rear Remote Control Panel Display . . . . . . .147
Unit HMI Control Panel Display . . . . . . . . . .147
Press Select Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Rear Remote Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Rear Remote Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Remote Standard Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Remote Lock Out Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Stand By Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Standard Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Press Up or Down Arrow Keys . . . . . . . . . . .152
Press Enter Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Press Select Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Press Up or Down Arrow Keys . . . . . . . . . . .154
Press Enter Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
10
Press Select Key Twice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Press Select Key Three Times . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Press Enter Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
No Alarms Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Press Defrost Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Press Enter Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Defrost Icon Displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Press TK Logo Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Press Enter Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Press Pretrip Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Press Enter Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Pretrip Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Pass Pretrip Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Loading Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Log Alarms Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Alarm Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Shutdown Alarm Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Unit Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Sequence for Connecting Jumper Cables . . . 188
Unit Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Sequence for Disconnecting Jumper Cables .190
Compressor Serial Number Location . . . . . .216
Engine Serial Number Location . . . . . . . . . .216
Unit Serial Number Plate Locations . . . . . . .217
Unit Serial Number Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
11
Sequence for Connecting Jumper Cables . . . 188
Unit Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Sequence for Disconnecting Jumper Cables .190
Compressor Serial Number Location . . . . . .216
Engine Serial Number Location . . . . . . . . . .216
Unit Serial Number Plate Locations . . . . . . .217
Unit Serial Number Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
11
12
12
Introduction
There is nothing complicated about operating and maintaining
your Thermo King unit, but a few minutes studying this
manual will be time well spent.
Performing pre-trip checks and enroute inspections on a
regular basis will minimize on-the-road operating problems. A
regular maintenance program will also help to keep your unit
in top operating condition. If factory recommended procedures
are followed, you will find that you have purchased the most
efficient and dependable temperature control system available.
IMPORTANT: This manual is published for informational
purposes only and the information furnished herein should
not be considered as all-inclusive or meant to cover all
contingencies. If more information is required, consult your
Thermo King Service Directory for the location and
telephone number of the local dealer.
All service requirements, major and minor, should be handled
by a Thermo King dealer for four very important reasons:
•
They are equipped with the factory recommended tools to
perform all service functions
•
They have factory trained and certified technicians
•
They have genuine Thermo King replacement parts
•
The warranty on your new unit is valid only when the
repair and replacement of component parts is performed
by an authorized Thermo King dealer.
13
Introduction
There is nothing complicated about operating and maintaining
your Thermo King unit, but a few minutes studying this
manual will be time well spent.
Performing pre-trip checks and enroute inspections on a
regular basis will minimize on-the-road operating problems. A
regular maintenance program will also help to keep your unit
in top operating condition. If factory recommended procedures
are followed, you will find that you have purchased the most
efficient and dependable temperature control system available.
IMPORTANT: This manual is published for informational
purposes only and the information furnished herein should
not be considered as all-inclusive or meant to cover all
contingencies. If more information is required, consult your
Thermo King Service Directory for the location and
telephone number of the local dealer.
All service requirements, major and minor, should be handled
by a Thermo King dealer for four very important reasons:
•
They are equipped with the factory recommended tools to
perform all service functions
•
They have factory trained and certified technicians
•
They have genuine Thermo King replacement parts
•
The warranty on your new unit is valid only when the
repair and replacement of component parts is performed
by an authorized Thermo King dealer.
13
Introduction
14
Introduction
14
EPA Emission Control System Warranty
Statement
Thermo King warrants to the initial owner and each subsequent
owner that the certified, non-road diesel engine in your unit is:
1.
Designed, built and equipped so as to conform, at the time
of sale, with all applicable regulations adopted by the
United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA).
2.
Free from defects in materials and workmanship in
specific emission related parts for a period of five years or
3,000 hours of operation, whichever comes first, after date
of delivery to the initial owner.
If an emission-related part or component fails during the
warranty period, it will be repaired or replaced. Any such part
or component repaired or replaced under warranty is warranted
for the warranty period.
During the term of this warranty, Thermo King will provide,
through a Thermo King authorized service dealer or other
establishment authorized by Thermo King, repair or
replacement of any warranted part at no charge to the non-road
engine owner.
In emergency, repairs may be performed at any service
establishment, or by the owner, using any replacement part.
Thermo King will reimburse the owner for their expenses,
including diagnostic charges for such emergency repair. These
expenses shall not exceed Thermo King’s suggested retail price
for all warranted parts replaced, and labor changes based on
Thermo King’s recommended time allowance for the warranty
repair and the geographically appropriate hourly labor rate.
15
EPA Emission Control System Warranty
Statement
Thermo King warrants to the initial owner and each subsequent
owner that the certified, non-road diesel engine in your unit is:
1.
Designed, built and equipped so as to conform, at the time
of sale, with all applicable regulations adopted by the
United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA).
2.
Free from defects in materials and workmanship in
specific emission related parts for a period of five years or
3,000 hours of operation, whichever comes first, after date
of delivery to the initial owner.
If an emission-related part or component fails during the
warranty period, it will be repaired or replaced. Any such part
or component repaired or replaced under warranty is warranted
for the warranty period.
During the term of this warranty, Thermo King will provide,
through a Thermo King authorized service dealer or other
establishment authorized by Thermo King, repair or
replacement of any warranted part at no charge to the non-road
engine owner.
In emergency, repairs may be performed at any service
establishment, or by the owner, using any replacement part.
Thermo King will reimburse the owner for their expenses,
including diagnostic charges for such emergency repair. These
expenses shall not exceed Thermo King’s suggested retail price
for all warranted parts replaced, and labor changes based on
Thermo King’s recommended time allowance for the warranty
repair and the geographically appropriate hourly labor rate.
15
EPA Emission Control System Warranty Statement
Any replacement part can be used for maintenance or repairs.
The owner should ensure that such parts are equivalent in
design and durability to genuine Thermo King parts. However,
Thermo King is not liable for parts that are not genuine
Thermo King parts.
A part not being available within 30 days or repair not being
completed within 30 days constitutes an emergency.
As a condition of reimbursement, replaced parts and received
invoices must be presented at a place of business of a Thermo
King authorized service dealer or other establishment
authorized by Thermo King.
If failure of one of these parts or components results in failure
of another part or component, both will be covered by this
warranty.
Responsibilities
This warranty is subject to the following:
Thermo King Corporation
Responsibilities
This warranty covers the following emission-related parts and
components:
During the emission warranty period, if a defect in material or
workmanship of a warranted part or component is found,
Thermo King will provide:
•
Fuel Injection System
•
•
Intake Manifold
•
Exhaust Manifold
•
Miscellaneous hoses, clamps, connectors and sealing
devices used in the above systems.
New, remanufactured, or repaired parts or components
required to correct the defect.
NOTE: Items replaced under this warranty become the
property of Thermo King.
•
Labor, during normal working hours, required to make the
warranty repair. This includes diagnosis and labor to
remove and install the engine, if necessary.
16
EPA Emission Control System Warranty Statement
Any replacement part can be used for maintenance or repairs.
The owner should ensure that such parts are equivalent in
design and durability to genuine Thermo King parts. However,
Thermo King is not liable for parts that are not genuine
Thermo King parts.
A part not being available within 30 days or repair not being
completed within 30 days constitutes an emergency.
As a condition of reimbursement, replaced parts and received
invoices must be presented at a place of business of a Thermo
King authorized service dealer or other establishment
authorized by Thermo King.
If failure of one of these parts or components results in failure
of another part or component, both will be covered by this
warranty.
Responsibilities
This warranty is subject to the following:
Thermo King Corporation
Responsibilities
This warranty covers the following emission-related parts and
components:
During the emission warranty period, if a defect in material or
workmanship of a warranted part or component is found,
Thermo King will provide:
•
Fuel Injection System
•
•
Intake Manifold
•
Exhaust Manifold
•
Miscellaneous hoses, clamps, connectors and sealing
devices used in the above systems.
16
New, remanufactured, or repaired parts or components
required to correct the defect.
NOTE: Items replaced under this warranty become the
property of Thermo King.
•
Labor, during normal working hours, required to make the
warranty repair. This includes diagnosis and labor to
remove and install the engine, if necessary.
EPA Emission Control System Warranty Statement
Owner Responsibilities
•
During the emission warranty period, the owner is responsible
for:
Attachments, accessory items, or parts not authorized for
use by Thermo King.
•
Improper off-road engine maintenance, repair or abuse.
•
The performance of all required maintenance. A warranty
claim will not be denied because the scheduled
maintenance was not performed. However, if the lack of
required maintenance was the reason for the repair, then
the claim will be denied.
•
Owner’s unreasonable delay in making the product
available after being notified of a potential product
problem.
•
Premium of overtime cost.
•
Cost to investigate complaints that are not caused by
defects in Thermo King material or workmanship.
•
Providing timely notice of a warrantable failure and
promptly making the product available for repair.
Remedies under this warranty are limited to the provision of
material and services as specified herein. Thermo King is not
responsible for incidental or consequential damages such as
downtime or loss of engine powered equipment.
This warranty is in addition to Thermo King’s standard
warranty applicable to the off-road engine product involved.
Limitations
Thermo King is not responsible for resultant damages to an
emission-related part or component resulting from:
•
Any application or installation Thermo King deems
improper as explained in this Operator’s Manual, or any
other manuals provided for the unit.
17
EPA Emission Control System Warranty Statement
Owner Responsibilities
•
During the emission warranty period, the owner is responsible
for:
Attachments, accessory items, or parts not authorized for
use by Thermo King.
•
Improper off-road engine maintenance, repair or abuse.
•
The performance of all required maintenance. A warranty
claim will not be denied because the scheduled
maintenance was not performed. However, if the lack of
required maintenance was the reason for the repair, then
the claim will be denied.
•
Owner’s unreasonable delay in making the product
available after being notified of a potential product
problem.
•
Premium of overtime cost.
•
Cost to investigate complaints that are not caused by
defects in Thermo King material or workmanship.
•
Providing timely notice of a warrantable failure and
promptly making the product available for repair.
Remedies under this warranty are limited to the provision of
material and services as specified herein. Thermo King is not
responsible for incidental or consequential damages such as
downtime or loss of engine powered equipment.
This warranty is in addition to Thermo King’s standard
warranty applicable to the off-road engine product involved.
Limitations
Thermo King is not responsible for resultant damages to an
emission-related part or component resulting from:
•
Any application or installation Thermo King deems
improper as explained in this Operator’s Manual, or any
other manuals provided for the unit.
17
EPA Emission Control System Warranty Statement
18
EPA Emission Control System Warranty Statement
18
Safety Precautions
Thermo King recommends that servicing be done only by a
Thermo King dealer. However, you should be aware of several
safety practices. This chapter gives basic safety precautions for
working with Thermo King units and describes the safety
stickers on your unit that you should be familiar with.
General Safety Practices
DANGER: NEVER operate the unit with the
compressor discharge valve closed. Doing so could
cause the compressor to explode, causing death or
serious injury.
WARNING: Always wear goggles or safety glasses
when working with or around the refrigeration system
or battery. Refrigerant or battery acid can cause
permanent damage if it comes in contact with your
eyes.
WARNING: Keep hands and loose clothing clear of
fans and belts at all times when the unit is operating
or when opening or closing compressor service
valves.
WARNING: Exposed coil fins can cause painful
lacerations. Service work on the evaporator or
condenser coils should be done by a certified Thermo
King technician.
WARNING: Do not apply heat to a closed cooling
system. Before applying heat to a cooling system,
drain it. Then flush it with water and drain the water.
Antifreeze contains water and ethylene glycol. The
ethylene glycol is flammable and can ignite if the
antifreeze is heated enough to boil off the water.
19
Safety Precautions
Thermo King recommends that servicing be done only by a
Thermo King dealer. However, you should be aware of several
safety practices. This chapter gives basic safety precautions for
working with Thermo King units and describes the safety
stickers on your unit that you should be familiar with.
General Safety Practices
DANGER: NEVER operate the unit with the
compressor discharge valve closed. Doing so could
cause the compressor to explode, causing death or
serious injury.
WARNING: Always wear goggles or safety glasses
when working with or around the refrigeration system
or battery. Refrigerant or battery acid can cause
permanent damage if it comes in contact with your
eyes.
WARNING: Keep hands and loose clothing clear of
fans and belts at all times when the unit is operating
or when opening or closing compressor service
valves.
WARNING: Exposed coil fins can cause painful
lacerations. Service work on the evaporator or
condenser coils should be done by a certified Thermo
King technician.
WARNING: Do not apply heat to a closed cooling
system. Before applying heat to a cooling system,
drain it. Then flush it with water and drain the water.
Antifreeze contains water and ethylene glycol. The
ethylene glycol is flammable and can ignite if the
antifreeze is heated enough to boil off the water.
19
Safety Precautions
CAUTION: Use extreme caution when drilling holes
in the unit. Drilling into electrical wiring or
refrigerant lines could cause a fire. Do not drill into
structural components.
Automatic Start/Stop Operation
This unit is capable of automatic operation and could start at
any time without warning.
WARNING: The unit can start at any time without
warning. Press the OFF key on the HMI control panel
and place the microprocessor On/Off switch in the
Off position before inspecting or servicing any part of
the unit.
Electrical Hazard
Refrigerant
Although fluorocarbon refrigerants are classified as safe, use
caution when working with refrigerants or in areas where they
are being used.
DANGER: Fluorocarbon refrigerants can produce
toxic gases. In the presence of an open flame or
electrical short, these gases are severe respiratory
irritants CAPABLE OF CAUSING DEATH.
DANGER: Fluorocarbon refrigerants tend to
displace air and can cause oxygen depletion which
could result in DEATH BY SUFFOCATION. Provide
adequate ventilation in enclosed or confined areas.
WARNING: Fluorocarbon refrigerants evaporate
rapidly, freezing anything they contact if accidentally
released into the atmosphere from the liquid state.
CAUTION: Turn off the high voltage power supply
and disconnect the electric cable before working on
the unit. Units with electric standby present a
potential electrical hazard.
20
Safety Precautions
CAUTION: Use extreme caution when drilling holes
in the unit. Drilling into electrical wiring or
refrigerant lines could cause a fire. Do not drill into
structural components.
Automatic Start/Stop Operation
This unit is capable of automatic operation and could start at
any time without warning.
WARNING: The unit can start at any time without
warning. Press the OFF key on the HMI control panel
and place the microprocessor On/Off switch in the
Off position before inspecting or servicing any part of
the unit.
Electrical Hazard
CAUTION: Turn off the high voltage power supply
and disconnect the electric cable before working on
the unit. Units with electric standby present a
potential electrical hazard.
20
Refrigerant
Although fluorocarbon refrigerants are classified as safe, use
caution when working with refrigerants or in areas where they
are being used.
DANGER: Fluorocarbon refrigerants can produce
toxic gases. In the presence of an open flame or
electrical short, these gases are severe respiratory
irritants CAPABLE OF CAUSING DEATH.
DANGER: Fluorocarbon refrigerants tend to
displace air and can cause oxygen depletion which
could result in DEATH BY SUFFOCATION. Provide
adequate ventilation in enclosed or confined areas.
WARNING: Fluorocarbon refrigerants evaporate
rapidly, freezing anything they contact if accidentally
released into the atmosphere from the liquid state.
Safety Precautions
Refrigerant Oil
Observe the following precautions when working with or
around refrigerant oil:
WARNING: Always wear goggles or safety glasses to
protect eyes from refrigerant oil contact.
Skin: Flush areas with large amounts of warm water. Do not
apply heat. Wrap burns with dry, sterile, bulky dressing to
protect from infection or injury. Get prompt medical attention.
Inhalation: Move victim to fresh air and restore breathing if
necessary. Stay with victim until emergency personnel arrive.
First Aid–Refrigerant Oil
WARNING: Protect skin and clothing from
prolonged or repeated contact with refrigerant oil.
Rubber gloves are recommended.
WARNING: Wash thoroughly immediately after
handling refrigerant oil to prevent irritation.
Eyes: Immediately flush eyes with large amounts of water for
at least 15 minutes while holding the eyelids open. Get prompt
medical attention.
Skin: Remove contaminated clothing. Wash thoroughly with
soap and water. Get medical attention if irritation persists.
Inhalation: Move victim to fresh air and restore breathing if
necessary. Stay with victim until emergency personnel arrive.
First Aid
Ingestion: Do not induce vomiting. Immediately contact
local poison control center or physician.
First Aid–Refrigerant
Eyes: For contact with liquid, immediately flush eyes with
large amounts of water. Get prompt medical attention.
21
Safety Precautions
Refrigerant Oil
Observe the following precautions when working with or
around refrigerant oil:
WARNING: Always wear goggles or safety glasses to
protect eyes from refrigerant oil contact.
Skin: Flush areas with large amounts of warm water. Do not
apply heat. Wrap burns with dry, sterile, bulky dressing to
protect from infection or injury. Get prompt medical attention.
Inhalation: Move victim to fresh air and restore breathing if
necessary. Stay with victim until emergency personnel arrive.
First Aid–Refrigerant Oil
WARNING: Protect skin and clothing from
prolonged or repeated contact with refrigerant oil.
Rubber gloves are recommended.
WARNING: Wash thoroughly immediately after
handling refrigerant oil to prevent irritation.
Eyes: Immediately flush eyes with large amounts of water for
at least 15 minutes while holding the eyelids open. Get prompt
medical attention.
Skin: Remove contaminated clothing. Wash thoroughly with
soap and water. Get medical attention if irritation persists.
Inhalation: Move victim to fresh air and restore breathing if
necessary. Stay with victim until emergency personnel arrive.
First Aid
Ingestion: Do not induce vomiting. Immediately contact
local poison control center or physician.
First Aid–Refrigerant
Eyes: For contact with liquid, immediately flush eyes with
large amounts of water. Get prompt medical attention.
21
Safety Precautions
Safety Decals and Locations
AKB65
Figure 2: Belt Warning
(Located on condenser housing)
AKB66
AJA1947
Figure 1: ELC (Extended Life Coolant) Nameplate
(Located on expansion tank in units
equipped with ELC)
Figure 3: Belt Replacement Caution
(Located on condenser housing)
22
Safety Precautions
Safety Decals and Locations
AKB65
Figure 2: Belt Warning
(Located on condenser housing)
AKB66
AJA1947
Figure 1: ELC (Extended Life Coolant) Nameplate
(Located on expansion tank in units
equipped with ELC)
22
Figure 3: Belt Replacement Caution
(Located on condenser housing)
Safety Precautions
AKB67
Figure 4: Automatic Start Caution
(Locations vary depending on model. Decals are
located near areas that contain moving parts which
can cause severe injuries if hands or clothing become
tangled when unit automatically starts.)
AKB68
Figure 5: Fan Caution
(Locations vary depending on model. Decals are
located near areas that contain fans which can cause
severe injuries when unit automatically starts.)
23
Safety Precautions
AKB67
Figure 4: Automatic Start Caution
(Locations vary depending on model. Decals are
located near areas that contain moving parts which
can cause severe injuries if hands or clothing become
tangled when unit automatically starts.)
AKB68
Figure 5: Fan Caution
(Locations vary depending on model. Decals are
located near areas that contain fans which can cause
severe injuries when unit automatically starts.)
23
Safety Precautions
WARNING
NEW DOOR LATCH DESIGN
REQUIRES DOOR TO BE SLAMMED
SHUT BEFORE MOVING TRAILER.
FAILURE TO CLOSE DOOR FIRMLY
CAN ALLOW WIND TO TEAR DOOR
FROM REFRIGERATION UNIT AND
CAUSE INJURY TO OTHERS.
ATENCIÓN
NUEVO DESEÑO DE CERRADURA
REQUIERE ASOTAR LA PUERTA ANTES
DE CONDUCIR EL TRAILER.
AL NO CERRAR LA PUERTA CON
FIRMEZA EL VIENTO PODRÍA
DESPRENDER LA PUERTA DE LA
UNIDAD DE REFRIGERACIÓN Y
CAUSAR DAÑOS A OTROS.
AEA2422
Figure 6: Door Latch Warning
(Located on curbside door)
24
Safety Precautions
WARNING
NEW DOOR LATCH DESIGN
REQUIRES DOOR TO BE SLAMMED
SHUT BEFORE MOVING TRAILER.
FAILURE TO CLOSE DOOR FIRMLY
CAN ALLOW WIND TO TEAR DOOR
FROM REFRIGERATION UNIT AND
CAUSE INJURY TO OTHERS.
ATENCIÓN
NUEVO DESEÑO DE CERRADURA
REQUIERE ASOTAR LA PUERTA ANTES
DE CONDUCIR EL TRAILER.
AL NO CERRAR LA PUERTA CON
FIRMEZA EL VIENTO PODRÍA
DESPRENDER LA PUERTA DE LA
UNIDAD DE REFRIGERACIÓN Y
CAUSAR DAÑOS A OTROS.
Figure 6: Door Latch Warning
(Located on curbside door)
24
AEA2422
Unit Description
SB-330 30: High capacity cooling and heating on diesel
engine operation. Designed for engine operation at a high
speed of 2600 rpm.
Unit Overview
The Electronic Throttling Valve (ETV) provides enhanced
control of the refrigeration system. The ETV is optional on the
SB-130 and SB-230, and standard on the SB-330. See
“Electronic Throttling Valve” on page 31.
The Thermo King SB-130, SB-230 and SB-330 are one piece,
self-contained, diesel powered, air cooling/heating units
operating under the control of a SMART REEFER 3 (SR-3)
programmable microprocessor controller. Each unit mounts on
the front of the trailer with the evaporator extending through an
opening in the front wall.
The units feature cooling and heating using a quiet running
engine from the Thermo King TK486 engine family.
The units are available in the following models:
SB-130 30: Cooling and heating on diesel engine operation.
SB-230 30: Cooling and heating on diesel engine operation.
SB-230 50: Cooling and heating on diesel engine operation
and electric standby operation.
Figure 7: Front View
25
Unit Description
SB-330 30: High capacity cooling and heating on diesel
engine operation. Designed for engine operation at a high
speed of 2600 rpm.
Unit Overview
The Electronic Throttling Valve (ETV) provides enhanced
control of the refrigeration system. The ETV is optional on the
SB-130 and SB-230, and standard on the SB-330. See
“Electronic Throttling Valve” on page 31.
The Thermo King SB-130, SB-230 and SB-330 are one piece,
self-contained, diesel powered, air cooling/heating units
operating under the control of a SMART REEFER 3 (SR-3)
programmable microprocessor controller. Each unit mounts on
the front of the trailer with the evaporator extending through an
opening in the front wall.
The units feature cooling and heating using a quiet running
engine from the Thermo King TK486 engine family.
The units are available in the following models:
SB-130 30: Cooling and heating on diesel engine operation.
SB-230 30: Cooling and heating on diesel engine operation.
SB-230 50: Cooling and heating on diesel engine operation
and electric standby operation.
Figure 7: Front View
25
Unit Description
In addition to the quiet TK486 engine, these Thermo King
units include other sound deadening components as standard
and optional equipment. Among them are a special exhaust
system, sound-proof insulation, special door gaskets and
sound-absorbing doors. See the Design Features list below.
Design Features
The following chart lists key design features and options.
● Standard Features
❍ Option/Factory installed
❏ Option/Dealer Installed
SB-130 / 230 / 330
Key Features &
Options
SMART REEFER
SR-3 Controller
OptiSet™ Plus
SB-130 SB-230 SB-230 SB-330
Model Model Model Model
30
30
50
30
ETV (Electronic
Throttling Valve)
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
❍
❍
❍
●
SB-130 / 230 / 330
SB-130 SB-230 SB-230 SB-330
Key Features &
Model Model Model Model
Options
30
30
50
30
FreshSet™
Programmable
❍
❍
❍
●
Modes (requires ETV)
ServiceWatch™ Data
●
●
●
●
Logger
CargoWatch™ Data
●
●
●
●
Logger
CargoWatch™
Accessories:
• Door Switches
❍/❏ ❍/❏ ❍/❏
❍/❏
• Temperature
Sensor Kits
EMI-3000
High-Capacity
Condenser Coil
Whisper Quiet
Technology
Easy-access door
design
❍/❏
❍/❏
❍/❏
❍/❏
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
❍
❍
❍
❍
●
●
●
●
26
Unit Description
In addition to the quiet TK486 engine, these Thermo King
units include other sound deadening components as standard
and optional equipment. Among them are a special exhaust
system, sound-proof insulation, special door gaskets and
sound-absorbing doors. See the Design Features list below.
Design Features
The following chart lists key design features and options.
● Standard Features
❍ Option/Factory installed
❏ Option/Dealer Installed
SB-130 / 230 / 330
Key Features &
Options
SMART REEFER
SR-3 Controller
OptiSet™ Plus
ETV (Electronic
Throttling Valve)
26
SB-130 SB-230 SB-230 SB-330
Model Model Model Model
30
30
50
30
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
❍
❍
❍
●
SB-130 / 230 / 330
SB-130 SB-230 SB-230 SB-330
Key Features &
Model Model Model Model
Options
30
30
50
30
FreshSet™
Programmable
❍
❍
❍
●
Modes (requires ETV)
ServiceWatch™ Data
●
●
●
●
Logger
CargoWatch™ Data
●
●
●
●
Logger
CargoWatch™
Accessories:
• Door Switches
❍/❏ ❍/❏ ❍/❏
❍/❏
• Temperature
Sensor Kits
EMI-3000
High-Capacity
Condenser Coil
Whisper Quiet
Technology
Easy-access door
design
❍/❏
❍/❏
❍/❏
❍/❏
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
❍
❍
❍
❍
●
●
●
●
Unit Description
SB-130 / 230 / 330
SB-130 SB-230 SB-230 SB-330
Key Features &
Model Model Model Model
Options
30
30
50
30
Composite Exterior
●
●
●
●
Panels
Long-Life
Coolant/Silicone
●
●
●
●
Hoses
Remote Status
❍/❏ ❍/❏ ❍/❏
❍/❏
Display
Remote Status
Display with Fuel
❏
❏
❏
❏
Level
Remote Status
Display with Fuel
❏
❏
❏
❏
Level and
Temperature
Standard Unit Color
●
●
●
●
White
Standard Grille Color
●
●
●
●
Black
SB-130 / 230 / 330
Key Features &
Options
Directional Air
Delivery
Vibration Isolation
System
Aluminum
Undermount Fuel
Tank 50 Gal. (186
Liter)
Fuel Level Sensor
SB-130 SB-230 SB-230 SB-330
Model Model Model Model
30
30
50
30
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
❍
❍
❍
❍
Electric Fuel Heater
❍
❍
❍
❍
Frost Plug Heater
❍
❍
❍
❍
Alternator, 65 Amp,
12 Vdc
Special Color Grills
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
Fresh Air Exchange
❍
❍
❍
❍
REB Wireless
Communication
Platform
❍
❍
❍
❍
27
Unit Description
SB-130 / 230 / 330
SB-130 SB-230 SB-230 SB-330
Key Features &
Model Model Model Model
Options
30
30
50
30
Composite Exterior
●
●
●
●
Panels
Long-Life
Coolant/Silicone
●
●
●
●
Hoses
Remote Status
❍/❏ ❍/❏ ❍/❏
❍/❏
Display
Remote Status
Display with Fuel
❏
❏
❏
❏
Level
Remote Status
Display with Fuel
❏
❏
❏
❏
Level and
Temperature
Standard Unit Color
●
●
●
●
White
Standard Grille Color
●
●
●
●
Black
SB-130 / 230 / 330
Key Features &
Options
Directional Air
Delivery
Vibration Isolation
System
Aluminum
Undermount Fuel
Tank 50 Gal. (186
Liter)
Fuel Level Sensor
SB-130 SB-230 SB-230 SB-330
Model Model Model Model
30
30
50
30
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
❍
❍
❍
❍
Electric Fuel Heater
❍
❍
❍
❍
Frost Plug Heater
❍
❍
❍
❍
Alternator, 65 Amp,
12 Vdc
Special Color Grills
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
Fresh Air Exchange
❍
❍
❍
❍
REB Wireless
Communication
Platform
❍
❍
❍
❍
27
Unit Description
SB-130 / 230 / 330
Key Features &
Options
iBox™ Interface
SB-130 SB-230 SB-230 SB-330
Model Model Model Model
30
30
50
30
❍/❏
❍/❏
❍/❏
❍/❏
PrimAir™ bulkhead
and duct system
Rear Remote Control
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Humidity Sensor
❏
❏
❏
❏
Megatech Battery,
12 Volt, Wet Cell
❏
❏
❏
❏
EON Battery,
12 Volt, Dry Cell
24 Horsepower
Electric Motor
Remote Electric
Power Receptacle
❏
❏
❏
❏
❍
❏
28
Unit Description
SB-130 / 230 / 330
Key Features &
Options
iBox™ Interface
SB-130 SB-230 SB-230 SB-330
Model Model Model Model
30
30
50
30
❍/❏
❍/❏
❍/❏
❍/❏
PrimAir™ bulkhead
and duct system
Rear Remote Control
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Humidity Sensor
❏
❏
❏
❏
Megatech Battery,
12 Volt, Wet Cell
❏
❏
❏
❏
EON Battery,
12 Volt, Dry Cell
24 Horsepower
Electric Motor
Remote Electric
Power Receptacle
❏
❏
❏
❏
28
❍
❏
Unit Description
Diesel Engine
The TK486V (Tier 2) family of engines are 4-cylinder, water
cooled, direct injection diesel engines. The engine is coupled
directly to the compressor on the Model 30. A centrifugal
clutch transfers power from the engine to the compressor on
the Model 50. Belts transmit power to the unit fans, alternator
and water pump.
The SB-130 and SB-230 use a TK486V (Tier2), which is
designed to run with a high speed of 2200 rpm.
The SB-330 uses a TK486VH (Tier2), which is designed to run
with a high speed of 2600 rpm.
Figure 8: TK486V (TK486VH is Similar)
29
Unit Description
Diesel Engine
The TK486V (Tier 2) family of engines are 4-cylinder, water
cooled, direct injection diesel engines. The engine is coupled
directly to the compressor on the Model 30. A centrifugal
clutch transfers power from the engine to the compressor on
the Model 50. Belts transmit power to the unit fans, alternator
and water pump.
The SB-130 and SB-230 use a TK486V (Tier2), which is
designed to run with a high speed of 2200 rpm.
The SB-330 uses a TK486VH (Tier2), which is designed to run
with a high speed of 2600 rpm.
Figure 8: TK486V (TK486VH is Similar)
29
Unit Description
ELC (Extended Life Coolant)
EMI 3000
ELC (Extended Life Coolant) is standard equipment. The
maintenance interval for ELC is five years or 12,000 hours. A
nameplate on the coolant expansion tank identifies units with
ELC (see “Safety Decals and Locations”). The new engine
coolant, Chevron Extended Life Coolant, is RED in color
instead of the previous GREEN or BLUE-GREEN colored
conventional coolants.
EMI 3000 is an extended maintenance interval package. It is
standard equipment. The EMI 3000 package consists of the
following key components:
CAUTION: Do not add “GREEN” or
“BLUE-GREEN” conventional coolant to cooling
systems using “RED” Extended Life Coolant, except
in an emergency. If conventional coolant is added to
Extended Life Coolant, the coolant must be changed
after 2 years instead of 5 years.
NOTE: The use of 50/50% pre-mixed ELC is recommended
to assure that de-ionized water is being used. If 100% full
strength concentrate is used, de-ionized or distilled water is
recommended instead of tap water to insure the integrity of
the cooling system is maintained.
•
EMI 3000-Hour Cyclonic Air Cleaner Assembly and Air
Cleaner Element
•
EMI 5-Micron 3000-Hour Fuel Filter
•
EMI 3000-Hour Dual Element Oil Filter
•
API Rating CI-4 Mineral Oil
•
Five Year or 12,000 Hour ELC (Extended Life Coolant)
The EMI package allows standard maintenance intervals to be
extended to 3,000 hours, or 2 years, whichever occurs first.
NOTE: Units equipped with the EMI 3000 package do
require regular inspection in accordance with Thermo King's
maintenance recommendations.
NOTE: EMI 3000 oil filters and EMI 3000 air cleaners are
NOT interchangeable with older style oil filters and air
cleaners.
30
Unit Description
ELC (Extended Life Coolant)
EMI 3000
ELC (Extended Life Coolant) is standard equipment. The
maintenance interval for ELC is five years or 12,000 hours. A
nameplate on the coolant expansion tank identifies units with
ELC (see “Safety Decals and Locations”). The new engine
coolant, Chevron Extended Life Coolant, is RED in color
instead of the previous GREEN or BLUE-GREEN colored
conventional coolants.
EMI 3000 is an extended maintenance interval package. It is
standard equipment. The EMI 3000 package consists of the
following key components:
CAUTION: Do not add “GREEN” or
“BLUE-GREEN” conventional coolant to cooling
systems using “RED” Extended Life Coolant, except
in an emergency. If conventional coolant is added to
Extended Life Coolant, the coolant must be changed
after 2 years instead of 5 years.
NOTE: The use of 50/50% pre-mixed ELC is recommended
to assure that de-ionized water is being used. If 100% full
strength concentrate is used, de-ionized or distilled water is
recommended instead of tap water to insure the integrity of
the cooling system is maintained.
30
•
EMI 3000-Hour Cyclonic Air Cleaner Assembly and Air
Cleaner Element
•
EMI 5-Micron 3000-Hour Fuel Filter
•
EMI 3000-Hour Dual Element Oil Filter
•
API Rating CI-4 Mineral Oil
•
Five Year or 12,000 Hour ELC (Extended Life Coolant)
The EMI package allows standard maintenance intervals to be
extended to 3,000 hours, or 2 years, whichever occurs first.
NOTE: Units equipped with the EMI 3000 package do
require regular inspection in accordance with Thermo King's
maintenance recommendations.
NOTE: EMI 3000 oil filters and EMI 3000 air cleaners are
NOT interchangeable with older style oil filters and air
cleaners.
Unit Description
Thermo King X426L and X430L
Reciprocating Compressors
The SB-130 is equipped with a Thermo King X426L
reciprocating compressor with 25.9 cu. in. (424 cm3)
displacement.The SB-230 and SB-330 are equipped with a
Thermo King X430L reciprocating compressor with 30.0 cu.
in. (492 cm3) displacement.
You can tell if the unit has an ETV by looking at the
compressor. Units with an ETV have a suction valve adapter.
Units without an ETV have a mechanical throttling valve.
1
2
Electronic Throttling Valve
The Electronic Throttling Valve (ETV) is optional on the
SB-130 and SB-230, and standard on the SB-330. The ETV
provides enhanced control of the refrigeration system as
follows:
•
Allows the refrigeration system to fully utilize the power
capabilities of the engine under varying conditions
•
Provides an additional measure of protection against high
discharge pressures
•
Protects the engine from high coolant temperature
shutdowns
•
Provides a means of precise temperature control.
1.
2.
Suction Valve Adapter (with ETV)
Mechanical Throttling Valve (No ETV)
Figure 9: Compressor
31
Unit Description
Thermo King X426L and X430L
Reciprocating Compressors
The SB-130 is equipped with a Thermo King X426L
reciprocating compressor with 25.9 cu. in. (424 cm3)
displacement.The SB-230 and SB-330 are equipped with a
Thermo King X430L reciprocating compressor with 30.0 cu.
in. (492 cm3) displacement.
You can tell if the unit has an ETV by looking at the
compressor. Units with an ETV have a suction valve adapter.
Units without an ETV have a mechanical throttling valve.
1
2
Electronic Throttling Valve
The Electronic Throttling Valve (ETV) is optional on the
SB-130 and SB-230, and standard on the SB-330. The ETV
provides enhanced control of the refrigeration system as
follows:
•
Allows the refrigeration system to fully utilize the power
capabilities of the engine under varying conditions
•
Provides an additional measure of protection against high
discharge pressures
•
Protects the engine from high coolant temperature
shutdowns
•
Provides a means of precise temperature control.
1.
2.
Suction Valve Adapter (with ETV)
Mechanical Throttling Valve (No ETV)
Figure 9: Compressor
31
Unit Description
SMART REEFER 3 (SR-3) Control
System
CYCLE-SENTRY Operation
•
High Speed Cool
The SR-3 Base Controller is a microprocessor control system
designed for transport refrigeration. The SR-3 integrates the
following functions: changing setpoint and operating mode,
viewing gauge, sensor and hourmeter readings, initiating
defrost cycles, and viewing and clearing alarms.
•
Low Speed Cool
•
Null (Engine Off)
•
Low Speed Heat
•
High Speed Heat
The microprocessor components are located inside the control
box, which is located inside the lower roadside service door.
The microprocessor is connected to an HMI (Human Machine
Interface) Control Panel. It is used to operate the unit. The
HMI control panel is mounted on the face of the control box. It
is clearly visible through an opening in the lower roadside
service door.
•
Defrost
See “Operating Instructions” for more information about the
SR-3 Base Controller.
Depending on the air temperature in the trailer, as sensed by
the microprocessor Base Controller, the unit will typically
operate in one of the following modes:
Continuous Run Operation
•
High Speed Cool
•
Low Speed Cool
•
Low Speed Modulated Cool (Optional SB-130 and 230)
•
Low Speed Modulated Heat (Optional SB-130 and 230)
•
Low Speed Heat
•
High Speed Heat
•
Defrost
32
Unit Description
SMART REEFER 3 (SR-3) Control
System
CYCLE-SENTRY Operation
•
High Speed Cool
The SR-3 Base Controller is a microprocessor control system
designed for transport refrigeration. The SR-3 integrates the
following functions: changing setpoint and operating mode,
viewing gauge, sensor and hourmeter readings, initiating
defrost cycles, and viewing and clearing alarms.
•
Low Speed Cool
•
Null (Engine Off)
•
Low Speed Heat
•
High Speed Heat
The microprocessor components are located inside the control
box, which is located inside the lower roadside service door.
The microprocessor is connected to an HMI (Human Machine
Interface) Control Panel. It is used to operate the unit. The
HMI control panel is mounted on the face of the control box. It
is clearly visible through an opening in the lower roadside
service door.
•
Defrost
See “Operating Instructions” for more information about the
SR-3 Base Controller.
Depending on the air temperature in the trailer, as sensed by
the microprocessor Base Controller, the unit will typically
operate in one of the following modes:
32
Continuous Run Operation
•
High Speed Cool
•
Low Speed Cool
•
Low Speed Modulated Cool (Optional SB-130 and 230)
•
Low Speed Modulated Heat (Optional SB-130 and 230)
•
Low Speed Heat
•
High Speed Heat
•
Defrost
Unit Description
CYCLE-SENTRY Start-Stop Controls
The CYCLE-SENTRY Start-Stop fuel saving system provides
optimum operating economy.
WARNING: The unit can start at any time without
warning. Press the OFF key on the HMI control panel
and place the microprocessor On/Off switch in the
Off position before inspecting or servicing any part of
the unit.
Your Thermo King unit provides a wide range
of control and programming flexibility.
However, pre-programming of the unit Base
Controller may prohibit operation in certain
temperature ranges within some modes and
may also prohibit certain modes of operation.
If you have controller programming questions,
contact your supervisor or your Thermo King
dealer before requesting service.
The CYCLE-SENTRY system automatically starts the unit on
microprocessor demand, and shuts down the unit after those
conditions are satisfied.
The system automatically monitors and maintains the
compartment temperature, engine block temperature, and
battery charge levels at a condition where quick, easy starts are
possible.
33
Unit Description
CYCLE-SENTRY Start-Stop Controls
The CYCLE-SENTRY Start-Stop fuel saving system provides
optimum operating economy.
WARNING: The unit can start at any time without
warning. Press the OFF key on the HMI control panel
and place the microprocessor On/Off switch in the
Off position before inspecting or servicing any part of
the unit.
Your Thermo King unit provides a wide range
of control and programming flexibility.
However, pre-programming of the unit Base
Controller may prohibit operation in certain
temperature ranges within some modes and
may also prohibit certain modes of operation.
If you have controller programming questions,
contact your supervisor or your Thermo King
dealer before requesting service.
The CYCLE-SENTRY system automatically starts the unit on
microprocessor demand, and shuts down the unit after those
conditions are satisfied.
The system automatically monitors and maintains the
compartment temperature, engine block temperature, and
battery charge levels at a condition where quick, easy starts are
possible.
33
Unit Description
Data Logging
There are two separate data loggers. The data is downloaded
through the data ports on the front of the control box using an
IBM® PC compatible laptop or desktop computer and Thermo
King WinTrac 5.1 (or higher) software.
ServiceWatch™: ServiceWatch™ is standard equipment. It
records operating events, alarm codes and compartment
temperatures as they occur and at preset intervals. This
information is typically used to analyze unit performance. Use
the ServiceWatch Port to downloaded the ServiceWatch data.
USB Port: Standard USB drives that have been programmed
with Wintrac can be used. Use of a USB drive eliminates the
need for an on-site computer and does not require cables.
The USB port can be used to:
•
Upload and download OptiSet™ Plus files.
•
Download the CargoWatch and ServiceWatch Data
Loggers.
•
Flashload the Base Controller and HMI Control Panel.
CargoWatch™: CargoWatch™ data logging requires the
installation of optional sensors. Up to six temperature
sensor/probes and four door switches can be installed.
CargoWatch also logs the setpoint. Use the CargoWatch Port to
downloaded the CargoWatch data. If optional temperature
sensors are installed, their readings are displayed as Datalogger
Sensor (1-6) Temperature in the sensor readings.
A printer can also be used to print a report of the optional
sensor readings.
34
Unit Description
Data Logging
There are two separate data loggers. The data is downloaded
through the data ports on the front of the control box using an
IBM® PC compatible laptop or desktop computer and Thermo
King WinTrac 5.1 (or higher) software.
ServiceWatch™: ServiceWatch™ is standard equipment. It
records operating events, alarm codes and compartment
temperatures as they occur and at preset intervals. This
information is typically used to analyze unit performance. Use
the ServiceWatch Port to downloaded the ServiceWatch data.
CargoWatch™: CargoWatch™ data logging requires the
installation of optional sensors. Up to six temperature
sensor/probes and four door switches can be installed.
CargoWatch also logs the setpoint. Use the CargoWatch Port to
downloaded the CargoWatch data. If optional temperature
sensors are installed, their readings are displayed as Datalogger
Sensor (1-6) Temperature in the sensor readings.
A printer can also be used to print a report of the optional
sensor readings.
34
USB Port: Standard USB drives that have been programmed
with Wintrac can be used. Use of a USB drive eliminates the
need for an on-site computer and does not require cables.
The USB port can be used to:
•
Upload and download OptiSet™ Plus files.
•
Download the CargoWatch and ServiceWatch Data
Loggers.
•
Flashload the Base Controller and HMI Control Panel.
Unit Description
1
2
OptiSet Plus
OptiSet™ Plus is a group of programmable functions that
control how the unit will operate with specific setpoints or
named products. This assures that when a particular setpoint or
named product is selected, the unit will always operate the
same way. This allows an entire fleet to be configured to match
the customers’ needs. Contact your Thermo King dealer for
information about programming OptiSet Plus.
3
FreshSet
1.
CargoWatch Port
2.
ServiceWatch Port
3.
USB Port
FreshSet™ is included in OptiSet Plus. FreshSet is a demand
base temperature control for fresh products. FreshSet modifies
and adjusts unit airflow operation to control temperature and to
maximize protection of cargo, while keeping operating costs to
a minimum. Contact your Thermo King dealer for information
about programming FreshSet.
Figure 10: HMI Controller and Data Ports
35
Unit Description
1
2
3
OptiSet Plus
OptiSet™ Plus is a group of programmable functions that
control how the unit will operate with specific setpoints or
named products. This assures that when a particular setpoint or
named product is selected, the unit will always operate the
same way. This allows an entire fleet to be configured to match
the customers’ needs. Contact your Thermo King dealer for
information about programming OptiSet Plus.
FreshSet
1.
CargoWatch Port
2.
ServiceWatch Port
3.
USB Port
FreshSet™ is included in OptiSet Plus. FreshSet is a demand
base temperature control for fresh products. FreshSet modifies
and adjusts unit airflow operation to control temperature and to
maximize protection of cargo, while keeping operating costs to
a minimum. Contact your Thermo King dealer for information
about programming FreshSet.
Figure 10: HMI Controller and Data Ports
35
Unit Description
Defrost
Frost gradually builds-up on evaporator coils as a result of
normal operation. The unit uses hot refrigerant to defrost the
evaporator coil. Hot refrigerant gas passes through the
evaporator coil and melts the frost. The water flows through
collection drain tubes onto the ground. The methods of defrost
initiation are Automatic, and Manual.
NOTE: The unit will not perform a Manual Defrost Cycle
unless the unit has been turned on with the ON key, the unit
is running in Continuous or CYCLE-SENTRY Mode (or shut
down in CYCLE-SENTRY Null Mode), and the coil
temperature is below 45 F (7 C).
Automatic Defrost: The Base Controller automatically
initiates timed or demand defrost cycles. The Base Controller
can be programmed to initiate timed defrost cycles at intervals
of 2, 4, 6, 8, or 12 hours. Demand defrost cycles occur if the
differences between the return air temperature, discharge air
temperature, and coil temperature exceed certain limits. The
unit can enter defrost cycles as often as every 30 minutes if
required.
Manual Defrost: In Manual Defrost mode, the operator
initiates a defrost cycle. See “Initiating a Manual Defrost
Cycle.”
36
Unit Description
Defrost
Frost gradually builds-up on evaporator coils as a result of
normal operation. The unit uses hot refrigerant to defrost the
evaporator coil. Hot refrigerant gas passes through the
evaporator coil and melts the frost. The water flows through
collection drain tubes onto the ground. The methods of defrost
initiation are Automatic, and Manual.
Automatic Defrost: The Base Controller automatically
initiates timed or demand defrost cycles. The Base Controller
can be programmed to initiate timed defrost cycles at intervals
of 2, 4, 6, 8, or 12 hours. Demand defrost cycles occur if the
differences between the return air temperature, discharge air
temperature, and coil temperature exceed certain limits. The
unit can enter defrost cycles as often as every 30 minutes if
required.
Manual Defrost: In Manual Defrost mode, the operator
initiates a defrost cycle. See “Initiating a Manual Defrost
Cycle.”
36
NOTE: The unit will not perform a Manual Defrost Cycle
unless the unit has been turned on with the ON key, the unit
is running in Continuous or CYCLE-SENTRY Mode (or shut
down in CYCLE-SENTRY Null Mode), and the coil
temperature is below 45 F (7 C).
Unit Description
Opening the Front Doors
Opening the Secondary Door Latch
Pull the door latch handle to open the door and access the
engine compartment.
The unit is also equipped with a secondary door latch. A
secondary door latch nameplate is located below the front
doors. After opening the door latch, reach between the front
doors and lift the spring latch over the spring catch while
opening the door.
1
1
2
2
1.
Door Latch
1.
Spring Latch
2.
Secondary Door Latch Nameplate
2.
Spring Catch
Figure 11: Door Latch Location
Figure 12: Opening Secondary Door Latch
37
Unit Description
Opening the Front Doors
Opening the Secondary Door Latch
Pull the door latch handle to open the door and access the
engine compartment.
The unit is also equipped with a secondary door latch. A
secondary door latch nameplate is located below the front
doors. After opening the door latch, reach between the front
doors and lift the spring latch over the spring catch while
opening the door.
1
1
2
2
1.
Door Latch
1.
Spring Latch
2.
Secondary Door Latch Nameplate
2.
Spring Catch
Figure 11: Door Latch Location
Figure 12: Opening Secondary Door Latch
37
Unit Description
Closing the Front Doors
Slam the door to close it. Do not push the door closed while
holding the door latch handle open or the door will not close
properly.
38
Unit Description
Closing the Front Doors
Slam the door to close it. Do not push the door closed while
holding the door latch handle open or the door will not close
properly.
38
Unit Description
Engine Compartment Components
1
2
The following maintenance items can be checked visually.
WARNING: The unit can start at any time without
warning. Press the OFF key on the HMI control panel
and place the microprocessor On/Off switch in the
Off position before inspecting any part of the unit.
Air Filter Restriction Indicator: The air filter restriction
indicator is attached to the engine intake manifold. When the
diaphragm indicates 25, service the air filter. Press the button
on the bottom of the restriction indicator to reset after servicing
the air cleaner.
4
Compressor Oil Sight Glass: Use this sight glass to check
the compressor oil level. Check the compressor oil when there
is evidence of oil loss (leaks). Refer to the unit Maintenance
Manual for the correct procedure.
3
1. Air Filter Restriction 3.
Indicator
2. Receiver Tank Sight 4.
Glass
Engine Oil Dipstick
Compressor Oil Sight
Glass
Engine Oil Dipstick: Use the engine oil dipstick to check
the engine oil level.
CAUTION: Make sure the engine is turned off before
attempting to check the engine oil.
Figure 13: Engine Compartment
39
Unit Description
Engine Compartment Components
1
2
The following maintenance items can be checked visually.
WARNING: The unit can start at any time without
warning. Press the OFF key on the HMI control panel
and place the microprocessor On/Off switch in the
Off position before inspecting any part of the unit.
Air Filter Restriction Indicator: The air filter restriction
indicator is attached to the engine intake manifold. When the
diaphragm indicates 25, service the air filter. Press the button
on the bottom of the restriction indicator to reset after servicing
the air cleaner.
4
Compressor Oil Sight Glass: Use this sight glass to check
the compressor oil level. Check the compressor oil when there
is evidence of oil loss (leaks). Refer to the unit Maintenance
Manual for the correct procedure.
3
1. Air Filter Restriction 3.
Indicator
2. Receiver Tank Sight 4.
Glass
Engine Oil Dipstick
Compressor Oil Sight
Glass
Engine Oil Dipstick: Use the engine oil dipstick to check
the engine oil level.
CAUTION: Make sure the engine is turned off before
attempting to check the engine oil.
Figure 13: Engine Compartment
39
Unit Description
Receiver Tank Sight Glass: This sight glass indicates the
level of refrigerant in the receiver tank.
Operate the unit in high speed cool for approximately 15
minutes to stabilize operating conditions and temperature
before attempting to check the refrigerant.
NOTE: If the ball floats, there is sufficient refrigerant in the
unit for that load at that particular trailer temperature. This
test does not determine if the unit contains a full charge or an
overcharge of refrigerant.
Unit Protection Devices
Coolant Level Switch: The coolant level switch closes if
the coolant level drops below an acceptable level. If it stays
closed for a specified time, the microprocessor records alarm
code 37.
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor: The
microprocessor uses the engine coolant temperature sensor to
monitor the engine coolant temperature. If the engine coolant
temperature rises above an acceptable level, the
microprocessor records alarm code 41 and possibly 18. The the
microprocessor might also shut the unit down.
Fuse Link (Current Limiter): The fuse link is located in the
positive battery cable. The fuse link protects the electric
system from a short. If the fuse link burns out, replace it by
replacing the positive battery cable.
High Pressure Cutout Switch: The high pressure cutout
switch (HPCO) is located on the compressor discharge
manifold. If the compressor discharge pressure becomes
excessive, the switch opens the circuit to the run relay to stop
the unit. The microprocessor will record Alarm Code 10.
High Pressure Relief Valve: This valve is designed to
relieve excessive pressure in the refrigeration system. It is
located on the receiver tank. If the high pressure relief valve
opens, much of the refrigerant will be lost. Take the unit to a
Thermo King dealer if this occurs.
Low Oil Level Switch: The low oil level switch closes if the
oil drops below an acceptable level. If it stays closed for a
specified time, the microprocessor shuts the unit down and
records Alarm Code 66.
Low Oil Pressure Switch: The low oil pressure switch
closes if the oil pressure drops below an acceptable level. If it
stays closed for a specified time, the microprocessor shuts the
unit down and records alarm code 19.
40
Unit Description
Receiver Tank Sight Glass: This sight glass indicates the
level of refrigerant in the receiver tank.
Operate the unit in high speed cool for approximately 15
minutes to stabilize operating conditions and temperature
before attempting to check the refrigerant.
NOTE: If the ball floats, there is sufficient refrigerant in the
unit for that load at that particular trailer temperature. This
test does not determine if the unit contains a full charge or an
overcharge of refrigerant.
Unit Protection Devices
Coolant Level Switch: The coolant level switch closes if
the coolant level drops below an acceptable level. If it stays
closed for a specified time, the microprocessor records alarm
code 37.
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor: The
microprocessor uses the engine coolant temperature sensor to
monitor the engine coolant temperature. If the engine coolant
temperature rises above an acceptable level, the
microprocessor records alarm code 41 and possibly 18. The the
microprocessor might also shut the unit down.
40
Fuse Link (Current Limiter): The fuse link is located in the
positive battery cable. The fuse link protects the electric
system from a short. If the fuse link burns out, replace it by
replacing the positive battery cable.
High Pressure Cutout Switch: The high pressure cutout
switch (HPCO) is located on the compressor discharge
manifold. If the compressor discharge pressure becomes
excessive, the switch opens the circuit to the run relay to stop
the unit. The microprocessor will record Alarm Code 10.
High Pressure Relief Valve: This valve is designed to
relieve excessive pressure in the refrigeration system. It is
located on the receiver tank. If the high pressure relief valve
opens, much of the refrigerant will be lost. Take the unit to a
Thermo King dealer if this occurs.
Low Oil Level Switch: The low oil level switch closes if the
oil drops below an acceptable level. If it stays closed for a
specified time, the microprocessor shuts the unit down and
records Alarm Code 66.
Low Oil Pressure Switch: The low oil pressure switch
closes if the oil pressure drops below an acceptable level. If it
stays closed for a specified time, the microprocessor shuts the
unit down and records alarm code 19.
Unit Description
Preheat Buzzer: The preheat buzzer sounds when the base
controller energizes the preheat relay. This warns anyone near
the unit that the controller is about to start the engine.
Overload Relay—Automatic Reset (Model 50): An
overload relay protects the standby electric motor. The
overload relay opens the circuit to the electric motor if the
motor overloads for any reason (e.g., low line voltage or
improper power supply) while the unit is on electric standby
operation. The microprocessor will record Alarm Code 90.
Smart FETs: Smart FETs in the base controller protect some
circuits and components from an overcurrent condition.
Fuses: A number of fuses, located on the base controller,
protect various circuits and components. The base controller is
located inside the control box. Refer to the appropriate
Microprocessor Controller Diagnostic Manual for more
information about the fuses.
Fuse Size Function
F2
15A
Power to On/Off Switch
F3
40A
Fuel Sol Pull-In/Starter Circuit
Fuse Size Function
F4
None No Fuse - All Bosch and Thermo King
Alternators
2A
2A Fuse - All Prestolite Alternators
F5
60A
Preheat Circuit
F6
15A
Damper and High Speed Circuits
F7
2A
8XP Circuit - Controller On Feedback to
HMI
F8
5A
Power to CAN Connector J12
F9
5A
Power to CAN Connector J14
F10
10A
8X Power (Install fuse in right position)
F11
10A
Zone 1 LLS (Multi-Temp only)
F12
5A
Power to CAN Connector J13
F13
2A
8FC Circuit (Remote Status
Light/Optional Power)
F15
P/S
On/Off Relay
F20
2A
Alternator Sense
F25
7.5A
HPCO Switch Circuit
F26
5A
Power to CAN Connector J98
41
Unit Description
Preheat Buzzer: The preheat buzzer sounds when the base
controller energizes the preheat relay. This warns anyone near
the unit that the controller is about to start the engine.
Overload Relay—Automatic Reset (Model 50): An
overload relay protects the standby electric motor. The
overload relay opens the circuit to the electric motor if the
motor overloads for any reason (e.g., low line voltage or
improper power supply) while the unit is on electric standby
operation. The microprocessor will record Alarm Code 90.
Smart FETs: Smart FETs in the base controller protect some
circuits and components from an overcurrent condition.
Fuses: A number of fuses, located on the base controller,
protect various circuits and components. The base controller is
located inside the control box. Refer to the appropriate
Microprocessor Controller Diagnostic Manual for more
information about the fuses.
Fuse Size Function
F2
15A
Power to On/Off Switch
F3
40A
Fuel Sol Pull-In/Starter Circuit
Fuse Size Function
F4
None No Fuse - All Bosch and Thermo King
Alternators
2A
2A Fuse - All Prestolite Alternators
F5
60A
Preheat Circuit
F6
15A
Damper and High Speed Circuits
F7
2A
8XP Circuit - Controller On Feedback to
HMI
F8
5A
Power to CAN Connector J12
F9
5A
Power to CAN Connector J14
F10
10A
8X Power (Install fuse in right position)
F11
10A
Zone 1 LLS (Multi-Temp only)
F12
5A
Power to CAN Connector J13
F13
2A
8FC Circuit (Remote Status
Light/Optional Power)
F15
P/S
On/Off Relay
F20
2A
Alternator Sense
F25
7.5A
HPCO Switch Circuit
F26
5A
Power to CAN Connector J98
41
Unit Description
Fuse Size Function
F4 Fuse F4 must be removed for Bosch and Thermo
King alternators. Fuse F4 fuse must be in place for
Prestolite alternators to charge.
F5 The F5 preheat fuse is a “slow blow” type fuse. It is
designed for use with the Yanmar trailer engine air
pre-heater. Always replace the fuse with the TK
specified fuse.
F10 The F10 fuse must always be installed in the right
position.
CAUTION: When fuse F10 is installed in the left
position the unit will start and run without the HMI
control panel.
F15 The device identified as F15 is a poly switch. These
over-current devices reset automatically and are not
replaceable.
1
1.
Control Box
Figure 14: Control Box With Service Door Open
42
Unit Description
Fuse Size Function
F4 Fuse F4 must be removed for Bosch and Thermo
King alternators. Fuse F4 fuse must be in place for
Prestolite alternators to charge.
F5 The F5 preheat fuse is a “slow blow” type fuse. It is
designed for use with the Yanmar trailer engine air
pre-heater. Always replace the fuse with the TK
specified fuse.
F10 The F10 fuse must always be installed in the right
position.
CAUTION: When fuse F10 is installed in the left
position the unit will start and run without the HMI
control panel.
F15 The device identified as F15 is a poly switch. These
over-current devices reset automatically and are not
replaceable.
1
1.
Control Box
Figure 14: Control Box With Service Door Open
42
Unit Description
1
1.
Base Controller
Figure 15: Control Box With Control Box Door Open
Figure 16: Base Controller
43
Unit Description
1
1.
Base Controller
Figure 15: Control Box With Control Box Door Open
Figure 16: Base Controller
43
Unit Description
44
Unit Description
44
Remote Status Display (Optional)
The remote status display mounts on the cargo box for easy
viewing of the unit’s mode.
The remote status display indicates operating status as follows:
White Status LEDs: Illuminate the “T” portion of the TK
logo when the unit is functioning properly with no alarm
codes.
Figure 17: Remote Status Display (All LEDs Shown)
Figure 18: Normal Operation No Alarms
45
Remote Status Display (Optional)
The remote status display mounts on the cargo box for easy
viewing of the unit’s mode.
The remote status display indicates operating status as follows:
White Status LEDs: Illuminate the “T” portion of the TK
logo when the unit is functioning properly with no alarm
codes.
Figure 17: Remote Status Display (All LEDs Shown)
Figure 18: Normal Operation No Alarms
45
Remote Status Display (Optional)
Amber Status LEDs: Illuminate the “K” portion of the TK
logo when the unit has a check alarm code, but is still
functioning properly. Check the unit as soon as possible to
correct the alarm condition.
White and Amber Status LEDs: The two bottom LEDs in
the “T” (in white) and the four bottom LEDs in the “K” (in
amber) are illuminated when the unit has a shutdown alarm
code and the load integrity is at risk. Correct the alarm
condition immediately.
Figure 19: Check Alarm
Figure 20: Shutdown Alarm
46
Remote Status Display (Optional)
Amber Status LEDs: Illuminate the “K” portion of the TK
logo when the unit has a check alarm code, but is still
functioning properly. Check the unit as soon as possible to
correct the alarm condition.
White and Amber Status LEDs: The two bottom LEDs in
the “T” (in white) and the four bottom LEDs in the “K” (in
amber) are illuminated when the unit has a shutdown alarm
code and the load integrity is at risk. Correct the alarm
condition immediately.
Figure 19: Check Alarm
Figure 20: Shutdown Alarm
46
Remote Status Display (Optional)
Remote status displays that also show the fuel level or the fuel
level and the box temperature are also available. The number
of white LEDs illuminated in the fuel level indicator show the
fuel level. When the fuel level falls below 10%, only the two
amber LEDs at the top and bottom of the fuel level indicator
are illuminated to indicate the low fuel level.
The temperature display shows the box temperature, except
when the unit is in defrost in which case it displays “dF”.
1
2
2
1
3
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
Status Indicator
Fuel Level Indicator
Status Indicator
Fuel Level Indicator
Temperature Display
Figure 22: Remote Status Display
with Fuel Level and Temperature
Figure 21: Remote Status Display with Fuel Level
47
Remote Status Display (Optional)
Remote status displays that also show the fuel level or the fuel
level and the box temperature are also available. The number
of white LEDs illuminated in the fuel level indicator show the
fuel level. When the fuel level falls below 10%, only the two
amber LEDs at the top and bottom of the fuel level indicator
are illuminated to indicate the low fuel level.
The temperature display shows the box temperature, except
when the unit is in defrost in which case it displays “dF”.
1
2
2
1
3
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
Status Indicator
Fuel Level Indicator
Status Indicator
Fuel Level Indicator
Temperature Display
Figure 22: Remote Status Display
with Fuel Level and Temperature
Figure 21: Remote Status Display with Fuel Level
47
Remote Status Display (Optional)
48
Remote Status Display (Optional)
48
Manual Pretrip Inspection
(Before Starting the Unit)
Pretrip inspections are an important part of a preventative
maintenance program designed to minimize operating
problems and breakdowns. Perform this pretrip inspection
before every trip involving refrigerated cargo.
Engine Coolant: The engine coolant must have antifreeze
protection to -30 F (-34 C). Add coolant if Alarm Code 37 is
active. Check and add coolant to the expansion tank.
WARNING: Do not remove the expansion tank cap
while the coolant is hot.
NOTE: Pretrip inspections are not intended to take the place
of regular maintenance inspections.
Fuel: Make sure the diesel fuel supply is adequate to
guarantee engine operation to the next check point. Allow for
maximum fuel consumption of one gallon per hour of engine
operation.
Engine Oil: Check the engine oil level. It should be at the
Full mark when the dipstick is threaded all the way into the oil
pan. Do not overfill.
CAUTION: Turn the engine off before checking the
engine oil level.
Battery: Make sure the battery terminals are tight and free of
corrosion.
Belts: Make sure belts are in good condition and adjusted to
the proper tension. For more information about belt tension,
see the Specifications chapter.
Electrical: Check the electrical connections to make sure they
are securely fastened. Wires and terminals should be free of
corrosion, cracks, and moisture.
Structural: Visually inspect the unit for leaks, loose or
broken parts, and other damage.
49
Manual Pretrip Inspection
(Before Starting the Unit)
Pretrip inspections are an important part of a preventative
maintenance program designed to minimize operating
problems and breakdowns. Perform this pretrip inspection
before every trip involving refrigerated cargo.
NOTE: Pretrip inspections are not intended to take the place
of regular maintenance inspections.
Fuel: Make sure the diesel fuel supply is adequate to
guarantee engine operation to the next check point. Allow for
maximum fuel consumption of one gallon per hour of engine
operation.
Engine Oil: Check the engine oil level. It should be at the
Full mark when the dipstick is threaded all the way into the oil
pan. Do not overfill.
CAUTION: Turn the engine off before checking the
engine oil level.
Engine Coolant: The engine coolant must have antifreeze
protection to -30 F (-34 C). Add coolant if Alarm Code 37 is
active. Check and add coolant to the expansion tank.
WARNING: Do not remove the expansion tank cap
while the coolant is hot.
Battery: Make sure the battery terminals are tight and free of
corrosion.
Belts: Make sure belts are in good condition and adjusted to
the proper tension. For more information about belt tension,
see the Specifications chapter.
Electrical: Check the electrical connections to make sure they
are securely fastened. Wires and terminals should be free of
corrosion, cracks, and moisture.
Structural: Visually inspect the unit for leaks, loose or
broken parts, and other damage.
49
Manual Pretrip Inspection (Before Starting the Unit)
Damper: Make sure the damper in the evaporator air outlets
move freely, with no sticking or binding.
Coils: Make sure the condenser and evaporator coils are clean
and free of debris.
Cargo Box: Check the interior and exterior of the cargo box
for damage. Any damage to the walls or insulation must be
repaired.
Cargo Doors: Make sure that the cargo doors and weather
seals are in good condition. The doors should latch securely
and the weather seals should fit tightly.
Defrost Drains: Check the defrost drain hoses and fittings to
make sure they are open.
50
Manual Pretrip Inspection (Before Starting the Unit)
Damper: Make sure the damper in the evaporator air outlets
move freely, with no sticking or binding.
Coils: Make sure the condenser and evaporator coils are clean
and free of debris.
Cargo Box: Check the interior and exterior of the cargo box
for damage. Any damage to the walls or insulation must be
repaired.
Cargo Doors: Make sure that the cargo doors and weather
seals are in good condition. The doors should latch securely
and the weather seals should fit tightly.
Defrost Drains: Check the defrost drain hoses and fittings to
make sure they are open.
50
Operating Instructions
SMART REEFER 3 (SR-3)
Controller Overview
Thermo King has applied the latest advances in computer
technology to develop a device that controls temperature and
unit function, and displays operating information quickly and
accurately.
There is nothing complicated about learning to operate the
SR-3 Controller, but you will find that a few minutes studying
the contents of this manual will be time well spent.
WARNING: Do not operate the unit until you are
completely familiar with the location and function of
each control.
Figure 23: SR-3 HMI Control Panel
51
Operating Instructions
SMART REEFER 3 (SR-3)
Controller Overview
Thermo King has applied the latest advances in computer
technology to develop a device that controls temperature and
unit function, and displays operating information quickly and
accurately.
There is nothing complicated about learning to operate the
SR-3 Controller, but you will find that a few minutes studying
the contents of this manual will be time well spent.
WARNING: Do not operate the unit until you are
completely familiar with the location and function of
each control.
Figure 23: SR-3 HMI Control Panel
51
Operating Instructions
The microprocessor components are located inside the control
box, which is located inside the lower roadside service door.
The microprocessor is connected to an HMI (Human Machine
Interface) Control Panel. It is used to operate the unit. The
CargoWatch and ServiceWatch ports are used to retrieve data
from the data logging system.
1
2
4
3
5
6
1.
Control Box
4.
CargoWatch Port
2.
Microprocessor
On/Off Switch
5.
HMI Control Panel
3.
ServiceWatch Port
6.
USB Port
Microprocessor On/Off Switch: This switch supplies or
removes electrical power to the microprocessor. It is located on
the left side of the control box. See Figure 24.
WARNING: The unit can start at any time without
warning. Press the OFF key on the HMI control panel
and place the microprocessor On/Off switch in the
Off position before inspecting or servicing any part of
the unit.
Figure 24: Control Box With Service Door Open
52
Operating Instructions
The microprocessor components are located inside the control
box, which is located inside the lower roadside service door.
The microprocessor is connected to an HMI (Human Machine
Interface) Control Panel. It is used to operate the unit. The
CargoWatch and ServiceWatch ports are used to retrieve data
from the data logging system.
1
2
4
3
5
6
1.
Control Box
4.
CargoWatch Port
2.
Microprocessor
On/Off Switch
5.
HMI Control Panel
3.
ServiceWatch Port
6.
USB Port
Figure 24: Control Box With Service Door Open
52
Microprocessor On/Off Switch: This switch supplies or
removes electrical power to the microprocessor. It is located on
the left side of the control box. See Figure 24.
WARNING: The unit can start at any time without
warning. Press the OFF key on the HMI control panel
and place the microprocessor On/Off switch in the
Off position before inspecting or servicing any part of
the unit.
Operating Instructions
HMI Control Panel
The HMI control panel has a display and eight touch sensitive
keys. The display is capable of showing both text and graphics.
The four keys on the left and right sides of the display are
dedicated keys. The four keys under the display are “soft”
keys. The function of “soft” keys change depending on the
operation being performed. If a soft key is active, its function
will be shown in the display directly above the key.
3
1
4
2
5
Control Panel Display
6
The display is used to supply unit information to the operator.
This information includes setpoint, current box temperature
operating information, unit gauge readings, system
temperatures and other information as selected by the operator.
The default display is called the Standard Display. It is shown
in Figure 25 and will be described in detail later in this chapter.
1.
On Key (Dedicated Key)
2.
Off Key (Dedicated Key)
3.
Display
4.
Defrost Key (Dedicated Key)
5.
CYCLE-SENTRY/Continuous Mode Key
(Dedicated Key)
6.
Soft Keys
Figure 25: Control Panel Display and Keys
53
Operating Instructions
HMI Control Panel
The HMI control panel has a display and eight touch sensitive
keys. The display is capable of showing both text and graphics.
The four keys on the left and right sides of the display are
dedicated keys. The four keys under the display are “soft”
keys. The function of “soft” keys change depending on the
operation being performed. If a soft key is active, its function
will be shown in the display directly above the key.
3
1
4
2
5
Control Panel Display
The display is used to supply unit information to the operator.
This information includes setpoint, current box temperature
operating information, unit gauge readings, system
temperatures and other information as selected by the operator.
The default display is called the Standard Display. It is shown
in Figure 25 and will be described in detail later in this chapter.
6
1.
On Key (Dedicated Key)
2.
Off Key (Dedicated Key)
3.
Display
4.
Defrost Key (Dedicated Key)
5.
CYCLE-SENTRY/Continuous Mode Key
(Dedicated Key)
6.
Soft Keys
Figure 25: Control Panel Display and Keys
53
Operating Instructions
Control Panel Keys
CYCLE SENTRY/Continuous Mode Key:
The four keys on the left and right sides of the display screen
are “dedicated keys” (see Figure 25). Their functions are listed
below.
Press this key to switch back and forth between
the CYCLE-SENTRY mode and the Continuous
Run mode. If OptiSet Plus is in use, it may not be
possible to change the Mode.
On Key: This key is used to turn the unit on.
First the display will briefly show the Thermo
King Logo and then the statement "Configuring
System - Please Wait". When the power-up
sequence is complete the display shows the
Standard Display of box temperature and
setpoint.
Off Key: This key is used to turn the unit off.
First the display will briefly show "System is
Powering Down - Please Wait. Press On to
Resume" and then "Off" will appear momentarily.
When the power-down sequence is complete the
display will be blank.
Defrost Key: Press this key to initiate a Manual
Defrost cycle.
54
Operating Instructions
Control Panel Keys
CYCLE SENTRY/Continuous Mode Key:
The four keys on the left and right sides of the display screen
are “dedicated keys” (see Figure 25). Their functions are listed
below.
Press this key to switch back and forth between
the CYCLE-SENTRY mode and the Continuous
Run mode. If OptiSet Plus is in use, it may not be
possible to change the Mode.
On Key: This key is used to turn the unit on.
First the display will briefly show the Thermo
King Logo and then the statement "Configuring
System - Please Wait". When the power-up
sequence is complete the display shows the
Standard Display of box temperature and
setpoint.
Off Key: This key is used to turn the unit off.
First the display will briefly show "System is
Powering Down - Please Wait. Press On to
Resume" and then "Off" will appear momentarily.
When the power-down sequence is complete the
display will be blank.
Defrost Key: Press this key to initiate a Manual
Defrost cycle.
54
Operating Instructions
The four "soft" keys under the display are
multi-purpose keys. Their function changes
depending on the operation being performed. If a
soft key is active the key function is shown in the
display directly above the key. The keys are
numbered from left to right, with Key 1 on the far
left and Key 4 on the far right.
Typical soft key applications:
•Setpoint
•Gauges
•Sensors
•Menu
•Next/Back
•Yes/No
•+/–
•Select/Exit
•Clear/Help
•Hourmeters
55
Operating Instructions
The four "soft" keys under the display are
multi-purpose keys. Their function changes
depending on the operation being performed. If a
soft key is active the key function is shown in the
display directly above the key. The keys are
numbered from left to right, with Key 1 on the far
left and Key 4 on the far right.
Typical soft key applications:
•Setpoint
•Gauges
•Sensors
•Menu
•Next/Back
•Yes/No
•+/–
•Select/Exit
•Clear/Help
•Hourmeters
55
Operating Instructions
Turning Unit On
IMPORTANT: The ON key must be held down until the
Thermo King Logo appears. If the ON key is not held down
long enough (approximately ½ second), the display may
flicker but the unit will not start up. If this occurs, hold the
ON key down until the Thermo King logo appears.
Complete the following steps to turn on the unit:
1.
Press the ON key. See Figure 26.
2
1
NOTE: With extremely cold ambient temperatures it may
take up to 15 seconds for the first display to appear.
3.
1.
On Key
2.
Display
NOTE: If more than one language has been enabled, a
prompt will appear at this point to allow the desired
language to be chosen. If this occurs, go to “More Than
One Language Enabled” on page 59 to continue the unit
start up procedure. If this does not occur, only one
language is enabled and you can continue with the unit
start up Step 4 below.
Figure 26: Press On Key
2.
The “Configuring System” Screen briefly appears while
communications are established and the unit prepares for
operation. See Figure 27.
The display briefly shows a Thermo King Logo. See
Figure 27 on page 58.
4.
The Standard Display showing box temperature and
setpoint briefly appears. See “Figure 27: Turning Unit On
Screen Sequence, One Language Enabled,” on page 58.
5.
The “Diesel Engine Starting” Screen briefly appears as the
engine preheats and starts.
56
Operating Instructions
Turning Unit On
IMPORTANT: The ON key must be held down until the
Thermo King Logo appears. If the ON key is not held down
long enough (approximately ½ second), the display may
flicker but the unit will not start up. If this occurs, hold the
ON key down until the Thermo King logo appears.
Complete the following steps to turn on the unit:
1.
Press the ON key. See Figure 26.
2
1
NOTE: With extremely cold ambient temperatures it may
take up to 15 seconds for the first display to appear.
3.
1.
On Key
2.
Display
NOTE: If more than one language has been enabled, a
prompt will appear at this point to allow the desired
language to be chosen. If this occurs, go to “More Than
One Language Enabled” on page 59 to continue the unit
start up procedure. If this does not occur, only one
language is enabled and you can continue with the unit
start up Step 4 below.
Figure 26: Press On Key
2.
56
The display briefly shows a Thermo King Logo. See
Figure 27 on page 58.
The “Configuring System” Screen briefly appears while
communications are established and the unit prepares for
operation. See Figure 27.
4.
The Standard Display showing box temperature and
setpoint briefly appears. See “Figure 27: Turning Unit On
Screen Sequence, One Language Enabled,” on page 58.
5.
The “Diesel Engine Starting” Screen briefly appears as the
engine preheats and starts.
Operating Instructions
6.
The Standard Display showing box temperature and
setpoint reappears when the unit is running. (See Figure
27.)
57
Operating Instructions
6.
The Standard Display showing box temperature and
setpoint reappears when the unit is running. (See Figure
27.)
57
Operating Instructions
Figure 27: Turning Unit On Screen Sequence, One Language Enabled
58
Operating Instructions
Figure 27: Turning Unit On Screen Sequence, One Language Enabled
58
Operating Instructions
More Than One Language Enabled
If more than one language has been enabled, a prompt will
appear to allow the desired language to be chosen. Only
languages enabled from the Guarded Access Menu are
available. Press YES to select the language displayed. If a
different language is desired, press the NO key as shown in
Figure 28.
IMPORTANT: The engine start is not delayed by the
language prompt as shown in Figure 28. The prompt will
appear for 10 seconds and then the engine will start. After the
engine is started the display will return to the prompt shown
in Figure 28.
The Language menu will appear as shown in Figure 29. Press
the + or - keys to select the desired language. When the desired
language is shown press the YES key to confirm the choice.
Figure 29: Language Menu
The display will briefly show PROGRAMMING
LANGUAGE - PLEASE WAIT in the new language as shown
in Figure 30.
Figure 28: NO Key
59
Operating Instructions
More Than One Language Enabled
If more than one language has been enabled, a prompt will
appear to allow the desired language to be chosen. Only
languages enabled from the Guarded Access Menu are
available. Press YES to select the language displayed. If a
different language is desired, press the NO key as shown in
Figure 28.
IMPORTANT: The engine start is not delayed by the
language prompt as shown in Figure 28. The prompt will
appear for 10 seconds and then the engine will start. After the
engine is started the display will return to the prompt shown
in Figure 28.
The Language menu will appear as shown in Figure 29. Press
the + or - keys to select the desired language. When the desired
language is shown press the YES key to confirm the choice.
Figure 29: Language Menu
The display will briefly show PROGRAMMING
LANGUAGE - PLEASE WAIT in the new language as shown
in Figure 30.
Figure 28: NO Key
59
Operating Instructions
The “Diesel Engine Starting” Screen will briefly appear as the
engine preheats and starts.
The Standard Display showing box temperature and setpoint
will reappear (as shown in Figure 31) when the unit is running.
Figure 30: New Language
The new language is confirmed, and then the Standard Display
will appear in the new language as shown in Figure 31. The
unit is now ready to run.
Figure 31: Standard Display
60
Operating Instructions
The “Diesel Engine Starting” Screen will briefly appear as the
engine preheats and starts.
The Standard Display showing box temperature and setpoint
will reappear (as shown in Figure 31) when the unit is running.
Figure 30: New Language
The new language is confirmed, and then the Standard Display
will appear in the new language as shown in Figure 31. The
unit is now ready to run.
Figure 31: Standard Display
60
Operating Instructions
Turning Unit Off
Complete the following steps to turn unit off:
1.
Press the OFF key.
2.
The engine will immediately shut off.
3.
The “System is Powering Down” Screen will briefly
appear.
4.
The Off Screen will briefly appear.
5.
The screen goes blank when the unit power is off. To start
the unit again, press the ON Key.
2
1
1.
Off Key
2.
Display
Figure 33: Turning Unit Off Screen Sequence
Figure 32: Press Off Key
61
Operating Instructions
Turning Unit Off
Complete the following steps to turn unit off:
1.
Press the OFF key.
2.
The engine will immediately shut off.
3.
The “System is Powering Down” Screen will briefly
appear.
4.
The Off Screen will briefly appear.
5.
The screen goes blank when the unit power is off. To start
the unit again, press the ON Key.
2
1
1.
Off Key
2.
Display
Figure 32: Press Off Key
Figure 33: Turning Unit Off Screen Sequence
61
Operating Instructions
Standard Display
The Standard Display is the default display. It appears if no
other display function is selected. The Standard Display shows
the box temperature and setpoint. The box temperature is
measured by the controlling sensor. The return air sensor is the
controlling sensor except when the controller is programmed to
use the discharge air sensor as the controlling sensor during
modulation. The box temperature shown below in Figure 34 is
35.5 F. The setpoint shown is 35 F. The CYCLE-SENTRY
Icon in the upper right corner of the display shows the unit is
operating in the CYCLE-SENTRY mode. The arrow pointing
down indicates the unit is cooling.
1
3
4
2
1.
Box Temperature
3.
CYCLE-SENTRY
Icon
2.
Cooling
4.
Setpoint
NOTE: The CYCLE-SENTRY icon will appears when the
unit is operating in CYCLE-SENTRY mode as shown below.
If the CYCLE-SENTRY icon is not present the unit is
operating in Continuous mode.
Figure 34: Standard Display
62
Operating Instructions
Standard Display
The Standard Display is the default display. It appears if no
other display function is selected. The Standard Display shows
the box temperature and setpoint. The box temperature is
measured by the controlling sensor. The return air sensor is the
controlling sensor except when the controller is programmed to
use the discharge air sensor as the controlling sensor during
modulation. The box temperature shown below in Figure 34 is
35.5 F. The setpoint shown is 35 F. The CYCLE-SENTRY
Icon in the upper right corner of the display shows the unit is
operating in the CYCLE-SENTRY mode. The arrow pointing
down indicates the unit is cooling.
NOTE: The CYCLE-SENTRY icon will appears when the
unit is operating in CYCLE-SENTRY mode as shown below.
If the CYCLE-SENTRY icon is not present the unit is
operating in Continuous mode.
62
1
3
4
2
1.
Box Temperature
3.
CYCLE-SENTRY
Icon
2.
Cooling
4.
Setpoint
Figure 34: Standard Display
Operating Instructions
Standard Display Variations
when OptiSet Plus is in Use
1
The Standard Display has variations. A display showing any of
the following variations is still considered a Standard Display
(see Figure 35).
3
The top of the display may show a named product if the
controller has been programmed with OptiSet Plus temperature
profiles. The far left soft key may display PRODUCT or
PRODUCT/SETPOINT if the Base Controller has been
programmed with OptiSet Plus temperature profiles. See
“OptiSet Plus” on page 132 for information about selecting or
changing the named product or the setpoint if the Base
Controller has been programmed with OptiSet Plus
temperature profiles. Contact your Thermo King dealer for
information about programming the Base Controller with
OptiSet Plus temperature profiles.
The temperature can be displayed in degrees Fahrenheit (F) or
degrees Celsius (C). An arrow pointing upwards indicates the
unit is heating. An arrow pointing downwards indicates the
unit is cooling.
4
2
5
6
1.
Named Product
2.
Heating
3.
PRODUCT or PRODUCT/SETPOINT Soft Key
4.
Degrees Celsius
5.
Cooling
6.
Degrees Fahrenheit
Figure 35: Standard Display Variations
63
Operating Instructions
Standard Display Variations
when OptiSet Plus is in Use
1
The Standard Display has variations. A display showing any of
the following variations is still considered a Standard Display
(see Figure 35).
3
The top of the display may show a named product if the
controller has been programmed with OptiSet Plus temperature
profiles. The far left soft key may display PRODUCT or
PRODUCT/SETPOINT if the Base Controller has been
programmed with OptiSet Plus temperature profiles. See
“OptiSet Plus” on page 132 for information about selecting or
changing the named product or the setpoint if the Base
Controller has been programmed with OptiSet Plus
temperature profiles. Contact your Thermo King dealer for
information about programming the Base Controller with
OptiSet Plus temperature profiles.
The temperature can be displayed in degrees Fahrenheit (F) or
degrees Celsius (C). An arrow pointing upwards indicates the
unit is heating. An arrow pointing downwards indicates the
unit is cooling.
4
2
5
6
1.
Named Product
2.
Heating
3.
PRODUCT or PRODUCT/SETPOINT Soft Key
4.
Degrees Celsius
5.
Cooling
6.
Degrees Fahrenheit
Figure 35: Standard Display Variations
63
Operating Instructions
Temperature Watch Display
The Standard Display defaults to the Temperature Watch
Display after about 2-1/2 minutes of non-use (when no keys
are pressed) and no check, prevent or shutdown alarms are
present. The Temperature Watch Display shows the same box
temperature and setpoint but in larger fonts. This creates easy
operator viewing from a distance. To return to the Standard
Display press the MENU soft key (or any of the other three soft
keys that are not assigned).
2
1
3
NOTE: A named product may appear above the temperature
reading if the Base Controller has been programmed with
OptiSet Plus temperature profiles and a named product has
been selected.
1.
Named Product (If Selected)
2.
CYCLE-SENTRY Icon
3.
Menu Soft Key
Figure 36: Temperature Watch Display
NOTE: The CYCLE-SENTRY icon will appear in the
Temperature Watch display when the unit is operating in
CYCLE-SENTRY mode as shown below. If the
CYCLE-SENTRY icon is not present the unit is operating in
Continuous mode.
64
Operating Instructions
Temperature Watch Display
The Standard Display defaults to the Temperature Watch
Display after about 2-1/2 minutes of non-use (when no keys
are pressed) and no check, prevent or shutdown alarms are
present. The Temperature Watch Display shows the same box
temperature and setpoint but in larger fonts. This creates easy
operator viewing from a distance. To return to the Standard
Display press the MENU soft key (or any of the other three soft
keys that are not assigned).
NOTE: A named product may appear above the temperature
reading if the Base Controller has been programmed with
OptiSet Plus temperature profiles and a named product has
been selected.
NOTE: The CYCLE-SENTRY icon will appear in the
Temperature Watch display when the unit is operating in
CYCLE-SENTRY mode as shown below. If the
CYCLE-SENTRY icon is not present the unit is operating in
Continuous mode.
64
2
1
3
1.
Named Product (If Selected)
2.
CYCLE-SENTRY Icon
3.
Menu Soft Key
Figure 36: Temperature Watch Display
Operating Instructions
Alarm Display
1
2
If a unit alarm condition occurs the large Alarm Icon will
appear on the Standard Display as shown below in Figure 37.
NOTE: A shutdown alarm will also cause the display and
backlight to flash on and off, and the display will switch from
normal video to reverse video and back to normal video (light
areas become dark and dark areas become light).
IMPORTANT: Always record any Alarm Codes shown. This
information is very valuable to service personnel.
See “Alarms Menu” on page 97 for information about
displaying and clearing alarms.
1.
Alarm Icon
2.
Named Product (If Selected)
Figure 37: Alarm Display
65
Operating Instructions
Alarm Display
1
2
If a unit alarm condition occurs the large Alarm Icon will
appear on the Standard Display as shown below in Figure 37.
NOTE: A shutdown alarm will also cause the display and
backlight to flash on and off, and the display will switch from
normal video to reverse video and back to normal video (light
areas become dark and dark areas become light).
IMPORTANT: Always record any Alarm Codes shown. This
information is very valuable to service personnel.
See “Alarms Menu” on page 97 for information about
displaying and clearing alarms.
1.
Alarm Icon
2.
Named Product (If Selected)
Figure 37: Alarm Display
65
Operating Instructions
Starting the Diesel Engine
Unit Fails To Start
Diesel engine preheats and starts automatically in both
Continuous Mode and CYCLE-SENTRY mode. The engine
will preheat and start if necessary when the unit is turned on.
The engine preheat and start will be delayed in
CYCLE-SENTRY mode if there is no current need for the
engine to run. If a key or sequence of keys are pressed on the
HMI Control Panel before the engine starts, the engine will
preheat and start approximately 10 seconds after pressing the
last key.
If the engine does not start and the Alarm Icon appears on the
display, take the following steps.
See “Turning Unit On” on page 56.
1.
Check for and correct any alarm conditions. See “Viewing
and Clearing Alarms Screen Sequence” on page 100.
2.
Clear all alarms. See “Viewing and Clearing Alarms
Screen Sequence” on page 100.
3.
Press the OFF key to turn the unit off.
4.
Press the ON key to turn the unit on.
5.
The Base Controller will go through the start up screens
and then after a 10 second delay the unit will start
automatically.
6.
If the engine will still not start, turn the unit off. Determine
and correct the cause for not starting.
7.
Repeat the procedure.
CAUTION: The engine may start automatically any
time the unit is turned on.
WARNING: Never use starting fluid.
NOTE: Run a pretrip test if the unit has not been used
recently. See “Pretrip Tests” on page 120.
66
Operating Instructions
Starting the Diesel Engine
Unit Fails To Start
Diesel engine preheats and starts automatically in both
Continuous Mode and CYCLE-SENTRY mode. The engine
will preheat and start if necessary when the unit is turned on.
The engine preheat and start will be delayed in
CYCLE-SENTRY mode if there is no current need for the
engine to run. If a key or sequence of keys are pressed on the
HMI Control Panel before the engine starts, the engine will
preheat and start approximately 10 seconds after pressing the
last key.
If the engine does not start and the Alarm Icon appears on the
display, take the following steps.
See “Turning Unit On” on page 56.
1.
Check for and correct any alarm conditions. See “Viewing
and Clearing Alarms Screen Sequence” on page 100.
2.
Clear all alarms. See “Viewing and Clearing Alarms
Screen Sequence” on page 100.
3.
Press the OFF key to turn the unit off.
4.
Press the ON key to turn the unit on.
5.
The Base Controller will go through the start up screens
and then after a 10 second delay the unit will start
automatically.
6.
If the engine will still not start, turn the unit off. Determine
and correct the cause for not starting.
7.
Repeat the procedure.
CAUTION: The engine may start automatically any
time the unit is turned on.
WARNING: Never use starting fluid.
NOTE: Run a pretrip test if the unit has not been used
recently. See “Pretrip Tests” on page 120.
66
Operating Instructions
After Start Inspection
After the unit is running, check the following items to confirm
that the unit is running properly.
Pre-Cooling: Make sure that the setpoint is at the desired
temperature. See “Changing the Setpoint” on page 74. Allow
the unit to run for a minimum of 30 minutes (longer if possible)
before loading the trailer.
Oil Pressure: Check the engine oil pressure by pressing the
GAUGES soft key. See “Viewing Gauge Readings” on page 84.
The Engine Oil Pressure Display should indicate OK not LOW.
This provides a good test of the refrigeration system while
removing residual heat and the moisture from the trailer
interior to prepare it for a refrigerated load.
Ammeter: Check the ammeter reading by pressing the
GAUGES soft key. See “Viewing Gauge Readings” on page 84.
The Amps Display should indicate a positive charge amperage
rate to the battery. A negative (-) number indicates a discharge
condition.
Defrost: When the unit has finished pre-cooling the trailer
interior, manually initiate a Defrost cycle. See “Initiating a
Manual Defrost Cycle” on page 81. This will remove the frost
that builds up while running the unit to pre-cool the trailer.
Compressor Oil: The compressor oil level should be visible
in the compressor sight glass after 15 minutes of operation. If
not, check the compressor oil level using the procedure in the
appropriate maintenance manual.
67
Operating Instructions
After Start Inspection
After the unit is running, check the following items to confirm
that the unit is running properly.
Pre-Cooling: Make sure that the setpoint is at the desired
temperature. See “Changing the Setpoint” on page 74. Allow
the unit to run for a minimum of 30 minutes (longer if possible)
before loading the trailer.
Oil Pressure: Check the engine oil pressure by pressing the
GAUGES soft key. See “Viewing Gauge Readings” on page 84.
The Engine Oil Pressure Display should indicate OK not LOW.
This provides a good test of the refrigeration system while
removing residual heat and the moisture from the trailer
interior to prepare it for a refrigerated load.
Ammeter: Check the ammeter reading by pressing the
GAUGES soft key. See “Viewing Gauge Readings” on page 84.
The Amps Display should indicate a positive charge amperage
rate to the battery. A negative (-) number indicates a discharge
condition.
Defrost: When the unit has finished pre-cooling the trailer
interior, manually initiate a Defrost cycle. See “Initiating a
Manual Defrost Cycle” on page 81. This will remove the frost
that builds up while running the unit to pre-cool the trailer.
Compressor Oil: The compressor oil level should be visible
in the compressor sight glass after 15 minutes of operation. If
not, check the compressor oil level using the procedure in the
appropriate maintenance manual.
67
Operating Instructions
Electric Standby Operation
Model 50 units are equipped with Electric Standby. This
feature allows the unit to operate on electric power as well as
be powered by the standard diesel engine.
During Electric Standby operation, power to the unit is
supplied by an electric motor connected to a high voltage
power source. The required voltage is shown on a decal on the
unit’s electric power receptacle.
Electric Power Receptacle: The electric power receptacle
is used to connect the unit to an appropriate electric power
source for electric standby operation. The electric power
receptacle is located next to the HMI Control Panel. Make sure
the unit and the power supply are turned off before connecting
or disconnecting a power cord.
WARNING: Units equipped with electric standby may
start at any time when the unit is connected to live
electric power and the Base Controller is turned on.
CAUTION: Always turn the electric power supply off
when handling, connecting, or disconnecting high
voltage power cords.
CAUTION: Do not start the electric drive motor
unless the diesel engine is completely stopped.
Figure 38: Electric Power Receptacle
68
Operating Instructions
Electric Standby Operation
Model 50 units are equipped with Electric Standby. This
feature allows the unit to operate on electric power as well as
be powered by the standard diesel engine.
During Electric Standby operation, power to the unit is
supplied by an electric motor connected to a high voltage
power source. The required voltage is shown on a decal on the
unit’s electric power receptacle.
Electric Power Receptacle: The electric power receptacle
is used to connect the unit to an appropriate electric power
source for electric standby operation. The electric power
receptacle is located next to the HMI Control Panel. Make sure
the unit and the power supply are turned off before connecting
or disconnecting a power cord.
WARNING: Units equipped with electric standby may
start at any time when the unit is connected to live
electric power and the Base Controller is turned on.
CAUTION: Always turn the electric power supply off
when handling, connecting, or disconnecting high
voltage power cords.
CAUTION: Do not start the electric drive motor
unless the diesel engine is completely stopped.
Figure 38: Electric Power Receptacle
68
Operating Instructions
Starting the Unit on Electric Standby
Operation
CAUTION: The motor may start automatically any
time the unit is turned on.
Units equipped with the Electric Standby option only.
Electric motor starting is automatic in both Continuous Mode
and Cycle Sentry Mode. The motor will start as required when
the unit is turned on. If any keys are being pressed on the HMI
control panel prior to the motor start, the motor start will be
delayed until 10 seconds after the last key is pressed. Start the
unit on Electric Standby operation as follows:
1.
Press the controller OFF key to make sure the unit is
turned off.
2.
Connect the unit electric power receptacle to an
appropriate electric power supply.
3.
Press the controller ON key.
4.
If a screen asking if you wish to switch to Electric Standby
appears, press the YES soft key. This screen does not
appear if the Base Controller is programmed to
automatically switch from Diesel to Electric Standby, or if
the unit was in Electric Standby when it was turned off.
Figure 39: Electric Standby Detected Screen
69
Operating Instructions
Starting the Unit on Electric Standby
Operation
CAUTION: The motor may start automatically any
time the unit is turned on.
Units equipped with the Electric Standby option only.
Electric motor starting is automatic in both Continuous Mode
and Cycle Sentry Mode. The motor will start as required when
the unit is turned on. If any keys are being pressed on the HMI
control panel prior to the motor start, the motor start will be
delayed until 10 seconds after the last key is pressed. Start the
unit on Electric Standby operation as follows:
1.
Press the controller OFF key to make sure the unit is
turned off.
2.
Connect the unit electric power receptacle to an
appropriate electric power supply.
3.
Press the controller ON key.
4.
If a screen asking if you wish to switch to Electric Standby
appears, press the YES soft key. This screen does not
appear if the Base Controller is programmed to
automatically switch from Diesel to Electric Standby, or if
the unit was in Electric Standby when it was turned off.
Figure 39: Electric Standby Detected Screen
69
Operating Instructions
5.
If the microprocessor determines that the unit should cool
or heat, the motor start screen appears as shown below.
The preheat buzzer sounds for 20 seconds before the
electric motor starts. It may not start if the return air sensor
temperature is within a few degrees of setpoint. The
electric motor cycles on and off in CYCLE-SENTRY
Mode and runs continuously in Continuous Mode.
ELECTRIC MOTOR STARTING
Unit Fails to Start
If the electric motor does not start and the Alarm Icon appears
on the display, take the following steps.
1.
Check for and correct any alarm conditions. See “Viewing
and Clearing Alarms Screen Sequence” on page 100.
2.
Clear all alarms. See “Viewing and Clearing Alarms
Screen Sequence” on page 100.
3.
Press the OFF key.
4.
Press the ON key.
5.
If the unit still does not start, repeat the above steps.
ARA909
Figure 40: Electric Motor Starting Screen
6.
Complete an After Start Inspection (see page 67) for
Compressor Oil, Pre-Cooling and Defrost.
70
Operating Instructions
5.
If the microprocessor determines that the unit should cool
or heat, the motor start screen appears as shown below.
The preheat buzzer sounds for 20 seconds before the
electric motor starts. It may not start if the return air sensor
temperature is within a few degrees of setpoint. The
electric motor cycles on and off in CYCLE-SENTRY
Mode and runs continuously in Continuous Mode.
ELECTRIC MOTOR STARTING
ARA909
Figure 40: Electric Motor Starting Screen
6.
70
Complete an After Start Inspection (see page 67) for
Compressor Oil, Pre-Cooling and Defrost.
Unit Fails to Start
If the electric motor does not start and the Alarm Icon appears
on the display, take the following steps.
1.
Check for and correct any alarm conditions. See “Viewing
and Clearing Alarms Screen Sequence” on page 100.
2.
Clear all alarms. See “Viewing and Clearing Alarms
Screen Sequence” on page 100.
3.
Press the OFF key.
4.
Press the ON key.
5.
If the unit still does not start, repeat the above steps.
Operating Instructions
Switching from Diesel to Electric
Units equipped with the Electric Standby option only.
If NO is selected, then the unit will continue to operate in
Diesel Mode. If YES is selected then the display will briefly
show the screen in Figure 42.
If the Diesel to Electric Autoswitch Enabled feature in
Guarded Access is set YES then the unit will automatically
switch to Electric Mode operation when standby power is
connected and available.
If the Diesel to Electric Autoswitch Enabled feature in
Guarded Access is set NO, then the prompt screen shown
below will appear when standby power is connected and
available.
Figure 42: Programming Electric Standby Screen
Electric Mode operation will briefly be confirmed. If unit
operation is required the electric motor will start as shown in
“Starting the Unit on Electric Standby Operation” on page 69.
Figure 41: Electric Standby Detected Screen
If the Diesel to Electric Autoswitch Enabled feature in
Guarded Access is set NO then the unit can also be switched
from Diesel mode to Electric mode operation using the Electric
Standby Selection as shown in “Electric Standby/Diesel Mode”
on page 126.
71
Operating Instructions
Switching from Diesel to Electric
Units equipped with the Electric Standby option only.
If NO is selected, then the unit will continue to operate in
Diesel Mode. If YES is selected then the display will briefly
show the screen in Figure 42.
If the Diesel to Electric Autoswitch Enabled feature in
Guarded Access is set YES then the unit will automatically
switch to Electric Mode operation when standby power is
connected and available.
If the Diesel to Electric Autoswitch Enabled feature in
Guarded Access is set NO, then the prompt screen shown
below will appear when standby power is connected and
available.
Figure 42: Programming Electric Standby Screen
Electric Mode operation will briefly be confirmed. If unit
operation is required the electric motor will start as shown in
“Starting the Unit on Electric Standby Operation” on page 69.
Figure 41: Electric Standby Detected Screen
If the Diesel to Electric Autoswitch Enabled feature in
Guarded Access is set NO then the unit can also be switched
from Diesel mode to Electric mode operation using the Electric
Standby Selection as shown in “Electric Standby/Diesel Mode”
on page 126.
71
Operating Instructions
Switching from Electric to Diesel
Units equipped with the Electric Standby option only.
If the Electric to Diesel Autoswitch Enabled feature in
Guarded Access is set YES then the unit will automatically
switch to Diesel Mode operation when standby power is turned
off or is no longer available.
If the Electric to Diesel Autoswitch Enabled feature in
Guarded Access is set NO and standby power is disconnected
or fails, the unit will not automatically switch to Diesel mode.
This is primarily designed to prevent unauthorized diesel
engine starts when the truck is indoors or on a ferry where
engine operation is strictly prohibited. If the Electric to Diesel
Autoswitch Enabled feature in Guarded Access is set NO then
the prompt screen shown in Figure 43 will appear when
standby power is turned off or is no longer available.
ELECTRIC STANDBY UNDETECTED
DO YOU WISH TO SWITCH TO
DIESEL?
YES
NO
ARA910
Figure 43: Electric Standby Undetected Screen
If YES is selected then the display will briefly show the screen
below.
PROGRAMMING DIESEL MODE
PLEASE WAIT
ARA911
Figure 44: Programming Diesel Mode Screen
Diesel Mode operation will briefly be confirmed. If unit
operation is required the diesel engine will start as shown in
“Starting the Diesel Engine” on page 66.
72
Operating Instructions
Switching from Electric to Diesel
Units equipped with the Electric Standby option only.
If the Electric to Diesel Autoswitch Enabled feature in
Guarded Access is set YES then the unit will automatically
switch to Diesel Mode operation when standby power is turned
off or is no longer available.
If the Electric to Diesel Autoswitch Enabled feature in
Guarded Access is set NO and standby power is disconnected
or fails, the unit will not automatically switch to Diesel mode.
This is primarily designed to prevent unauthorized diesel
engine starts when the truck is indoors or on a ferry where
engine operation is strictly prohibited. If the Electric to Diesel
Autoswitch Enabled feature in Guarded Access is set NO then
the prompt screen shown in Figure 43 will appear when
standby power is turned off or is no longer available.
ELECTRIC STANDBY UNDETECTED
DO YOU WISH TO SWITCH TO
DIESEL?
YES
NO
ARA910
Figure 43: Electric Standby Undetected Screen
If YES is selected then the display will briefly show the screen
below.
PROGRAMMING DIESEL MODE
PLEASE WAIT
ARA911
Figure 44: Programming Diesel Mode Screen
Diesel Mode operation will briefly be confirmed. If unit
operation is required the diesel engine will start as shown in
“Starting the Diesel Engine” on page 66.
72
Operating Instructions
If the Electric to Diesel Autoswitch Enabled feature in
Guarded Access is set NO then the unit can also be switched
from Diesel mode to Electric mode operation using the Diesel
Selection as shown in “Navigating the Main Menu” on
page 91.
73
Operating Instructions
If the Electric to Diesel Autoswitch Enabled feature in
Guarded Access is set NO then the unit can also be switched
from Diesel mode to Electric mode operation using the Diesel
Selection as shown in “Navigating the Main Menu” on
page 91.
73
Operating Instructions
Changing the Setpoint
4.
To change the setpoint complete the following steps.
1
NOTE: If the SETPOINT soft key (far left) displays PRODUCT
or PRODUCT/SETPOINT, the Base Controller has been
programmed with OptiSet Plus temperature profiles. See
“OptiSet Plus” on page 132 for information about selecting
or changing the named product or the setpoint.
1.
Begin at the Standard Display.
If the Temperature Watch Display is showing, press the
MENU soft key once to return to the Standard Display.
2.
Press the SETPOINT soft key on the Standard Display. See
Figure 45. The “Setpoint” Screen briefly appears, then the
“Current Setpoint” Screen appears. See Figure 46.
3.
Press the + or - soft keys to change the setpoint reading.
See Figure 46.
NOTE: If the setpoint is changed using the "+" or "-"
keys, the change must be confirmed or rejected by
pressing the YES or NO soft key within 10 seconds of
changing the setpoint. A warning beep will sound for 5
seconds as a reminder.
Press the YES or NO soft key accordingly as described
below. See Figure 46.
2
1.
Standard Display
2.
Setpoint Soft Key
Figure 45: Changing Setpoint
•
If the NO key is pressed the setpoint change made with the
“+” or “-” soft keys will not be accepted, the setpoint will
not be changed and the display will return to the Standard
Display.
•
If the YES soft key is pressed, the setpoint change made
with the “+” or “-” soft keys will be accepted, and display
screens will appear as shown in Figure 46.
4.
Press the YES or NO soft key accordingly as described
below. See Figure 46.
74
Operating Instructions
Changing the Setpoint
To change the setpoint complete the following steps.
1
NOTE: If the SETPOINT soft key (far left) displays PRODUCT
or PRODUCT/SETPOINT, the Base Controller has been
programmed with OptiSet Plus temperature profiles. See
“OptiSet Plus” on page 132 for information about selecting
or changing the named product or the setpoint.
1.
Begin at the Standard Display.
If the Temperature Watch Display is showing, press the
MENU soft key once to return to the Standard Display.
2.
Press the SETPOINT soft key on the Standard Display. See
Figure 45. The “Setpoint” Screen briefly appears, then the
“Current Setpoint” Screen appears. See Figure 46.
3.
Press the + or - soft keys to change the setpoint reading.
See Figure 46.
NOTE: If the setpoint is changed using the "+" or "-"
keys, the change must be confirmed or rejected by
pressing the YES or NO soft key within 10 seconds of
changing the setpoint. A warning beep will sound for 5
seconds as a reminder.
74
2
1.
Standard Display
2.
Setpoint Soft Key
Figure 45: Changing Setpoint
•
If the NO key is pressed the setpoint change made with the
“+” or “-” soft keys will not be accepted, the setpoint will
not be changed and the display will return to the Standard
Display.
•
If the YES soft key is pressed, the setpoint change made
with the “+” or “-” soft keys will be accepted, and display
screens will appear as shown in Figure 46.
Operating Instructions
•
If the YES or NO key is not pressed within 10 seconds of
making a change with the "+" or "-" key, the setpoint is not
changed and the display returns to the Setpoint Display.
The display briefly shows [SETPOINT NOT CHANGED]
and Alarm Code 127 Setpoint Not Entered is set, to
indicate that the setpoint change was started but not
completed.
5.
The “Programming New Setpoint” Screen will appear. See
Figure 46.
6.
The “New Setpoint Is XX” Screen briefly appears. See
Figure 46.
7.
The Standard Display appears with setpoint changed to the
new setpoint. See Figure 46.
75
Operating Instructions
•
If the YES or NO key is not pressed within 10 seconds of
making a change with the "+" or "-" key, the setpoint is not
changed and the display returns to the Setpoint Display.
The display briefly shows [SETPOINT NOT CHANGED]
and Alarm Code 127 Setpoint Not Entered is set, to
indicate that the setpoint change was started but not
completed.
5.
The “Programming New Setpoint” Screen will appear. See
Figure 46.
6.
The “New Setpoint Is XX” Screen briefly appears. See
Figure 46.
7.
The Standard Display appears with setpoint changed to the
new setpoint. See Figure 46.
75
Operating Instructions
If YES Key was pressed
If NO Key was pressed
SETPOINT Key
+ or – Key
YES or NO Key
Figure 46: Changing the Setpoint Screen Sequence
76
Operating Instructions
If YES Key was pressed
SETPOINT Key
+ or – Key
YES or NO Key
Figure 46: Changing the Setpoint Screen Sequence
76
If NO Key was pressed
Operating Instructions
Selection of Operating Modes
The Thermo King CYCLE-SENTRY system is designed to
save refrigeration fuel costs. The savings vary with the
commodity, ambient temperatures and trailer insulation.
However, not all temperature controlled products can be
properly transported using CYCLE-SENTRY operation.
Certain highly sensitive products normally require continuous
air circulation.Use the following guidelines to select the proper
operating mode to protect the commodity you are transporting.
Examples of products normally acceptable for
CYCLE-SENTRY Operation:
•
Frozen foods (in adequately insulated trailers)
•
Boxed or processed meats Poultry
•
Fish
•
Dairy products
•
Candy
•
Chemicals
•
Film
•
All non-edible products.
Examples of products normally requiring Continuous Run
Operation for air flow:
•
Fresh fruits and vegetables, especially asparagus,
bananas, broccoli, carrots, citrus, green peas, lettuce,
peaches, spinach, strawberries, sweet corn, etc.
•
Non-processed meat products (unless pre-cooled to
recommended temperature).
•
Fresh flowers and foliage.
The above listings are not all inclusive. Consult your grower or
shipper if you have any questions about the operating mode
selection of your type of load.
IMPORTANT: If OptiSet Plus is in use, it may not be possible
to change the Mode.
77
Operating Instructions
Selection of Operating Modes
The Thermo King CYCLE-SENTRY system is designed to
save refrigeration fuel costs. The savings vary with the
commodity, ambient temperatures and trailer insulation.
However, not all temperature controlled products can be
properly transported using CYCLE-SENTRY operation.
Certain highly sensitive products normally require continuous
air circulation.Use the following guidelines to select the proper
operating mode to protect the commodity you are transporting.
Examples of products normally acceptable for
CYCLE-SENTRY Operation:
•
Frozen foods (in adequately insulated trailers)
•
Boxed or processed meats Poultry
•
Fish
•
Dairy products
•
Candy
•
Chemicals
•
Film
•
All non-edible products.
Examples of products normally requiring Continuous Run
Operation for air flow:
•
Fresh fruits and vegetables, especially asparagus,
bananas, broccoli, carrots, citrus, green peas, lettuce,
peaches, spinach, strawberries, sweet corn, etc.
•
Non-processed meat products (unless pre-cooled to
recommended temperature).
•
Fresh flowers and foliage.
The above listings are not all inclusive. Consult your grower or
shipper if you have any questions about the operating mode
selection of your type of load.
IMPORTANT: If OptiSet Plus is in use, it may not be possible
to change the Mode.
77
Operating Instructions
Selecting CYCLE-SENTRY or
Continuous Mode
1
2
When CYCLE-SENTRY mode is selected the unit will start
and stop automatically to maintain the setpoint, keep the
engine warm, and the battery charged. When Continuous mode
is selected, the unit will start automatically and run
continuously to maintain setpoint and provide constant airflow.
If the unit is operating in Cycle Sentry Mode, the Cycle Sentry
Icon will be present in the upper right corner of the display as
shown in Figure 47. If the Cycle Sentry Icon is not present the
unit is operating in Continuous Mode.
IMPORTANT: If OptiSet Plus is in use, it may not be possible
to change the Mode.
1.
CYCLE-SENTRY Icon Shows Mode Selected
Displayed for CYCLE-SENTRY Mode
Not Displayed for Continuous Mode
2.
CYCLE SENTRY/Continuous Mode Key
Figure 47: Changing Mode
Complete the following steps to change modes:
NOTE: The mode can also be changed using the Mode Menu
Screen in the Main Menu. See “Turning CYCLE-SENTRY
On or Off” on page 112.
2.
The “Programming Continuous Mode” or “Programming
CYCLE-SENTRY Mode” Screen briefly appears. See
Figure 48 and Figure 49.
Press the CYCLE SENTRY/CONTINUOUS MODE key. See
Figure 47.
3.
The “New System Mode is Continuous” Screen or the
“New System Mode CYCLE-SENTRY” Screen briefly
appears. See Figure 48 and Figure 49.
1.
78
Operating Instructions
Selecting CYCLE-SENTRY or
Continuous Mode
1
2
When CYCLE-SENTRY mode is selected the unit will start
and stop automatically to maintain the setpoint, keep the
engine warm, and the battery charged. When Continuous mode
is selected, the unit will start automatically and run
continuously to maintain setpoint and provide constant airflow.
If the unit is operating in Cycle Sentry Mode, the Cycle Sentry
Icon will be present in the upper right corner of the display as
shown in Figure 47. If the Cycle Sentry Icon is not present the
unit is operating in Continuous Mode.
IMPORTANT: If OptiSet Plus is in use, it may not be possible
to change the Mode.
1.
CYCLE-SENTRY Icon Shows Mode Selected
Displayed for CYCLE-SENTRY Mode
Not Displayed for Continuous Mode
2.
CYCLE SENTRY/Continuous Mode Key
Figure 47: Changing Mode
Complete the following steps to change modes:
NOTE: The mode can also be changed using the Mode Menu
Screen in the Main Menu. See “Turning CYCLE-SENTRY
On or Off” on page 112.
2.
The “Programming Continuous Mode” or “Programming
CYCLE-SENTRY Mode” Screen briefly appears. See
Figure 48 and Figure 49.
Press the CYCLE SENTRY/CONTINUOUS MODE key. See
Figure 47.
3.
The “New System Mode is Continuous” Screen or the
“New System Mode CYCLE-SENTRY” Screen briefly
appears. See Figure 48 and Figure 49.
1.
78
Operating Instructions
4.
The Standard Display appears showing the new mode. See
Figure 48 and Figure 49.
5.
Press the CYCLE SENTRY/CONTINUOUS MODE key
again to change the unit back to the previous mode.
IMPORTANT: If the unit is in Cycle Sentry null and the
mode is switched to Continuous Mode, the unit will start
automatically.
NOTE: Cycle Sentry or Continuous mode may be disabled by
OptiSet Plus.
Figure 48: Screen Sequence for Changing from
CYCLE-SENTRY Mode to Continuous Mode
79
Operating Instructions
4.
The Standard Display appears showing the new mode. See
Figure 48 and Figure 49.
5.
Press the CYCLE SENTRY/CONTINUOUS MODE key
again to change the unit back to the previous mode.
IMPORTANT: If the unit is in Cycle Sentry null and the
mode is switched to Continuous Mode, the unit will start
automatically.
NOTE: Cycle Sentry or Continuous mode may be disabled by
OptiSet Plus.
Figure 48: Screen Sequence for Changing from
CYCLE-SENTRY Mode to Continuous Mode
79
Operating Instructions
Figure 49: Screen Sequence for Changing from
Continuous Mode to CYCLE-SENTRY Mode
80
Operating Instructions
Figure 49: Screen Sequence for Changing from
Continuous Mode to CYCLE-SENTRY Mode
80
Operating Instructions
Initiating a Manual Defrost Cycle
Defrost cycles are usually initiated automatically based on time
or temperature. Manual Defrost is also available if the unit is
running and the coil temperature is less than 45 F (7 C).
1
2
Other features such as door switch settings may not allow
Manual Defrost to be initiated.
Use the following steps to initiate a Manual Defrost:
1.
Press the DEFROST key. See Figure 50.
2.
The “Defrost” Screen briefly appears. See Figure 51.
1.
Standard Display
3.
The “Programming Defrost” Screen briefly appears. See
Figure 51.
2.
Defrost Key
4.
Figure 50: Initiating a Manual Defrost Cycle
The “Defrost Started” Screen briefly appears. See Figure
51.
81
Operating Instructions
Initiating a Manual Defrost Cycle
Defrost cycles are usually initiated automatically based on time
or temperature. Manual Defrost is also available if the unit is
running and the coil temperature is less than 45 F (7 C).
1
2
Other features such as door switch settings may not allow
Manual Defrost to be initiated.
Use the following steps to initiate a Manual Defrost:
1.
Press the DEFROST key. See Figure 50.
2.
The “Defrost” Screen briefly appears. See Figure 51.
1.
Standard Display
3.
The “Programming Defrost” Screen briefly appears. See
Figure 51.
2.
Defrost Key
4.
Figure 50: Initiating a Manual Defrost Cycle
The “Defrost Started” Screen briefly appears. See Figure
51.
81
Operating Instructions
5.
A modified Standard Display appears. The bar indicator
will fill in showing time remaining to complete the
Defrost cycle. The bar indicator in the figure shows that
the Defrost cycle is 50% complete. When the Defrost
cycle is complete the display returns to the Standard
Display. See Figure 51.
The unit may be prevented from going into a Manual
Defrost. For example, this can occur if the coil
temperature is more than 45 F (7 C). If defrost is not
available, the “Defrost Not Available” message will
appear and the display will return to the Standard Display.
See Figure 51.
or
Figure 51: Initiating Manual Defrost Screen Sequence
82
Operating Instructions
5.
A modified Standard Display appears. The bar indicator
will fill in showing time remaining to complete the
Defrost cycle. The bar indicator in the figure shows that
the Defrost cycle is 50% complete. When the Defrost
cycle is complete the display returns to the Standard
Display. See Figure 51.
The unit may be prevented from going into a Manual
Defrost. For example, this can occur if the coil
temperature is more than 45 F (7 C). If defrost is not
available, the “Defrost Not Available” message will
appear and the display will return to the Standard Display.
See Figure 51.
or
Figure 51: Initiating Manual Defrost Screen Sequence
82
Operating Instructions
Terminating a Defrost Cycle
The Defrost cycle will terminate automatically when the coil
temperature reaches 58 F (14 C), or when the defrost timer
expires. The defrost timer is normally set for 45 minutes, but
can be set for 30 minutes. Defrost can also be terminated by
turning the unit off.
NOTE: If the defrost timer consistently terminates Defrost
because the evaporator coil temperature fails to reach 58 F
(14 C), have the unit checked by a Thermo King dealer to see
if it is working properly.
83
Operating Instructions
Terminating a Defrost Cycle
The Defrost cycle will terminate automatically when the coil
temperature reaches 58 F (14 C), or when the defrost timer
expires. The defrost timer is normally set for 45 minutes, but
can be set for 30 minutes. Defrost can also be terminated by
turning the unit off.
NOTE: If the defrost timer consistently terminates Defrost
because the evaporator coil temperature fails to reach 58 F
(14 C), have the unit checked by a Thermo King dealer to see
if it is working properly.
83
Operating Instructions
Viewing Gauge Readings
Use the following steps to view the gauge readings:
1.
Begin at the Standard Display.
If the Temperature Watch Display is showing, press the
MENU soft key once to return to the Standard Display.
2.
Press the GAUGES soft key to enter the Gauges Menu. See
Figure 52.
3.
Press BACK or NEXT soft keys to scroll through available
gauges:
Gauges Available
Coolant Temperature: Displays the temperature of the
engine coolant.
Coolant Level: Displays the coolant level in the overflow
tank.
Oil Pressure: Displays the engine oil pressure as OK or
LOW.
Oil Level: Displays the engine oil level as OK or LOW.
Amps: Displays the current flow in amps flowing to or from
the unit battery
Battery Voltage: Displays the voltage of the unit battery.
Engine RPM: Displays the engine speed in RPMs.
Fuel Level Sensor: Displays the fuel level if a fuel level
sensor is installed.
Discharge Pressure: Displays the unit discharge pressure.
(ETV units only)
Suction Pressure: Displays the unit suction pressure. (ETV
units only)
ETV Position: Displays the current position of the ETV
valve. (ETV units only)
I/O (Input/Output State): Displays the current state of the
input/output devices listed below.
•
High Speed Relay/Electric Heat as ON or OFF
•
Run Relay
•
Run Relay Feedback
•
Alternator Excite Output
84
Operating Instructions
Viewing Gauge Readings
Use the following steps to view the gauge readings:
1.
Begin at the Standard Display.
If the Temperature Watch Display is showing, press the
MENU soft key once to return to the Standard Display.
2.
Press the GAUGES soft key to enter the Gauges Menu. See
Figure 52.
3.
Press BACK or NEXT soft keys to scroll through available
gauges:
Gauges Available
Coolant Temperature: Displays the temperature of the
engine coolant.
Coolant Level: Displays the coolant level in the overflow
tank.
Oil Pressure: Displays the engine oil pressure as OK or
LOW.
Oil Level: Displays the engine oil level as OK or LOW.
84
Amps: Displays the current flow in amps flowing to or from
the unit battery
Battery Voltage: Displays the voltage of the unit battery.
Engine RPM: Displays the engine speed in RPMs.
Fuel Level Sensor: Displays the fuel level if a fuel level
sensor is installed.
Discharge Pressure: Displays the unit discharge pressure.
(ETV units only)
Suction Pressure: Displays the unit suction pressure. (ETV
units only)
ETV Position: Displays the current position of the ETV
valve. (ETV units only)
I/O (Input/Output State): Displays the current state of the
input/output devices listed below.
•
High Speed Relay/Electric Heat as ON or OFF
•
Run Relay
•
Run Relay Feedback
•
Alternator Excite Output
Operating Instructions
•
Defrost Damper
•
Heat Output
•
Alternator Frequency
•
Diesel/Electric Relay (Model 50 units only)
•
Electric Ready Input (Model 50 units only)
•
Electric overload (Model 50 units only)
•
Hot Gas Bypass (ETV units only)
5.
Press the EXIT soft key to return to the Standard Display.
1
Selecting I/O enters a group of screens that are used only
by technicians. See Figure 53. If no keys are pressed
within 30 seconds, the screen will return to the standard
display.
2
NOTE: Units without an Electronic Throttling Valve
(ETV) will not display the Discharge Pressure, Suction
Pressure, and ETV Position. See “Electronic Throttling
Valve” on page 36 for more information about the ETV
and how to tell if the unit has an ETV.
4.
1.
Standard Display Screen
2.
Gauges Soft Key
Figure 52: Viewing Gauges
Press the LOCK soft key to display any Gauge Screen for
an indefinite period. Press the key again to unlock the
screen.
85
Operating Instructions
•
Defrost Damper
•
Heat Output
•
Alternator Frequency
•
Diesel/Electric Relay (Model 50 units only)
•
Electric Ready Input (Model 50 units only)
•
Electric overload (Model 50 units only)
•
Hot Gas Bypass (ETV units only)
Selecting I/O enters a group of screens that are used only
by technicians. See Figure 53. If no keys are pressed
within 30 seconds, the screen will return to the standard
display.
NOTE: Units without an Electronic Throttling Valve
(ETV) will not display the Discharge Pressure, Suction
Pressure, and ETV Position. See “Electronic Throttling
Valve” on page 36 for more information about the ETV
and how to tell if the unit has an ETV.
4.
5.
Press the EXIT soft key to return to the Standard Display.
1
2
1.
Standard Display Screen
2.
Gauges Soft Key
Figure 52: Viewing Gauges
Press the LOCK soft key to display any Gauge Screen for
an indefinite period. Press the key again to unlock the
screen.
85
Operating Instructions
BACK Key
BACK Key
BACK Key
NEXT Key
BACK Key
NEXT Key
BACK Key
NEXT Key
BACK Key
NEXT Key
BACK Key
NEXT Key
BACK Key
NEXT Key
BACK Key
NEXT Key
BACK Key
NEXT Key
BACK Key
NEXT Key
NEXT Key
NEXT Key
(Device Screens Not Shown)
Figure 53: Viewing Gauges Screen Sequence
86
Operating Instructions
BACK Key
BACK Key
BACK Key
NEXT Key
BACK Key
NEXT Key
BACK Key
NEXT Key
BACK Key
NEXT Key
BACK Key
NEXT Key
BACK Key
NEXT Key
BACK Key
NEXT Key
BACK Key
NEXT Key
BACK Key
NEXT Key
NEXT Key
NEXT Key
(Device Screens Not Shown)
Figure 53: Viewing Gauges Screen Sequence
86
Operating Instructions
Viewing Sensor Readings
3.
Use the following steps to view the sensor readings.
1.
Begin at the Standard Display.
If the Temperature Watch Display is showing, press the
MENU soft key once to return to the Standard Display.
2.
Press the SENSOR soft key to enter the Sensor Menu. See
Figure 54.
Press the BACK or NEXT soft keys to scroll through the
sensor screens. Pressing the LOCK key will lock the
current sensor on the display. (Figure 55)
1
Figure 55: NEXT, BACK, LOCK Keys
Sensors Available
Control Return Air Temperature - Displays the temperature of
the control return air sensor.
2
1.
Standard Display
2.
Sensors Soft Key
Display Return Air Temperature - Displays the temperature of
the display return air sensor.
Control Discharge Air Temperature - Displays the temperature
of the control discharge air sensor.
Figure 54: Viewing Sensors
87
Operating Instructions
Viewing Sensor Readings
Use the following steps to view the sensor readings.
1.
Begin at the Standard Display.
If the Temperature Watch Display is showing, press the
MENU soft key once to return to the Standard Display.
2.
Press the SENSOR soft key to enter the Sensor Menu. See
Figure 54.
3.
Press the BACK or NEXT soft keys to scroll through the
sensor screens. Pressing the LOCK key will lock the
current sensor on the display. (Figure 55)
1
Figure 55: NEXT, BACK, LOCK Keys
Sensors Available
Control Return Air Temperature - Displays the temperature of
the control return air sensor.
2
1.
Standard Display
2.
Sensors Soft Key
Display Return Air Temperature - Displays the temperature of
the display return air sensor.
Control Discharge Air Temperature - Displays the temperature
of the control discharge air sensor.
Figure 54: Viewing Sensors
87
Operating Instructions
Display Discharge Air Temperature - Displays the temperature
of the display discharge air sensor.
Datalogger Sensor 5 Temperature - Displays the temperature of
the CargoWatch Data Logger temperature sensor 5.
Temperature Differential - Displays the calculated difference
between the control return air sensor and the control discharge
air sensor.
Datalogger Sensor 6 Temperature - Displays the temperature of
the CargoWatch Data Logger temperature sensor 6.
Evaporator Coil Temperature - Displays the temperature of the
evaporator coil sensor.
Ambient Air Temperature - Displays the temperature of the
ambient air sensor.
Spare 1 Temperature - Displays the temperature of the spare 1
temperature sensor.
Log Sensor 1 - Displays the temperature of the CargoWatch
Data Logger temperature sensor 1.
Board Temperature Sensor - Displays the internal temperature
of the HMI Control Panel pc board. The Base Controller will
turn the HMI display heater on if this temperature goes below a
certain point in extremely cold ambient temperatures.
See Figure 56 and Figure 57. If no keys are pressed within 30
seconds, the screen will return to the Standard Display.
4.
Press the LOCK soft key to display any sensor screen for an
indefinite period. Press the key again to unlock the screen.
5.
Press the EXIT soft key to return to the Standard Display.
Log Sensor 2 - Displays the temperature of the CargoWatch
Data Logger temperature sensor 2.
Datalogger Sensor 3 Temperature - Displays the temperature of
the CargoWatch Data Logger temperature sensor 3.
Datalogger Sensor 4 Temperature - Displays the temperature of
the CargoWatch Data Logger temperature sensor 4.
88
Operating Instructions
Display Discharge Air Temperature - Displays the temperature
of the display discharge air sensor.
Datalogger Sensor 5 Temperature - Displays the temperature of
the CargoWatch Data Logger temperature sensor 5.
Temperature Differential - Displays the calculated difference
between the control return air sensor and the control discharge
air sensor.
Datalogger Sensor 6 Temperature - Displays the temperature of
the CargoWatch Data Logger temperature sensor 6.
Evaporator Coil Temperature - Displays the temperature of the
evaporator coil sensor.
Ambient Air Temperature - Displays the temperature of the
ambient air sensor.
Spare 1 Temperature - Displays the temperature of the spare 1
temperature sensor.
Log Sensor 1 - Displays the temperature of the CargoWatch
Data Logger temperature sensor 1.
Log Sensor 2 - Displays the temperature of the CargoWatch
Data Logger temperature sensor 2.
Datalogger Sensor 3 Temperature - Displays the temperature of
the CargoWatch Data Logger temperature sensor 3.
Datalogger Sensor 4 Temperature - Displays the temperature of
the CargoWatch Data Logger temperature sensor 4.
88
Board Temperature Sensor - Displays the internal temperature
of the HMI Control Panel pc board. The Base Controller will
turn the HMI display heater on if this temperature goes below a
certain point in extremely cold ambient temperatures.
See Figure 56 and Figure 57. If no keys are pressed within 30
seconds, the screen will return to the Standard Display.
4.
Press the LOCK soft key to display any sensor screen for an
indefinite period. Press the key again to unlock the screen.
5.
Press the EXIT soft key to return to the Standard Display.
Operating Instructions
BACK Key
SENSORS Key
BACK Key
BACK Key
NEXT Key
BACK Key
NEXT Key
BACK Key
NEXT Key
BACK Key
NEXT Key
NEXT Key
NEXT Key
NEXT Key
Continued on next page
Figure 56: Viewing Sensors Screen Sequence (continued on next page)
89
Operating Instructions
BACK Key
SENSORS Key
NEXT Key
BACK Key
BACK Key
NEXT Key
BACK Key
NEXT Key
BACK Key
NEXT Key
BACK Key
NEXT Key
NEXT Key
NEXT Key
Continued on next page
Figure 56: Viewing Sensors Screen Sequence (continued on next page)
89
Operating Instructions
Continued from previous page
BACK Key
BACK Key
BACK Key
BACK Key
NEXT Key
BACK Key
NEXT Key
BACK Key
NEXT Key
BACK Key
NEXT Key
NEXT Key
BACK Key
NEXT Key
NEXT Key
Figure 57: Viewing Sensors Screen Sequence (continued from previous page)
90
Operating Instructions
Continued from previous page
BACK Key
BACK Key
BACK Key
BACK Key
NEXT Key
BACK Key
NEXT Key
BACK Key
NEXT Key
BACK Key
NEXT Key
NEXT Key
BACK Key
NEXT Key
Figure 57: Viewing Sensors Screen Sequence (continued from previous page)
90
NEXT Key
Operating Instructions
Navigating the Main Menu
The Main Menu contains several additional submenus that
allow the operator to view information and modify unit
operation. Use the following steps to access these menu areas:
1.
Begin at the Standard Display.
If the Temperature Watch Display is showing, press the
MENU soft key once to return to the Standard Display.
2.
Press the MENU soft key. See Figure 58.
3.
Press NEXT and BACK soft keys to scroll up or down
through the main menu areas. See Figure 58 and Figure
59.
4.
Press the SELECT soft key to access a specific menu area
when shown on the display screen. See Figure 58.
5.
Press the EXIT soft key. To return to the Standard Display.
The Main Menu choices are shown on the next page. For
detailed information on each menu area, see the individual
explanations of each menu item on the following pages of
this manual.
1
5
4
3
2
1.
Menu Soft Key
4.
Select Soft Key
2.
Next Soft Key
5.
Exit Soft Key
3.
Back Soft Key
Figure 58: Accessing Main Menu
91
Operating Instructions
Navigating the Main Menu
The Main Menu contains several additional submenus that
allow the operator to view information and modify unit
operation. Use the following steps to access these menu areas:
1.
Begin at the Standard Display.
If the Temperature Watch Display is showing, press the
MENU soft key once to return to the Standard Display.
2.
Press the MENU soft key. See Figure 58.
3.
Press NEXT and BACK soft keys to scroll up or down
through the main menu areas. See Figure 58 and Figure
59.
4.
Press the SELECT soft key to access a specific menu area
when shown on the display screen. See Figure 58.
5.
Press the EXIT soft key. To return to the Standard Display.
The Main Menu choices are shown on the next page. For
detailed information on each menu area, see the individual
explanations of each menu item on the following pages of
this manual.
1
5
4
3
2
1.
Menu Soft Key
4.
Select Soft Key
2.
Next Soft Key
5.
Exit Soft Key
3.
Back Soft Key
Figure 58: Accessing Main Menu
91
Operating Instructions
LANGUAGE
Does not appear unless more than
one language activated.
Main Menu Choices
DATALOGGER
1. Language Menu: This menu only appears if the Base
Controller is programmed to activate more than one language.
It allows the operator to select which language is used. All
other subsequent displays are shown in the selected language.
English is the default language. See page 94.
HOURMETERS
2. Alarms Menu: Shows any active alarms and allows
alarms to be cleared. See page 97.
ALARMS
3. Datalogger Menu: Allows the operator to view the
datalogger displays. See page 101.
MODE
4. Hourmeters Menu: If enabled, allows the operator to
view the hourmeter displays. See page 107.
PRETRIP
ELECTRIC STANDBY/DIESEL Does not appear on Model 30 units.
ADJUST BRIGHTNESS
5. Mode Menu: Allows the operator to change unit operating
modes between CYCLE-SENTRY mode and Continuous Run
mode, select Keypad Lockout, and start Sleep mode. See
page 110.
6. Pretrip: Allows the operator to run a Pretrip. See page 120.
TIME
Figure 59: Main Menu Choices
92
Operating Instructions
LANGUAGE
Does not appear unless more than
one language activated.
DATALOGGER
1. Language Menu: This menu only appears if the Base
Controller is programmed to activate more than one language.
It allows the operator to select which language is used. All
other subsequent displays are shown in the selected language.
English is the default language. See page 94.
HOURMETERS
2. Alarms Menu: Shows any active alarms and allows
alarms to be cleared. See page 97.
ALARMS
MODE
PRETRIP
ELECTRIC STANDBY/DIESEL Does not appear on Model 30 units.
ADJUST BRIGHTNESS
TIME
Figure 59: Main Menu Choices
92
Main Menu Choices
3. Datalogger Menu: Allows the operator to view the
datalogger displays. See page 101.
4. Hourmeters Menu: If enabled, allows the operator to
view the hourmeter displays. See page 107.
5. Mode Menu: Allows the operator to change unit operating
modes between CYCLE-SENTRY mode and Continuous Run
mode, select Keypad Lockout, and start Sleep mode. See
page 110.
6. Pretrip: Allows the operator to run a Pretrip. See page 120.
Operating Instructions
7. Electric Standby/Diesel Mode (Model 50 Only): This
menu only appears on Model 50 units. It allows the operator to
manually select Electric Standby or Diesel operation. See
page 126.
8. Adjust Brightness: Allows the operator to adjust the
display intensity as required by conditions. See page 128.
9. Time: Allows the operator to view the Time and Date. The
Time is displayed in 24 hour military time. See page 131.
93
Operating Instructions
7. Electric Standby/Diesel Mode (Model 50 Only): This
menu only appears on Model 50 units. It allows the operator to
manually select Electric Standby or Diesel operation. See
page 126.
8. Adjust Brightness: Allows the operator to adjust the
display intensity as required by conditions. See page 128.
9. Time: Allows the operator to view the Time and Date. The
Time is displayed in 24 hour military time. See page 131.
93
Operating Instructions
Language Menu
If the Language feature is enabled, an alternate language can be
selected from the Language Menu. After a new language is
chosen all displays will appear in that language. If the language
feature is not enabled this menu does not appear. The default
language is English. Only languages that have been enabled in
Guarded Access will appear.
IMPORTANT: Exercise care when changing languages, as
once changed all HMI Control panel displays will be in the
new language. If the user is not familiar with the new
language, problems may be experienced returning to the
default language.
•
Software Revision 67xx supports English, Japanese and
Chinese.
•
Software Revision 68xx supports English, English and
Spanish or allows any 5 languages from Software
Revision 65xx and Software Revision 66xx to be selected.
Note that Japanese and Chinese are not available for use
with this feature.
Other than the languages supported, software revisions 65xx,
66xx, 67xx and 68xx are identical.
To select an alternate language:
1.
NOTE: If the Temperature Watch Display is showing,
press the MENU soft key once to return to the Standard
Display.
The languages available are dependent on the HMI control
panel software revision.
•
Software Revision 65xx supports English, Spanish,
French, German, Italian, Dutch, Portuguese, Greek,
Turkish, Hebrew and Arabic.
•
Software Revision 66xx supports English, Danish,
Russian, Norwegian, Swedish, Finnish, Polish, Hungarian,
Romanian, Bulgarian and Czech.
Begin at the Standard Display.
2.
Press the MENU soft key on the Standard Display. See
Figure 60.
•
Software Revision 67xx supports English, Japanese and
Chinese.
•
Software Revision 68xx supports English, English and
Spanish or allows any 5 languages from Software
Revision 65xx and Software Revision 66xx to be selected.
Note that Japanese and Chinese are not available for use
with this feature.
94
Operating Instructions
Language Menu
If the Language feature is enabled, an alternate language can be
selected from the Language Menu. After a new language is
chosen all displays will appear in that language. If the language
feature is not enabled this menu does not appear. The default
language is English. Only languages that have been enabled in
Guarded Access will appear.
IMPORTANT: Exercise care when changing languages, as
once changed all HMI Control panel displays will be in the
new language. If the user is not familiar with the new
language, problems may be experienced returning to the
default language.
Other than the languages supported, software revisions 65xx,
66xx, 67xx and 68xx are identical.
To select an alternate language:
1.
NOTE: If the Temperature Watch Display is showing,
press the MENU soft key once to return to the Standard
Display.
The languages available are dependent on the HMI control
panel software revision.
•
Software Revision 65xx supports English, Spanish,
French, German, Italian, Dutch, Portuguese, Greek,
Turkish, Hebrew and Arabic.
•
Software Revision 66xx supports English, Danish,
Russian, Norwegian, Swedish, Finnish, Polish, Hungarian,
Romanian, Bulgarian and Czech.
94
Begin at the Standard Display.
2.
Press the MENU soft key on the Standard Display. See
Figure 60.
Operating Instructions
1
1.
7.
The “PROGRAMMING LANGUAGE PLEASE WAIT”
Screen briefly appears. See Figure 61.
8.
The “LANGUAGE SELECTED IS XXX” Screen briefly
appears.
9.
The display returns to Language Menu Screen, but will
show the new language. German is shown in Figure 61.
10. The Standard Display will appear in the new language.
German is shown in Figure 61.
Menu Soft Key
NOTE: Exercise care when changing languages, as once
changed all HMI Control panel displays will be in the
new language. If the user is not familiar with the new
language, problems may be experienced returning to the
default language.
Figure 60: Standard Display
3.
If more than one language is enabled, the Language Menu
is the first Main Menu item to appear. Press the SELECT
soft key to choose the Language Menu Screen. See the
Language Menu Screen in Figure 61.
4.
The “NEW LANGUAGE WILL BE” Screen will appear.
See Figure 61.
5.
Press the + or - soft keys to select the desired language.
Only languages enabled from the Guarded Access Menu
are available. German is shown in Figure 61.
6.
When the desired language is shown, press the YES soft
key to confirm the choice.
11. Repeat the process to select a different language. Press the
NEXT soft key to select a different Main Menu item. Press
the EXIT soft key to return to the Standard Display.
95
Operating Instructions
1
1.
Menu Soft Key
Figure 60: Standard Display
3.
If more than one language is enabled, the Language Menu
is the first Main Menu item to appear. Press the SELECT
soft key to choose the Language Menu Screen. See the
Language Menu Screen in Figure 61.
4.
The “NEW LANGUAGE WILL BE” Screen will appear.
See Figure 61.
5.
Press the + or - soft keys to select the desired language.
Only languages enabled from the Guarded Access Menu
are available. German is shown in Figure 61.
6.
When the desired language is shown, press the YES soft
key to confirm the choice.
7.
The “PROGRAMMING LANGUAGE PLEASE WAIT”
Screen briefly appears. See Figure 61.
8.
The “LANGUAGE SELECTED IS XXX” Screen briefly
appears.
9.
The display returns to Language Menu Screen, but will
show the new language. German is shown in Figure 61.
10. The Standard Display will appear in the new language.
German is shown in Figure 61.
NOTE: Exercise care when changing languages, as once
changed all HMI Control panel displays will be in the
new language. If the user is not familiar with the new
language, problems may be experienced returning to the
default language.
11. Repeat the process to select a different language. Press the
NEXT soft key to select a different Main Menu item. Press
the EXIT soft key to return to the Standard Display.
95
Operating Instructions
SELECT Key
HAUPTMENU
SPRACHE
BEENDEN
AUSWHAL
WEITER
ARA820
+ or - Key
NEW LANGUAGE WILL BE
DEUTSCH
YES Key
USE +/- TO CHANGE
-
OK?
+
YES
NO
ARA819
Figure 61: Change Language Screen Sequence
96
Operating Instructions
SELECT Key
HAUPTMENU
SPRACHE
BEENDEN
AUSWHAL
WEITER
ARA820
+ or - Key
NEW LANGUAGE WILL BE
DEUTSCH
YES Key
USE +/- TO CHANGE
-
+
OK?
YES
NO
ARA819
Figure 61: Change Language Screen Sequence
96
Operating Instructions
Return to English at Any Time
IMPORTANT: If necessary, English and all other languages
in the software version may be accessed from the Standard
Display.
After 5 seconds the Language Menu will appear in the current
language as shown in Figure 63. Press the + or - Keys to select
the desired language. When the desired language is shown
press the YES Key to confirm the choice.
When the Standard Display is shown press and hold the first
and last soft key for 5 seconds as shown in Figure 62. This
example is Deutsch (German).
2
1
1.
+ or - Keys
2.
YES Key
1
1.
Figure 63: + or - Keys, YES Key
Press These Soft Keys
Figure 62: Standard Display
NOTE: All languages in the installed software can be
selected using this method.
97
Operating Instructions
Return to English at Any Time
IMPORTANT: If necessary, English and all other languages
in the software version may be accessed from the Standard
Display.
After 5 seconds the Language Menu will appear in the current
language as shown in Figure 63. Press the + or - Keys to select
the desired language. When the desired language is shown
press the YES Key to confirm the choice.
When the Standard Display is shown press and hold the first
and last soft key for 5 seconds as shown in Figure 62. This
example is Deutsch (German).
2
1
1.
+ or - Keys
2.
YES Key
1
1.
Press These Soft Keys
Figure 62: Standard Display
Figure 63: + or - Keys, YES Key
NOTE: All languages in the installed software can be
selected using this method.
97
Operating Instructions
Alarms Menu
If an alarm condition occurs the large Alarm Icon will appear
on the Standard Display. See “Alarm Display” on page 65.
Alarms are viewed and cleared using the Alarm Menu as
follows:
1.
2.
Begin at the Standard Display.
If the Temperature Watch Display is showing, press the
MENU soft key once to return to the Standard Display.
3.
The Language Menu or Alarm Menu will appear. If the
Language Menu appears, press the NEXT soft key until the
Alarm Menu appears.
4.
Press the SELECT soft key. The Alarm Display will appear.
See Figure 65.
5.
If no alarms are present, the “No Alarm” Screen is shown.
Press the EXIT soft key to return to the Standard Display.
6.
If alarms are present, the quantity of alarms (if more than
one), the alarm code number and alarm description will be
shown on the display. In the following example (see
Figure 65), there are two alarms present. The most recent
is Alarm Code 6. This alarm code indicates a problem with
the coolant temperature sensor.
Press the MENU soft key on the Standard Display.
NOTE: If a serious alarm occurs, the unit will be shut
down to prevent damage to the unit or the load. If this
occurs, the display will show that the unit is shut down
and display the alarm code that caused the shutdown.
1
1.
IMPORTANT: Always record any Alarm Codes that occur in the order that they occur - as well as any other pertinent
information. This information is extremely valuable to
service personnel.
Menu Soft Key
Figure 64: Standard Display
98
Operating Instructions
Alarms Menu
If an alarm condition occurs the large Alarm Icon will appear
on the Standard Display. See “Alarm Display” on page 65.
Alarms are viewed and cleared using the Alarm Menu as
follows:
1.
2.
Begin at the Standard Display.
If the Temperature Watch Display is showing, press the
MENU soft key once to return to the Standard Display.
Press the MENU soft key on the Standard Display.
1
1.
Menu Soft Key
Figure 64: Standard Display
98
3.
The Language Menu or Alarm Menu will appear. If the
Language Menu appears, press the NEXT soft key until the
Alarm Menu appears.
4.
Press the SELECT soft key. The Alarm Display will appear.
See Figure 65.
5.
If no alarms are present, the “No Alarm” Screen is shown.
Press the EXIT soft key to return to the Standard Display.
6.
If alarms are present, the quantity of alarms (if more than
one), the alarm code number and alarm description will be
shown on the display. In the following example (see
Figure 65), there are two alarms present. The most recent
is Alarm Code 6. This alarm code indicates a problem with
the coolant temperature sensor.
NOTE: If a serious alarm occurs, the unit will be shut
down to prevent damage to the unit or the load. If this
occurs, the display will show that the unit is shut down
and display the alarm code that caused the shutdown.
IMPORTANT: Always record any Alarm Codes that occur in the order that they occur - as well as any other pertinent
information. This information is extremely valuable to
service personnel.
Operating Instructions
7.
After the alarm situation is resolved press the CLEAR key
to clear the alarm. To display the next alarm, press the
NEXT key (see Figure 65).
•
NOTE: For additional information regarding the alarm
shown on the display press the HELP soft key. A help
message will appear.
Important Alarm Notes
•
If an alarm will not clear, it may still exist. If the alarm is
not corrected, it will not clear.
•
If an alarm cannot be cleared from the Main menu, the
CLEAR key will not appear. These alarms must be cleared
from the Guarded Access Menus.
•
All alarms must be viewed before any of the alarms can be
cleared.
If optional Fuel Level Sensor is installed, Check Alarm
Code 96 (Low Fuel Level) is set when the fuel level falls
to 15%. The Base Controller can be programmed to set a
shutdown Alarm Code 44 (Check Fuel System) when the
fuel level falls to 5%. Shutdown Alarm Code 44 can be
manually cleared with the CLEAR key. In that case it
becomes a check alarm and the unit will continue to run
until it runs out of fuel (if it is not refilled). Alarm Code 96
and Alarm Code 44 are both automatically reset when the
fuel tank is refilled above 25%.
NOTE: Shutdown Alarm Code 44 reappears when it is
manually cleared from the Alarms Menu. However, it
changes to a check alarm so the unit will now start after
you exit the Alarms Menu.
Contact your supervisor or a Thermo King dealer for
information about alarm codes that will not clear.
99
Operating Instructions
7.
After the alarm situation is resolved press the CLEAR key
to clear the alarm. To display the next alarm, press the
NEXT key (see Figure 65).
NOTE: For additional information regarding the alarm
shown on the display press the HELP soft key. A help
message will appear.
Important Alarm Notes
•
If an alarm will not clear, it may still exist. If the alarm is
not corrected, it will not clear.
•
If an alarm cannot be cleared from the Main menu, the
CLEAR key will not appear. These alarms must be cleared
from the Guarded Access Menus.
•
All alarms must be viewed before any of the alarms can be
cleared.
•
If optional Fuel Level Sensor is installed, Check Alarm
Code 96 (Low Fuel Level) is set when the fuel level falls
to 15%. The Base Controller can be programmed to set a
shutdown Alarm Code 44 (Check Fuel System) when the
fuel level falls to 5%. Shutdown Alarm Code 44 can be
manually cleared with the CLEAR key. In that case it
becomes a check alarm and the unit will continue to run
until it runs out of fuel (if it is not refilled). Alarm Code 96
and Alarm Code 44 are both automatically reset when the
fuel tank is refilled above 25%.
NOTE: Shutdown Alarm Code 44 reappears when it is
manually cleared from the Alarms Menu. However, it
changes to a check alarm so the unit will now start after
you exit the Alarms Menu.
Contact your supervisor or a Thermo King dealer for
information about alarm codes that will not clear.
99
Operating Instructions
ALARM 6
2 OF 2 ALARMS
COOLANT TEMP SENSOR
EXIT
CLEAR
HELP
NEXT
ARA823
NEXT Key
MENU Key
ALARM 5
1 OF 2 ALARMS
AMBIENT TEMP SENSOR
SELECT Key
EXIT
CLEAR
HELP
NEXT
ARA824
SELECT Key
CLEAR Key
Figure 65: Viewing and Clearing Alarms Screen Sequence
100
Operating Instructions
ALARM 6
2 OF 2 ALARMS
COOLANT TEMP SENSOR
EXIT
CLEAR
HELP
NEXT
ARA823
NEXT Key
MENU Key
ALARM 5
1 OF 2 ALARMS
AMBIENT TEMP SENSOR
SELECT Key
EXIT
CLEAR
HELP
NEXT
ARA824
SELECT Key
CLEAR Key
Figure 65: Viewing and Clearing Alarms Screen Sequence
100
Operating Instructions
Datalogger Menu
5.
Press the SELECT soft key. The “Start Of Trip” Screen will
appear.
Initiating a Start of Trip
6.
Press the SELECT soft key to initiate a start of trip.
A “Start Of Trip” places a marker in the datalogger memory. It
is typically initiated when the cargo is being loaded. The Start
Of Trip marker then shows when the trip started in the data that
is downloaded or printed from the datalogger. A Start Of Trip
can be initiated through the use of WinTrac datalogging
software, or manually in the field. The following procedure
covers manual initiation. For more information on datalogging,
see the WinTrac User Manual included with the WinTrac
software.
7.
A Start Of Trip Marker has been inserted into the
datalogger memory.
1.
Begin at the Standard Display.
If the Temperature Watch Display is showing, press the
MENU soft key once to return to the Standard Display. See
Figure 66.
2.
Press the MENU soft key on the Standard Display.
3.
Press the NEXT soft key until the Datalogger Menu
appears. See Figure 67.
4.
Press the SELECT soft key on the Datalogger Menu. The
“Start Trip” Screen will appear.
NOTE: The start of trip marker is sent to both the
CargoWatch and ServiceWatch data loggers.
1
1.
Menu Soft Key
Figure 66: Standard Display
101
Operating Instructions
Datalogger Menu
5.
Press the SELECT soft key. The “Start Of Trip” Screen will
appear.
Initiating a Start of Trip
6.
Press the SELECT soft key to initiate a start of trip.
A “Start Of Trip” places a marker in the datalogger memory. It
is typically initiated when the cargo is being loaded. The Start
Of Trip marker then shows when the trip started in the data that
is downloaded or printed from the datalogger. A Start Of Trip
can be initiated through the use of WinTrac datalogging
software, or manually in the field. The following procedure
covers manual initiation. For more information on datalogging,
see the WinTrac User Manual included with the WinTrac
software.
7.
A Start Of Trip Marker has been inserted into the
datalogger memory.
1.
Begin at the Standard Display.
If the Temperature Watch Display is showing, press the
MENU soft key once to return to the Standard Display. See
Figure 66.
2.
Press the MENU soft key on the Standard Display.
3.
Press the NEXT soft key until the Datalogger Menu
appears. See Figure 67.
4.
Press the SELECT soft key on the Datalogger Menu. The
“Start Trip” Screen will appear.
NOTE: The start of trip marker is sent to both the
CargoWatch and ServiceWatch data loggers.
1
1.
Menu Soft Key
Figure 66: Standard Display
101
Operating Instructions
SELECT Key
SELECT Key
SELECT Key
Figure 67: Start of Trip Screen Sequence
102
Operating Instructions
SELECT Key
SELECT Key
SELECT Key
Figure 67: Start of Trip Screen Sequence
102
Operating Instructions
Printing a Trip Report
This procedure prints the current CargoWatch datalogger
record directly to a handheld printer. The printed record shows
things such as the unit and Base Controller identification
numbers, dates and times, the setpoint, and the data from the
optional sensors connected to the CargoWatch datalogger. If no
sensors are connected, the printed record shows the same
things without the sensor data.
1.
1
Connect the printer to the 6-pin printer port located inside
the control box.
NOTE: Contact your Thermo King dealer about printer
port location options.
2.
3.
Begin at the Standard Display.
If the Temperature Watch Display is showing, press the
MENU soft key once to return to the Standard Display. See
Figure 69.
2
Press the MENU soft key on the Standard Display.
1.
CargoWatch Port
2.
Printer Port
Figure 68: Printer Port Location
103
Operating Instructions
Printing a Trip Report
This procedure prints the current CargoWatch datalogger
record directly to a handheld printer. The printed record shows
things such as the unit and Base Controller identification
numbers, dates and times, the setpoint, and the data from the
optional sensors connected to the CargoWatch datalogger. If no
sensors are connected, the printed record shows the same
things without the sensor data.
1.
1
Connect the printer to the 6-pin printer port located inside
the control box.
NOTE: Contact your Thermo King dealer about printer
port location options.
2.
3.
Begin at the Standard Display.
If the Temperature Watch Display is showing, press the
MENU soft key once to return to the Standard Display. See
Figure 69.
Press the MENU soft key on the Standard Display.
2
1.
CargoWatch Port
2.
Printer Port
Figure 68: Printer Port Location
103
Operating Instructions
4.
Press the NEXT soft key until the Datalogger Menu
appears. See Figure 70.
5.
Press the SELECT soft key on the Datalogger Menu. The
“Start Trip” Screen will appear.
6.
Press the NEXT soft key. The “Print/View” Screen will
appear.
7.
Press the SELECT soft key. The “Delivery Ticket” Screen
will appear. Press the SELECT soft key to print a Delivery
Ticket. The Delivery Ticket is a short ticket that shows
delivery specific details including the current temperature.
See Figure 71.
8.
Press the NEXT soft key to go to the “Trip Ticket” Screen.
Press the SELECT soft key to print a Trip Ticket. The Trip
Ticket is a long ticket that shows details for the current trip
including a temperature history. The Trip Ticket is also
called a Journey Ticket. See Figure 72.
9.
Pressing the EXIT key returns the display to the Main
Menu.
1
1.
Menu Soft Key
Figure 69: Standard Display
For additional information concerning the CargoWatch Data
Logger contact your Thermo King dealer.
104
Operating Instructions
4.
Press the NEXT soft key until the Datalogger Menu
appears. See Figure 70.
5.
Press the SELECT soft key on the Datalogger Menu. The
“Start Trip” Screen will appear.
6.
Press the NEXT soft key. The “Print/View” Screen will
appear.
7.
Press the SELECT soft key. The “Delivery Ticket” Screen
will appear. Press the SELECT soft key to print a Delivery
Ticket. The Delivery Ticket is a short ticket that shows
delivery specific details including the current temperature.
See Figure 71.
8.
Press the NEXT soft key to go to the “Trip Ticket” Screen.
Press the SELECT soft key to print a Trip Ticket. The Trip
Ticket is a long ticket that shows details for the current trip
including a temperature history. The Trip Ticket is also
called a Journey Ticket. See Figure 72.
9.
Pressing the EXIT key returns the display to the Main
Menu.
For additional information concerning the CargoWatch Data
Logger contact your Thermo King dealer.
104
1
1.
Menu Soft Key
Figure 69: Standard Display
Operating Instructions
SELECT Key
SELECT Key
SELECT Key
NEXT Key
NEXT Key
SELECT Key
Figure 70: Print Report Screen Sequence
105
Operating Instructions
SELECT Key
SELECT Key
SELECT Key
NEXT Key
NEXT Key
SELECT Key
Figure 70: Print Report Screen Sequence
105
Operating Instructions
UNIT SERIAL NUMBER:
xxxxxxxxxx
CONTROLLER SERIAL NUMBER: A00021506190T3
TRAILER ID:
xxxxxxxxxx
CONTROLLER VERSION NUMBER:
B007
CONTROLLER TYPE:
SR2
DATALOGGER VERSION NUMBER:
6512
TEMPERATURE UNITS:
FAHRENHEIT
START:
FINISH:
SENSORS:
SETPOINT:
05/30/08 09:50:08
05/30/08 13:07:33
1
32.0
30 - MAY - 2008
1305
35.0
1250
35.2
1235
35.1
1220
35.2
1205
35.1
30 - MAY - 2008
1150
35.0
Figure 71: Sample Delivery Ticket
1135
1120
1105
1050
1035
1020
1005
35.0
35.0
34.9
35.0
35.0
35.0
35.1
0950
35.1
SENSOR #1:
SENSOR #2:
LOG SENSOR 1
LOG SENSOR 2
Figure 72: Sample Trip Ticket
106
Operating Instructions
UNIT SERIAL NUMBER:
xxxxxxxxxx
CONTROLLER SERIAL NUMBER: A00021506190T3
TRAILER ID:
xxxxxxxxxx
CONTROLLER VERSION NUMBER:
B007
CONTROLLER TYPE:
SR2
DATALOGGER VERSION NUMBER:
6512
TEMPERATURE UNITS:
FAHRENHEIT
START:
FINISH:
SENSORS:
SETPOINT:
05/30/08 09:50:08
05/30/08 13:07:33
1
32.0
30 - MAY - 2008
1305
35.0
1250
35.2
1235
35.1
1220
35.2
1205
35.1
30 - MAY - 2008
1150
35.0
Figure 71: Sample Delivery Ticket
1135
1120
1105
1050
1035
1020
1005
35.0
35.0
34.9
35.0
35.0
35.0
35.1
0950
35.1
SENSOR #1:
SENSOR #2:
LOG SENSOR 1
LOG SENSOR 2
Figure 72: Sample Trip Ticket
106
Operating Instructions
Hourmeters Menu
5.
The Hourmeters are programmable to be visible or hidden in
the Base Controller. Hourmeters that are visible are displayed.
Hourmeters that are hidden are not displayed, but they do
count hours. The default setting for Model 30 units is to
display only the Engine Hours. The default setting for Model
50 units is to display Total Run Time Hours, Engine Hours, and
Electric Run Hours. The Hourmeters Menu will not appear if
all hourmeters are hidden. Contact your Thermo King dealer
for information about programming the Base Controller.
Press the NEXT and BACK soft keys to view the hourmeter
displays. Press the Exit soft key to return to the Standard
Display.
1
Hourmeters can be viewed in the Hourmeters Menu as follows:
1.
1.
Begin at the Standard Display.
If the Temperature Watch Display is showing, press the
MENU soft key once to return to the Standard Display.
2.
Press the MENU soft key on the Standard Display.
3.
Press the NEXT soft key until the Hourmeters Menu
appears. See Figure 74.
4.
Press the SELECT soft key to enter the Hourmeters Menu.
Menu Soft Key
Figure 73: Standard Display
107
Operating Instructions
Hourmeters Menu
The Hourmeters are programmable to be visible or hidden in
the Base Controller. Hourmeters that are visible are displayed.
Hourmeters that are hidden are not displayed, but they do
count hours. The default setting for Model 30 units is to
display only the Engine Hours. The default setting for Model
50 units is to display Total Run Time Hours, Engine Hours, and
Electric Run Hours. The Hourmeters Menu will not appear if
all hourmeters are hidden. Contact your Thermo King dealer
for information about programming the Base Controller.
5.
Press the NEXT and BACK soft keys to view the hourmeter
displays. Press the Exit soft key to return to the Standard
Display.
1
Hourmeters can be viewed in the Hourmeters Menu as follows:
1.
Begin at the Standard Display.
If the Temperature Watch Display is showing, press the
MENU soft key once to return to the Standard Display.
2.
Press the MENU soft key on the Standard Display.
3.
Press the NEXT soft key until the Hourmeters Menu
appears. See Figure 74.
4.
Press the SELECT soft key to enter the Hourmeters Menu.
1.
Menu Soft Key
Figure 73: Standard Display
107
Operating Instructions
BACK Key
BACK Key
SELECT Key
NEXT Key
BACK Key
BACK Key
NEXT Key
BACK Key
NEXT Key
BACK Key
NEXT Key
BACK Key
NEXT Key
NEXT Key
NEXT Key
NEXT Key
Continued on next page
Figure 74: Viewing Hourmeters Screen Sequence (continued on next page)
108
Operating Instructions
BACK Key
BACK Key
SELECT Key
BACK Key
NEXT Key
NEXT Key
BACK Key
NEXT Key
BACK Key
NEXT Key
BACK Key
NEXT Key
BACK Key
NEXT Key
NEXT Key
NEXT Key
Continued on next page
Figure 74: Viewing Hourmeters Screen Sequence (continued on next page)
108
Operating Instructions
Continued from previous page
BACK Key
BACK Key
BACK Key
NEXT Key
BACK Key
NEXT Key
NEXT Key
Figure 75: Viewing Hourmeters Screen Sequence (continued from previous page)
109
Operating Instructions
Continued from previous page
BACK Key
BACK Key
BACK Key
NEXT Key
BACK Key
NEXT Key
NEXT Key
Figure 75: Viewing Hourmeters Screen Sequence (continued from previous page)
109
Operating Instructions
Mode Menu
Keypad Lockout
Various operating modes can be selected using the Mode
menu. Not all modes may be available, depending on OptiSet
Plus usage and settings of other programmable features. The
following modes may be available.
If enabled in Guarded Access, the keypad can be locked to
prevent unauthorized use. If the keypad is locked only the On
and Off keys function. The keypad will remain locked even if
the unit is turned off and back on. If Keypad Lockout is active,
press and hold any soft key for 5 seconds to deactivate the
feature. See “Selecting Keypad Lockout” on page 114.
Turn Cycle Sentry On or Off
The CYCLE-SENTRY Mode can be turned On or Off. If
CYCLE-SENTRY is turned off the unit runs in Continuous
mode. See “Turning CYCLE-SENTRY On or Off” on page
112.
NOTE: OptiSet Plus may prevent selecting CYCLE-SENTRY
or Continuous. If this happens, the display will advise that
the selection is not available.
Select Temperature Units
Start Sleep Mode
If this feature is enabled in Guarded Access / Main Menu
Configuration, the operator can select and set Sleep Mode from
the Mode Menu. Sleep Mode is used to keep the engine warm
and the battery charged when the unit is not in use. When the
unit is in Sleep Mode the display will show “SLEEP” and the
current time. See “Selecting Sleep Mode” on page 116.
•
If this feature is enabled in Guarded Access / Main Menu
Configuration, the operator can select temperature units to be
displayed as either degrees Fahrenheit or degrees Celsius.
Program Wakeup Time: This feature allows a wakeup time
to be specified. When the selected time is reached the unit
will start and resume normal operation.
If Wakeup Time is selected:
•
Day to Wake Up: The day the unit is to wake up can
be specified.
110
Operating Instructions
Mode Menu
Keypad Lockout
Various operating modes can be selected using the Mode
menu. Not all modes may be available, depending on OptiSet
Plus usage and settings of other programmable features. The
following modes may be available.
If enabled in Guarded Access, the keypad can be locked to
prevent unauthorized use. If the keypad is locked only the On
and Off keys function. The keypad will remain locked even if
the unit is turned off and back on. If Keypad Lockout is active,
press and hold any soft key for 5 seconds to deactivate the
feature. See “Selecting Keypad Lockout” on page 114.
Turn Cycle Sentry On or Off
The CYCLE-SENTRY Mode can be turned On or Off. If
CYCLE-SENTRY is turned off the unit runs in Continuous
mode. See “Turning CYCLE-SENTRY On or Off” on page
112.
NOTE: OptiSet Plus may prevent selecting CYCLE-SENTRY
or Continuous. If this happens, the display will advise that
the selection is not available.
Select Temperature Units
If this feature is enabled in Guarded Access / Main Menu
Configuration, the operator can select temperature units to be
displayed as either degrees Fahrenheit or degrees Celsius.
Start Sleep Mode
If this feature is enabled in Guarded Access / Main Menu
Configuration, the operator can select and set Sleep Mode from
the Mode Menu. Sleep Mode is used to keep the engine warm
and the battery charged when the unit is not in use. When the
unit is in Sleep Mode the display will show “SLEEP” and the
current time. See “Selecting Sleep Mode” on page 116.
•
Program Wakeup Time: This feature allows a wakeup time
to be specified. When the selected time is reached the unit
will start and resume normal operation.
If Wakeup Time is selected:
•
110
Day to Wake Up: The day the unit is to wake up can
be specified.
Operating Instructions
•
Hour to Wake Up: The hour the unit is to wake up can
be specified.
•
Minute to Wake Up: The minute the unit is to wake up
can be specified.
•
Run Pretrip on Wake Up: A Pretrip Test can be
enabled to automatically run when the unit wakes up.
111
Operating Instructions
•
Hour to Wake Up: The hour the unit is to wake up can
be specified.
•
Minute to Wake Up: The minute the unit is to wake up
can be specified.
•
Run Pretrip on Wake Up: A Pretrip Test can be
enabled to automatically run when the unit wakes up.
111
Operating Instructions
Turning CYCLE-SENTRY On or Off
The easiest way to switch between CYCLE-SENTRY and
Continuous Run is to press the Mode key (see page 78). But
you can also switch modes in the Mode Menu as follows:
1.
Begin at the Standard Display.
If the Temperature Watch Display is showing, press the
MENU soft key once to return to the Standard Display.
2.
Press the MENU soft key on the Standard Display.
3.
Press the NEXT soft key until the Mode Menu appears.
4.
Press SELECT soft key to enter the Mode Menu. See Figure
77.
5.
Press the SELECT soft key, to switch between modes.
6.
7.
IMPORTANT: If OptiSet Plus is in use, it may not be possible
to change the Mode.
1
2
3
1.
CYCLE-SENTRY Icon Shows Current Mode
Displayed for CYCLE-SENTRY Mode
Not Displayed for Continuous Mode
The new mode is then confirmed for 10 seconds.
2.
Mode Key
The display then returns to the Mode Menu. Press the
SELECT soft key again to change the mode again.
3.
Menu Soft Key
Figure 76: Standard Display
CAUTION: If the unit is in CYCLE-SENTRY null
and the mode is switched to Continuous mode, the
unit will start automatically.
112
Operating Instructions
Turning CYCLE-SENTRY On or Off
The easiest way to switch between CYCLE-SENTRY and
Continuous Run is to press the Mode key (see page 78). But
you can also switch modes in the Mode Menu as follows:
1.
Begin at the Standard Display.
If the Temperature Watch Display is showing, press the
MENU soft key once to return to the Standard Display.
2.
Press the MENU soft key on the Standard Display.
3.
Press the NEXT soft key until the Mode Menu appears.
4.
Press SELECT soft key to enter the Mode Menu. See Figure
77.
5.
Press the SELECT soft key, to switch between modes.
6.
7.
1
2
3
1.
CYCLE-SENTRY Icon Shows Current Mode
Displayed for CYCLE-SENTRY Mode
Not Displayed for Continuous Mode
The new mode is then confirmed for 10 seconds.
2.
Mode Key
The display then returns to the Mode Menu. Press the
SELECT soft key again to change the mode again.
3.
Menu Soft Key
CAUTION: If the unit is in CYCLE-SENTRY null
and the mode is switched to Continuous mode, the
unit will start automatically.
112
IMPORTANT: If OptiSet Plus is in use, it may not be possible
to change the Mode.
Figure 76: Standard Display
Operating Instructions
SELECT Key
SELECT Key
SELECT Key
Figure 77: Selecting Mode Screen Sequence
113
Operating Instructions
SELECT Key
SELECT Key
SELECT Key
Figure 77: Selecting Mode Screen Sequence
113
Operating Instructions
Selecting Keypad Lockout
3.
Press the NEXT soft key until the Mode Menu appears.
This feature must be enabled in Guarded Access to be
available. See “Keypad Lockout” on page 110 for more
information about Keypad Lockout. Use the following steps to
select Keypad Lockout:
4.
Press the SELECT soft key to enter the Mode Menu. The
Turn CYCLE-SENTRY On/Off Screen will appear.
1.
2.
MAIN MENU
ON
Begin at the Standard Display.
If the Temperature Watch Display is showing, press any
soft key to return to the Standard Display.
MODE
OFF
EXIT
1
SELECT
BACK
NEXT
Press the MENU soft key on the Standard Display.
ARA832
1.
Press Select Soft Key
Figure 79: Mode Menu Display
1
5.
Press the NEXT soft key until the Keypad Lockout Display
appears.
Selecting Keypad Lockout
3.
Press the NEXT soft key until the Mode Menu appears.
This feature must be enabled in Guarded Access to be
available. See “Keypad Lockout” on page 110 for more
information about Keypad Lockout. Use the following steps to
select Keypad Lockout:
4.
Press the SELECT soft key to enter the Mode Menu. The
Turn CYCLE-SENTRY On/Off Screen will appear.
1.
Press Menu Soft Key
Figure 78: Standard Display
114
Operating Instructions
1.
2.
MAIN MENU
ON
Begin at the Standard Display.
If the Temperature Watch Display is showing, press any
soft key to return to the Standard Display.
MODE
OFF
EXIT
1
SELECT
BACK
NEXT
Press the MENU soft key on the Standard Display.
ARA832
1.
Press Select Soft Key
Figure 79: Mode Menu Display
1
1.
Press Menu Soft Key
Figure 78: Standard Display
114
5.
Press the NEXT soft key until the Keypad Lockout Display
appears.
Operating Instructions
6.
Press the SELECT soft key to select Keypad Lockout.
CHANGE MODE
ON
KEYPAD LOCKOUT
OFF
EXIT
1
SELECT
BACK
NEXT
ARA834
1.
Press Select Soft Key
Figure 80: Keypad Lockout Display
7.
The new mode is then confirmed for 10 seconds.
8.
The display then returns to the Mode Menu.
9.
Press the Exit soft key to return to the Standard Display. If
no keys are pressed within 30 seconds, the screen will
return to the Standard Display.
NOTE: If Keypad Lockout is active, press and hold any soft
key for 5 seconds to deactivate the feature.
115
Operating Instructions
6.
Press the SELECT soft key to select Keypad Lockout.
CHANGE MODE
ON
KEYPAD LOCKOUT
OFF
EXIT
1
SELECT
BACK
NEXT
ARA834
1.
Press Select Soft Key
Figure 80: Keypad Lockout Display
7.
The new mode is then confirmed for 10 seconds.
8.
The display then returns to the Mode Menu.
9.
Press the Exit soft key to return to the Standard Display. If
no keys are pressed within 30 seconds, the screen will
return to the Standard Display.
NOTE: If Keypad Lockout is active, press and hold any soft
key for 5 seconds to deactivate the feature.
115
Operating Instructions
Selecting Sleep Mode
This feature must be enabled in Guarded Access to be
available. Sleep mode starts and stops the unit as required to
keep the unit battery in a charged condition and keep the unit
engine warm in cold ambient conditions. Sleep mode does not
maintain setpoint. Sleep Mode keeps the compartment
temperature near the ambient temperature when the unit is
running. This is useful in extremely cold weather or when the
unit is to be out of service for an extended time.
The following features are available in Sleep Mode.
Program Wakeup Time: This feature allows a wakeup time
to be specified. When the selected time is reached the unit will
start and resume normal operation.
If a Wakeup Time is selected the following features are
available:
Day to Wake Up: The day the unit is to wake up can be
specified.
Hour to Wake Up: The hour the unit is to wake up can be
specified.
Minute to Wake Up: The minute the unit is to wake up can
be specified.
Run Pretrip on Wakeup: A Pretrip Test can be enabled to
automatically run when the unit wakes up.
Sleep mode operates in both Diesel mode and Electric mode.
In Diesel mode the unit will start and stop as required to
maintain engine temperature and battery charge. In Electric
mode the unit starts and stops as necessary to maintain battery
charge only.
When Sleep mode is entered, the operator can program an
automatic Wake-up Time up to a week away. Using this
feature, the unit will automatically restart and run normally at
the determined time. If a Wake-up Time is programmed, the
operator can also program an automatic Pretrip Test when the
unit restarts.
Select Sleep Mode as follows:
1.
Begin at the Standard Display.
If the Temperature Watch Display is showing, press the
MENU soft key once to return to the Standard Display.
2.
Press the MENU soft key on the Standard Display.
116
Operating Instructions
Selecting Sleep Mode
This feature must be enabled in Guarded Access to be
available. Sleep mode starts and stops the unit as required to
keep the unit battery in a charged condition and keep the unit
engine warm in cold ambient conditions. Sleep mode does not
maintain setpoint. Sleep Mode keeps the compartment
temperature near the ambient temperature when the unit is
running. This is useful in extremely cold weather or when the
unit is to be out of service for an extended time.
The following features are available in Sleep Mode.
Program Wakeup Time: This feature allows a wakeup time
to be specified. When the selected time is reached the unit will
start and resume normal operation.
If a Wakeup Time is selected the following features are
available:
Day to Wake Up: The day the unit is to wake up can be
specified.
Hour to Wake Up: The hour the unit is to wake up can be
specified.
116
Minute to Wake Up: The minute the unit is to wake up can
be specified.
Run Pretrip on Wakeup: A Pretrip Test can be enabled to
automatically run when the unit wakes up.
Sleep mode operates in both Diesel mode and Electric mode.
In Diesel mode the unit will start and stop as required to
maintain engine temperature and battery charge. In Electric
mode the unit starts and stops as necessary to maintain battery
charge only.
When Sleep mode is entered, the operator can program an
automatic Wake-up Time up to a week away. Using this
feature, the unit will automatically restart and run normally at
the determined time. If a Wake-up Time is programmed, the
operator can also program an automatic Pretrip Test when the
unit restarts.
Select Sleep Mode as follows:
1.
Begin at the Standard Display.
If the Temperature Watch Display is showing, press the
MENU soft key once to return to the Standard Display.
2.
Press the MENU soft key on the Standard Display.
Operating Instructions
1
1.
Menu Soft Key
Press the NEXT soft key until the Mode Menu appears. See
Figure 82.
4.
Press SELECT soft key to enter the Mode Menu.
5.
Press the NEXT soft key as required to display the Sleep
Mode Screen.
6.
Press the SELECT soft key to start the Sleep mode.
7.
You now choose to program a Sleep mode Wake-up Time
or simply enter Sleep mode immediately. Press the NO soft
key to immediately enter Sleep mode.
The display will show “SLEEP” and the unit will start
and stop as required to keep engine warm and/or the
battery charged. Sleep mode does not maintain the
compartment temperature.
b.
Press the EXIT soft key to exit Sleep mode or turn the
unit off and back on. The unit will resume normal
operation and control to setpoint.
8.
To enter a Wake-up Time verify that the unit clock is set
properly (see “Time Display” on page 131). Then press
the YES soft key at the “Program A Wake-Up Time?”
Screen.
9.
Press the + or - soft keys to select the day the unit is to
restart in normal operation. In this example Monday has
been chosen. Press the YES soft key to confirm the day.
Figure 81: Standard Display
3.
a.
10. The display will now prompt you for the hour the unit is to
restart in normal operation. In this example 18:00 hours
has been chosen. Note that 24 hour “military time” is used.
Press the YES soft key to confirm the hour.
11. The display will now prompt you for the minute the unit is
to restart in normal operation. In this example 18:37 hours
has been chosen. Press the YES soft key to confirm the
minute.
117
Operating Instructions
1
1.
Menu Soft Key
Press the NEXT soft key until the Mode Menu appears. See
Figure 82.
4.
Press SELECT soft key to enter the Mode Menu.
5.
Press the NEXT soft key as required to display the Sleep
Mode Screen.
6.
Press the SELECT soft key to start the Sleep mode.
7.
You now choose to program a Sleep mode Wake-up Time
or simply enter Sleep mode immediately. Press the NO soft
key to immediately enter Sleep mode.
The display will show “SLEEP” and the unit will start
and stop as required to keep engine warm and/or the
battery charged. Sleep mode does not maintain the
compartment temperature.
b.
Press the EXIT soft key to exit Sleep mode or turn the
unit off and back on. The unit will resume normal
operation and control to setpoint.
8.
To enter a Wake-up Time verify that the unit clock is set
properly (see “Time Display” on page 131). Then press
the YES soft key at the “Program A Wake-Up Time?”
Screen.
9.
Press the + or - soft keys to select the day the unit is to
restart in normal operation. In this example Monday has
been chosen. Press the YES soft key to confirm the day.
Figure 81: Standard Display
3.
a.
10. The display will now prompt you for the hour the unit is to
restart in normal operation. In this example 18:00 hours
has been chosen. Note that 24 hour “military time” is used.
Press the YES soft key to confirm the hour.
11. The display will now prompt you for the minute the unit is
to restart in normal operation. In this example 18:37 hours
has been chosen. Press the YES soft key to confirm the
minute.
117
Operating Instructions
12. The display will now prompt you to “Run A Pretrip On
Wake-Up?” Press YES soft key or the NO soft key
accordingly and the display will show the unit is
programming the Sleep mode.
13. The display will show “SLEEP” and the unit will start and
stop as required to keep the engine warm and/or the
battery charged. Sleep mode does not maintain setpoint.
14. The unit will restart at the programmed time (in this
example 18:37 hours) and perform a Pretrip (if selected).
After the Pretrip is complete the test results will be
displayed and the unit will resume normal operation and
control to setpoint.
15. To exit Sleep mode before the selected Wake-up time
press the EXIT soft key or turn the unit off and back on.
The unit will resume normal operation and control to
setpoint.
118
Operating Instructions
12. The display will now prompt you to “Run A Pretrip On
Wake-Up?” Press YES soft key or the NO soft key
accordingly and the display will show the unit is
programming the Sleep mode.
13. The display will show “SLEEP” and the unit will start and
stop as required to keep the engine warm and/or the
battery charged. Sleep mode does not maintain setpoint.
14. The unit will restart at the programmed time (in this
example 18:37 hours) and perform a Pretrip (if selected).
After the Pretrip is complete the test results will be
displayed and the unit will resume normal operation and
control to setpoint.
15. To exit Sleep mode before the selected Wake-up time
press the EXIT soft key or turn the unit off and back on.
The unit will resume normal operation and control to
setpoint.
118
Operating Instructions
SELECT Key then NEXT Key
YES Key
SELECT Key
YES Key
YES Key
YES Key or NO Key
YES Key
Figure 82: Selecting Sleep Mode Screen Sequence
119
Operating Instructions
SELECT Key then NEXT Key
YES Key
SELECT Key
YES Key
YES Key
YES Key or NO Key
YES Key
Figure 82: Selecting Sleep Mode Screen Sequence
119
Operating Instructions
Pretrip Tests
A Pretrip test verifies unit operation. This display allows a
Pretrip Test to be selected and initiated by the operator. If the
Pretrip Test is entered with the unit shut down a Full Pretrip
Test with device amp checks will be performed. If the Pretrip
Test is entered with the unit running in either diesel or electric
mode a Running Pretrip Test is performed. Test results are
reported as PASS, CHECK or FAIL when the Pretrip Test is
completed.
Conditions where Pretrip Tests are not
allowed
•
If any shutdown alarms are present. Pretrip tests are
allowed with some Check and Log alarms.
•
If the unit is in Sleep Mode.
•
If the unit is in Service Test Mode, Interface Board Test
Mode or Evacuation Mode.
CAUTION: Monitor the return air temperature when
performing a Pretrip Test on a loaded trailer. The
controller may not maintain setpoint during the
Pretrip Test.
Pretrip Test Conditions
•
Current unit settings are saved and restored at the end of
the Pretrip Test or if the unit is turned off and back on.
•
Pretrip Test can be run in either Diesel or Electric Mode.
Full Pretrip
•
The unit will auto switch from Diesel Mode to Electric
Mode or from Electric Mode to Diesel Mode during a
Pretrip Test if these features are enabled and the auto
switch conditions occur.
A Full Pretrip occurs when Pretrip is initiated before the engine
or electric motor starts running. The Full Pretrip test proceeds
in the order shown below:
•
•
Engine or Electric Motor Start – The engine or electric
Amp Checks – Each electrical control component is
energized and the current drawn is confirmed to be within
specification.
motor will start automatically.
120
Operating Instructions
Pretrip Tests
A Pretrip test verifies unit operation. This display allows a
Pretrip Test to be selected and initiated by the operator. If the
Pretrip Test is entered with the unit shut down a Full Pretrip
Test with device amp checks will be performed. If the Pretrip
Test is entered with the unit running in either diesel or electric
mode a Running Pretrip Test is performed. Test results are
reported as PASS, CHECK or FAIL when the Pretrip Test is
completed.
Conditions where Pretrip Tests are not
allowed
•
If any shutdown alarms are present. Pretrip tests are
allowed with some Check and Log alarms.
•
If the unit is in Sleep Mode.
•
If the unit is in Service Test Mode, Interface Board Test
Mode or Evacuation Mode.
CAUTION: Monitor the return air temperature when
performing a Pretrip Test on a loaded trailer. The
controller may not maintain setpoint during the
Pretrip Test.
Pretrip Test Conditions
•
Current unit settings are saved and restored at the end of
the Pretrip Test or if the unit is turned off and back on.
•
Pretrip Test can be run in either Diesel or Electric Mode.
Full Pretrip
•
The unit will auto switch from Diesel Mode to Electric
Mode or from Electric Mode to Diesel Mode during a
Pretrip Test if these features are enabled and the auto
switch conditions occur.
A Full Pretrip occurs when Pretrip is initiated before the engine
or electric motor starts running. The Full Pretrip test proceeds
in the order shown below:
•
120
Engine or Electric Motor Start – The engine or electric
•
Amp Checks – Each electrical control component is
energized and the current drawn is confirmed to be within
specification.
motor will start automatically.
Operating Instructions
•
Defrost – If the coil temperature is below 45 F (7 C), a
Defrost cycle is initiated.
•
Cool Check – The ability of the unit to cool in low speed is
checked.
•
RPM Check (Diesel Mode only) – If the unit is running in
the Diesel Mode, the engine RPM in high and low speed is
checked during the Cool Check.
•
Heat Check - The ability of the unit to heat in low speed is
checked.
•
Report Test Results – The test results are reported as
“PASS”, “CHECK” or “FAILED” when the Pretrip is
completed. If test results are Check or Failed, alarm codes
will exist to direct the technician to the source of the
problem.
Running Pretrip
A Running Pretrip occurs when Pretrip is initiated after the
engine or electric motor is running. The Running Pretrip test
proceeds in the order shown below:
•
Defrost – If the coil temperature is below 45 F (7 C), a
Defrost cycle is initiated.
•
Cool Check – The ability of the unit to cool in low speed is
checked.
•
RPM Check (Diesel Mode only) – If the unit is running in
the Diesel Mode, the engine RPM in high and low speed is
checked during the Cool Check.
•
Heat Check - The ability of the unit to heat in low speed is
checked.
•
Report Test Results – The test results are reported as
“PASS”, “CHECK” or “FAILED” when the Pretrip is
completed. If test results are Check or Failed, alarm codes
will exist to direct the technician to the source of the
problem.
121
Operating Instructions
•
Defrost – If the coil temperature is below 45 F (7 C), a
Defrost cycle is initiated.
•
Cool Check – The ability of the unit to cool in low speed is
checked.
•
RPM Check (Diesel Mode only) – If the unit is running in
the Diesel Mode, the engine RPM in high and low speed is
checked during the Cool Check.
•
Heat Check - The ability of the unit to heat in low speed is
checked.
•
Report Test Results – The test results are reported as
“PASS”, “CHECK” or “FAILED” when the Pretrip is
completed. If test results are Check or Failed, alarm codes
will exist to direct the technician to the source of the
problem.
Running Pretrip
A Running Pretrip occurs when Pretrip is initiated after the
engine or electric motor is running. The Running Pretrip test
proceeds in the order shown below:
•
Defrost – If the coil temperature is below 45 F (7 C), a
Defrost cycle is initiated.
•
Cool Check – The ability of the unit to cool in low speed is
checked.
•
RPM Check (Diesel Mode only) – If the unit is running in
the Diesel Mode, the engine RPM in high and low speed is
checked during the Cool Check.
•
Heat Check - The ability of the unit to heat in low speed is
checked.
•
Report Test Results – The test results are reported as
“PASS”, “CHECK” or “FAILED” when the Pretrip is
completed. If test results are Check or Failed, alarm codes
will exist to direct the technician to the source of the
problem.
121
Operating Instructions
Pretrip Test Issues
When performing a Pretrip Test, the following issues should be
considered.
•
Whenever possible, run pretrip tests on empty, dry trailers
with the doors closed.
•
If running a Pretrip Test on a trailer loaded with dry cargo,
insure that proper airflow can occur around the load. If the
load restricts airflow, false test results may occur. Also,
SR-3 units have high refrigeration capacity which results
in rapid temperature changes. Sensitive dry cargo may be
damaged as a result.
•
If running a Pretrip Test on a trailer that has just been
washed down, the extremely high humidity inside the
trailer may result in false test results.
•
If running a Pretrip Test on a trailer loaded with sensitive
cargo, monitor the load temperature during the test as
normal temperature control is suspended during pre-trip
operation.
•
Always perform Pretrip Tests with the trailer cargo doors
closed to prevent false test failures.
122
Operating Instructions
Pretrip Test Issues
When performing a Pretrip Test, the following issues should be
considered.
•
Whenever possible, run pretrip tests on empty, dry trailers
with the doors closed.
•
If running a Pretrip Test on a trailer loaded with dry cargo,
insure that proper airflow can occur around the load. If the
load restricts airflow, false test results may occur. Also,
SR-3 units have high refrigeration capacity which results
in rapid temperature changes. Sensitive dry cargo may be
damaged as a result.
•
If running a Pretrip Test on a trailer that has just been
washed down, the extremely high humidity inside the
trailer may result in false test results.
•
If running a Pretrip Test on a trailer loaded with sensitive
cargo, monitor the load temperature during the test as
normal temperature control is suspended during pre-trip
operation.
•
Always perform Pretrip Tests with the trailer cargo doors
closed to prevent false test failures.
122
Operating Instructions
Initiating a Pretrip Test
3.
To initiate a Full Pretrip press the MENU soft key as soon
as the Standard Display appears and before the unit starts.
To initiate a Running Pretrip let the unit start before
pressing the MENU soft key on the Standard Display.
4.
Press the NEXT soft key until the Pretrip Screen appears.
See Figure 85.
5.
Press the SELECT soft key to start a Pretrip.
Before initiating a Pretrip Test, clear all alarm codes.
To stop a Pretrip Test at any time, turn the unit off.
Use the following procedure to initiate a Full Pretrip or a
Running Pretrip. A Running Pretrip can also be initiated by
starting at step 3 with the unit running.
1.
If the unit is running, press the OFF key to stop the unit.
2.
Press the ON key to turn the unit on.
NOTE: If all alarms were not cleared, a prompt appears
as shown below. Press the EXIT key to exit the Pretrip
Test, clear all alarms and repeat the Pretrip Test.
ON
NO PRETRIP -- ALARM ACTIVE
OFF
1
EXIT
1
ARA835
1.
Menu Soft Key
1.
Figure 83: Standard Display
Press Exit Soft Key
Figure 84: No Pretrip Alarm Active Display
123
Operating Instructions
Initiating a Pretrip Test
3.
To initiate a Full Pretrip press the MENU soft key as soon
as the Standard Display appears and before the unit starts.
To initiate a Running Pretrip let the unit start before
pressing the MENU soft key on the Standard Display.
4.
Press the NEXT soft key until the Pretrip Screen appears.
See Figure 85.
5.
Press the SELECT soft key to start a Pretrip.
Before initiating a Pretrip Test, clear all alarm codes.
To stop a Pretrip Test at any time, turn the unit off.
Use the following procedure to initiate a Full Pretrip or a
Running Pretrip. A Running Pretrip can also be initiated by
starting at step 3 with the unit running.
1.
If the unit is running, press the OFF key to stop the unit.
2.
Press the ON key to turn the unit on.
NOTE: If all alarms were not cleared, a prompt appears
as shown below. Press the EXIT key to exit the Pretrip
Test, clear all alarms and repeat the Pretrip Test.
ON
NO PRETRIP -- ALARM ACTIVE
OFF
1
EXIT
1
ARA835
1.
Menu Soft Key
Figure 83: Standard Display
1.
Press Exit Soft Key
Figure 84: No Pretrip Alarm Active Display
123
Operating Instructions
6.
The Pretrip display appears. See Figure 85.
•
The top line of the display indicates the unit is
performing the non-running (or running) portion of
the Pretrip Test.
•
The second line shows Test 1 of 49 is being
performed. Note that the tests may not be performed
in numerical order.
•
The soft keys may be used during the Pretrip Test to
select the Hourmeter, Gauge or Sensor menus.
In a Full Pretrip, when the non-running tests are complete
the unit will start automatically and continue with the
running tests.
7.
8.
If the Pretrip Test results are “CHECK” or “FAILED”, the
problem should be diagnosed and corrected and the Pretrip
Test repeated and passed before the unit is released for
service. The Pretrip Test result screen will exit to the Main
Menu Alarm Submenu for convenient access to any
alarms generated during the Pretrip Test.
Stopping a Pretrip Test
Turn the unit off to stop a Pretrip Test at any time. This will
generate Alarm Code 28–Pretrip Abort. Other alarm codes may
also be generated. This is normal when the Pretrip test is
stopped before completion.
When all tests are complete, the results are reported as
“PASS”, “CHECK” or “FAILED”. If “FAILED” appears,
the unit will shut down. If the results are Check or Failed,
the accompanying alarm codes will direct the technician to
the cause of the problem.
124
Operating Instructions
6.
The Pretrip display appears. See Figure 85.
•
The top line of the display indicates the unit is
performing the non-running (or running) portion of
the Pretrip Test.
•
The second line shows Test 1 of 49 is being
performed. Note that the tests may not be performed
in numerical order.
•
The soft keys may be used during the Pretrip Test to
select the Hourmeter, Gauge or Sensor menus.
In a Full Pretrip, when the non-running tests are complete
the unit will start automatically and continue with the
running tests.
7.
124
When all tests are complete, the results are reported as
“PASS”, “CHECK” or “FAILED”. If “FAILED” appears,
the unit will shut down. If the results are Check or Failed,
the accompanying alarm codes will direct the technician to
the cause of the problem.
8.
If the Pretrip Test results are “CHECK” or “FAILED”, the
problem should be diagnosed and corrected and the Pretrip
Test repeated and passed before the unit is released for
service. The Pretrip Test result screen will exit to the Main
Menu Alarm Submenu for convenient access to any
alarms generated during the Pretrip Test.
Stopping a Pretrip Test
Turn the unit off to stop a Pretrip Test at any time. This will
generate Alarm Code 28–Pretrip Abort. Other alarm codes may
also be generated. This is normal when the Pretrip test is
stopped before completion.
Operating Instructions
SELECT Key
Figure 85: Pretrip Test Screen Sequence
125
Operating Instructions
SELECT Key
Figure 85: Pretrip Test Screen Sequence
125
Operating Instructions
Electric Standby/Diesel Mode
Select Electric Standby or Diesel Mode as follows:
The Electric Standby/Diesel Mode display allows the operator
to manually select Electric Standby or Diesel Mode operation.
The unit can also be programmed to automatically select
Electric Standby operation when standby power is available
and Diesel Mode operation if standby power fails or is
removed. Contact your Thermo King dealer for information
about programming the Base Controller.
1.
Begin at the Standard Display.
If the Temperature Watch Display is showing, press the
MENU soft key once to return to the Standard Display.
2.
Press the MENU soft key on the Standard Display.
NOTE: Manual selection is the default setting for both
Electric Standby and Diesel Mode.
1
A screen asking if you wish to switch to Electric Standby will
appear if the unit is connected to standby power when in the
Diesel Mode.
A screen asking if you wish to switch to Diesel Mode will
appear if standby power is disconnected when in Electric
Standby. Pressing the YES soft key will switch unit operation to
the Diesel Mode. Pressing the NO soft key will force the unit to
remain in Electric Standby even though standby power is not
available. The unit will not run and Alarm Code 91 Check
Electric Ready Input will be set as a prevent alarm.
1.
Menu Soft Key
Figure 86: Standard Display
126
Operating Instructions
Electric Standby/Diesel Mode
Select Electric Standby or Diesel Mode as follows:
The Electric Standby/Diesel Mode display allows the operator
to manually select Electric Standby or Diesel Mode operation.
The unit can also be programmed to automatically select
Electric Standby operation when standby power is available
and Diesel Mode operation if standby power fails or is
removed. Contact your Thermo King dealer for information
about programming the Base Controller.
1.
Begin at the Standard Display.
If the Temperature Watch Display is showing, press the
MENU soft key once to return to the Standard Display.
2.
Press the MENU soft key on the Standard Display.
NOTE: Manual selection is the default setting for both
Electric Standby and Diesel Mode.
1
A screen asking if you wish to switch to Electric Standby will
appear if the unit is connected to standby power when in the
Diesel Mode.
A screen asking if you wish to switch to Diesel Mode will
appear if standby power is disconnected when in Electric
Standby. Pressing the YES soft key will switch unit operation to
the Diesel Mode. Pressing the NO soft key will force the unit to
remain in Electric Standby even though standby power is not
available. The unit will not run and Alarm Code 91 Check
Electric Ready Input will be set as a prevent alarm.
126
1.
Menu Soft Key
Figure 86: Standard Display
Operating Instructions
3.
Press the NEXT soft key until the Electric Standby/Diesel
Mode Screen appears. See Figure 87 and Figure 88.
NOTE: The Electric Standby Screen will not appear if
diesel to electric switchover is enabled. The Diesel Mode
Screen will not appear if electric to diesel switchover is
enabled.
4.
SELECT Key
Press the SELECT soft key to select the mode shown on the
display.
Figure 87: Programming Diesel Mode
127
Operating Instructions
3.
Press the NEXT soft key until the Electric Standby/Diesel
Mode Screen appears. See Figure 87 and Figure 88.
NOTE: The Electric Standby Screen will not appear if
diesel to electric switchover is enabled. The Diesel Mode
Screen will not appear if electric to diesel switchover is
enabled.
4.
SELECT Key
Press the SELECT soft key to select the mode shown on the
display.
Figure 87: Programming Diesel Mode
127
Operating Instructions
Adjust Brightness Menu
SELECT Key
The brightness of the HMI Control Panel display backlight can
be adjusted to allow for changing ambient light conditions. The
choices available to the operator are HIGH, MEDIUM, LOW,
and OFF. OFF actually results in a very dim backlight suitable
for low light conditions.
IMPORTANT: Before replacing an HMI Control Panel with
no backlight, check the Adjust Backlight feature to be sure
the backlight is turned on.
Adjust the display brightness as follows:
1.
Begin at the Standard Display.
If the Temperature Watch Display is showing, press the
MENU soft key once to return to the Standard Display.
Figure 88: Programming Electric Standby Mode
128
Operating Instructions
Adjust Brightness Menu
SELECT Key
The brightness of the HMI Control Panel display backlight can
be adjusted to allow for changing ambient light conditions. The
choices available to the operator are HIGH, MEDIUM, LOW,
and OFF. OFF actually results in a very dim backlight suitable
for low light conditions.
IMPORTANT: Before replacing an HMI Control Panel with
no backlight, check the Adjust Backlight feature to be sure
the backlight is turned on.
Adjust the display brightness as follows:
1.
Figure 88: Programming Electric Standby Mode
128
Begin at the Standard Display.
If the Temperature Watch Display is showing, press the
MENU soft key once to return to the Standard Display.
Operating Instructions
2.
Press the MENU soft key on the Standard Display.
1
1.
7.
The “ADJUSTING BRIGHTNESS - PLEASE WAIT”
Screen briefly appears.
8.
The selected level appears on the screen.
9.
The Adjust Brightness Main Menu Screen reappears.
10. Press the Exit soft key to return to the Standard Display. If
no keys are pressed within 30 seconds, the screen will
return to the Standard Display.
Menu Soft Key
Figure 89: Standard Display
3.
Press the NEXT soft key until the Adjust Brightness Menu
appears. See Figure 90.
4.
Press the SELECT soft key to enter the Adjust Brightness
Menu. See Figure 90.
5.
Press the + or - soft keys to select the desired brightness.
See Figure 90. This example shows changing screen
brightness from low to medium.
6.
Press the YES soft key to enter the new brightness level.
129
Operating Instructions
2.
Press the MENU soft key on the Standard Display.
1
1.
7.
The “ADJUSTING BRIGHTNESS - PLEASE WAIT”
Screen briefly appears.
8.
The selected level appears on the screen.
9.
The Adjust Brightness Main Menu Screen reappears.
10. Press the Exit soft key to return to the Standard Display. If
no keys are pressed within 30 seconds, the screen will
return to the Standard Display.
Menu Soft Key
Figure 89: Standard Display
3.
Press the NEXT soft key until the Adjust Brightness Menu
appears. See Figure 90.
4.
Press the SELECT soft key to enter the Adjust Brightness
Menu. See Figure 90.
5.
Press the + or - soft keys to select the desired brightness.
See Figure 90. This example shows changing screen
brightness from low to medium.
6.
Press the YES soft key to enter the new brightness level.
129
Operating Instructions
SELECT Key
+ Key
YES Key
Figure 90: Adjusting Display Brightness Screen Sequence
130
Operating Instructions
SELECT Key
+ Key
YES Key
Figure 90: Adjusting Display Brightness Screen Sequence
130
Operating Instructions
Time Display
1
The time and date held by the HMI Control Panel real time
clock can be checked. Time and Date cannot be changed from
the Main Menu. The time and date are changed by
programming the HMI Control Panel. Contact your Thermo
King dealer for information about programming the HMI
Control Panel.
2
View the time and date as follows:
1.
Begin at the Standard Display.
If the Temperature Watch Display is showing, press the
MENU soft key once to return to the Standard Display.
2.
Press the MENU soft key on the Standard Display.
3.
Press the NEXT soft key until the Time Display appears.
4.
Press the SELECT soft key to view the time and date.
MENU Key then NEXT Key
SELECT Key
1.
Standard Display
2.
Menu Soft Key
Figure 91: Time and Date Screens
131
Operating Instructions
Time Display
1
The time and date held by the HMI Control Panel real time
clock can be checked. Time and Date cannot be changed from
the Main Menu. The time and date are changed by
programming the HMI Control Panel. Contact your Thermo
King dealer for information about programming the HMI
Control Panel.
2
View the time and date as follows:
1.
Begin at the Standard Display.
If the Temperature Watch Display is showing, press the
MENU soft key once to return to the Standard Display.
2.
Press the MENU soft key on the Standard Display.
3.
Press the NEXT soft key until the Time Display appears.
4.
Press the SELECT soft key to view the time and date.
MENU Key then NEXT Key
SELECT Key
1.
Standard Display
2.
Menu Soft Key
Figure 91: Time and Date Screens
131
Operating Instructions
OptiSet Plus
The Base Controller can be programmed with OptiSet Plus
temperature profiles that allow the user to select named
products. Contact your Thermo King dealer for information
about programming the Base Controller with OptiSet Plus
temperature profiles.
•
Named products can have a single setpoint, or they can
have a setpoint range that allows the user to select a
setpoint within that range.
•
The Base Controller can be programmed to allow only
named products to be selected. In which case the far left
soft key will display PRODUCT. See Figure 92.
•
See “Selecting a Named Product” on page 134 for information
about selecting or changing the named product.
See “Changing the Setpoint for a Named Product” on page 139
for information about changing the setpoint for a named
product.
See “Selecting a Setpoint” on page 142 for information about
selecting or changing the setpoint.
1
The Base Controller can be programmed to allow named
products or numeric setpoints to be selected. In which case
the far left soft key will display PRODUCT/SETPOINT. See
Figure 93.
NOTE: In OptiSet Plus the terms “numeric setpoint”
and “setpoint” mean the same thing and are displayed as
numbers. The terms “named product” and “product”
mean the same thing and are displayed as words.
1.
Product Soft Key
Figure 92: Standard Display with Product Soft Key
132
Operating Instructions
OptiSet Plus
The Base Controller can be programmed with OptiSet Plus
temperature profiles that allow the user to select named
products. Contact your Thermo King dealer for information
about programming the Base Controller with OptiSet Plus
temperature profiles.
•
Named products can have a single setpoint, or they can
have a setpoint range that allows the user to select a
setpoint within that range.
•
The Base Controller can be programmed to allow only
named products to be selected. In which case the far left
soft key will display PRODUCT. See Figure 92.
•
The Base Controller can be programmed to allow named
products or numeric setpoints to be selected. In which case
the far left soft key will display PRODUCT/SETPOINT. See
Figure 93.
NOTE: In OptiSet Plus the terms “numeric setpoint”
and “setpoint” mean the same thing and are displayed as
numbers. The terms “named product” and “product”
mean the same thing and are displayed as words.
132
See “Selecting a Named Product” on page 134 for information
about selecting or changing the named product.
See “Changing the Setpoint for a Named Product” on page 139
for information about changing the setpoint for a named
product.
See “Selecting a Setpoint” on page 142 for information about
selecting or changing the setpoint.
1
1.
Product Soft Key
Figure 92: Standard Display with Product Soft Key
Operating Instructions
1
1.
Product/Setpoint Soft Key
Figure 93: Standard Display with
Product/Setpoint Soft Key
133
Operating Instructions
1
1.
Product/Setpoint Soft Key
Figure 93: Standard Display with
Product/Setpoint Soft Key
133
Operating Instructions
Selecting a Named Product
1
To select or change a named product complete the following
steps. This example shows the Standard Display with the
PRODUCT/SETPOINT soft key. Using the Standard Display with
the PRODUCT soft key is basically the same but some of the
screens differ slightly.
1.
Begin at the Standard Display.
If the Temperature Watch Display is showing, press the
MENU soft key once to return to the Standard Display.
2.
Press the PRODUCT/SETPOINT (or PRODUCT) soft key on
the Standard Display. See Figure 94.
3.
The “Named Product / Numeric Setpoint?” (or Named
Product) Screen briefly appears, then the “Named Product
or Numeric Setpoint?” (or Named Product) Screen will
appear. See Figure 95.
4.
Press the NAMED soft key. See Figure 95.
5.
The “Product” Screen briefly appears, then the “Current
Product Is” Screen will appear. See Figure 95.
6.
Press the + or - soft keys to change the named product.
See Figure 95.
2
1.
Standard Display
2.
Product/Setpoint Soft Key
Figure 94: Selecting Named Product
7.
Press the YES or NO soft key accordingly as described
below. See Figure 95.
•
If the NO key is pressed the named product change made
with the “+” or “-” soft keys will not be accepted, the
named product will not be changed and the display will
return to the Standard Display.
•
If the YES soft key is pressed, the named product change
made with the “+” or “-” soft keys will be accepted, and
the following screens will appear.
134
Operating Instructions
Selecting a Named Product
1
To select or change a named product complete the following
steps. This example shows the Standard Display with the
PRODUCT/SETPOINT soft key. Using the Standard Display with
the PRODUCT soft key is basically the same but some of the
screens differ slightly.
1.
Begin at the Standard Display.
If the Temperature Watch Display is showing, press the
MENU soft key once to return to the Standard Display.
2.
Press the PRODUCT/SETPOINT (or PRODUCT) soft key on
the Standard Display. See Figure 94.
3.
The “Named Product / Numeric Setpoint?” (or Named
Product) Screen briefly appears, then the “Named Product
or Numeric Setpoint?” (or Named Product) Screen will
appear. See Figure 95.
4.
Press the NAMED soft key. See Figure 95.
5.
The “Product” Screen briefly appears, then the “Current
Product Is” Screen will appear. See Figure 95.
6.
Press the + or - soft keys to change the named product.
See Figure 95.
134
2
1.
Standard Display
2.
Product/Setpoint Soft Key
Figure 94: Selecting Named Product
7.
Press the YES or NO soft key accordingly as described
below. See Figure 95.
•
If the NO key is pressed the named product change made
with the “+” or “-” soft keys will not be accepted, the
named product will not be changed and the display will
return to the Standard Display.
•
If the YES soft key is pressed, the named product change
made with the “+” or “-” soft keys will be accepted, and
the following screens will appear.
Operating Instructions
NOTE: Alarm Code 127 may be generated if the + or soft keys are used to change the named product, but the
YES or NO soft keys are not used to accept or decline the
new named product.
8.
The “Programming Named Product” Screen will briefly
appear. See Figure 95.
NOTE: If the “Change Setpoint for XXXXX” Screen
appears, the named product has been programmed with
a setpoint range. See “Selecting the Setpoint for a
Named Product” on page 137.
9.
The “New Named Product Is XXXXX” Screen briefly
appears. See Figure 95.
10. The Standard Display appears with the new named
product. See Figure 95.
NOTE: Pressing the EXIT soft key at any point will return to
the Standard Display.
NOTE: If no keys are pressed for 30 seconds while in the
Named Product Changer Screens, the HMI Control Panel
will return to the Standard Display.
135
Operating Instructions
NOTE: Alarm Code 127 may be generated if the + or soft keys are used to change the named product, but the
YES or NO soft keys are not used to accept or decline the
new named product.
8.
The “Programming Named Product” Screen will briefly
appear. See Figure 95.
NOTE: If the “Change Setpoint for XXXXX” Screen
appears, the named product has been programmed with
a setpoint range. See “Selecting the Setpoint for a
Named Product” on page 137.
9.
The “New Named Product Is XXXXX” Screen briefly
appears. See Figure 95.
10. The Standard Display appears with the new named
product. See Figure 95.
NOTE: Pressing the EXIT soft key at any point will return to
the Standard Display.
NOTE: If no keys are pressed for 30 seconds while in the
Named Product Changer Screens, the HMI Control Panel
will return to the Standard Display.
135
Operating Instructions
NOTE: If “Change Setpoint
for XXXXX” Screen appears
instead, see “Selecting the
Setpoint for a Named
Product” on page 137
PRODUCT/SETPOINT Key
+ or – Key
YES Key
NAMED Key
Figure 95: Selecting or Changing Named Product Screen Sequence
136
Operating Instructions
NOTE: If “Change Setpoint
for XXXXX” Screen appears
instead, see “Selecting the
Setpoint for a Named
Product” on page 137
PRODUCT/SETPOINT Key
+ or – Key
NAMED Key
YES Key
Figure 95: Selecting or Changing Named Product Screen Sequence
136
Operating Instructions
Selecting the Setpoint for a Named Product
4.
If the “Change Setpoint for XXXXX” Screen appears after
pressing the YES soft key to select a named product, the named
product has been programmed with a setpoint range. Complete
the following steps to select a setpoint for the named product.
1.
The “Change Setpoint for XXXXX” Screen briefly
appears, then the “Current Setpoint of XXXXX &
Setpoint Range Is XX to XX” Screen will appear. See
Figure 96.
2.
Press the + /- or EXIT soft keys accordingly as described
below. See Figure 96.
•
Press the + or - soft keys to change the current setpoint for
the named product and then go to step 3.
•
Press the EXIT soft key to accept the current setpoint for
the named product. The Standard Display will appear with
the named product and setpoint. See Figure 96.
3.
If the + or - soft keys were pressed to change the current
setpoint for the named product, the “New Setpoint for
XXXXX Will Be” Screen will appear. See Figure 96.
Press the YES soft key to accept the new setpoint for the
named product.
NOTE: If the NO key is pressed the setpoint will not be
changed and the display will return to the Standard
Display.
5.
The “Programming New Setpoint for XXXXX” Screen
will briefly appear. See Figure 96.
6.
The “New Setpoint Is XX” Screen briefly appears. See
Figure 96.
7.
The Standard Display appears with the named product and
new setpoint. See Figure 96.
NOTE: Pressing the EXIT soft key at any point will return to
the Standard Display.
NOTE: If no keys are pressed for 30 seconds while in the
Named Product Changer Screens, the HMI Control Panel
will return to the Standard Display.
137
Operating Instructions
Selecting the Setpoint for a Named Product
4.
If the “Change Setpoint for XXXXX” Screen appears after
pressing the YES soft key to select a named product, the named
product has been programmed with a setpoint range. Complete
the following steps to select a setpoint for the named product.
1.
The “Change Setpoint for XXXXX” Screen briefly
appears, then the “Current Setpoint of XXXXX &
Setpoint Range Is XX to XX” Screen will appear. See
Figure 96.
2.
Press the + /- or EXIT soft keys accordingly as described
below. See Figure 96.
•
Press the + or - soft keys to change the current setpoint for
the named product and then go to step 3.
•
Press the EXIT soft key to accept the current setpoint for
the named product. The Standard Display will appear with
the named product and setpoint. See Figure 96.
3.
If the + or - soft keys were pressed to change the current
setpoint for the named product, the “New Setpoint for
XXXXX Will Be” Screen will appear. See Figure 96.
Press the YES soft key to accept the new setpoint for the
named product.
NOTE: If the NO key is pressed the setpoint will not be
changed and the display will return to the Standard
Display.
5.
The “Programming New Setpoint for XXXXX” Screen
will briefly appear. See Figure 96.
6.
The “New Setpoint Is XX” Screen briefly appears. See
Figure 96.
7.
The Standard Display appears with the named product and
new setpoint. See Figure 96.
NOTE: Pressing the EXIT soft key at any point will return to
the Standard Display.
NOTE: If no keys are pressed for 30 seconds while in the
Named Product Changer Screens, the HMI Control Panel
will return to the Standard Display.
137
Operating Instructions
+ or – Key
EXIT Key
YES Key
Figure 96: Selecting Setpoint for Named Product Screen Sequence
138
Operating Instructions
+ or – Key
EXIT Key
YES Key
Figure 96: Selecting Setpoint for Named Product Screen Sequence
138
Operating Instructions
Changing the Setpoint for a Named
Product
1
If the named product has been programmed with a setpoint
range, the setpoint for the named product can be changed.
Complete the following steps to change the setpoint for a
named product. This example shows the Standard Display with
the PRODUCT/SETPOINT soft key. Using the Standard Display
with the PRODUCT soft key is basically the same but some of
the screens differ slightly.
1.
2
Begin at the Standard Display.
If the Temperature Watch Display is showing, press the
MENU soft key once to return to the Standard Display.
2.
Press the PRODUCT/SETPOINT (or PRODUCT) soft key on
the Standard Display. See Figure 97.
3.
The “Named Product, Numeric Setpoint or Change
Setpoint?” (or Named Product or Change Setpoint?)
Screen will appear. See Figure 98.
1.
Standard Display
2.
Product/Setpoint Soft Key
Figure 97: Changing Setpoint for Named Product
4.
Press the CHANGE SP soft key. See Figure 98.
5.
The “Change Setpoint for XXXXX” Screen briefly
appears, then the “Current Setpoint for XXXXX &
Setpoint Range Is XX to XX” Screen will appear. See
Figure 98.
6.
Press the + or - soft keys to change the setpoint reading.
See Figure 98.
139
Operating Instructions
Changing the Setpoint for a Named
Product
1
If the named product has been programmed with a setpoint
range, the setpoint for the named product can be changed.
Complete the following steps to change the setpoint for a
named product. This example shows the Standard Display with
the PRODUCT/SETPOINT soft key. Using the Standard Display
with the PRODUCT soft key is basically the same but some of
the screens differ slightly.
1.
2
Begin at the Standard Display.
If the Temperature Watch Display is showing, press the
MENU soft key once to return to the Standard Display.
2.
Press the PRODUCT/SETPOINT (or PRODUCT) soft key on
the Standard Display. See Figure 97.
3.
The “Named Product, Numeric Setpoint or Change
Setpoint?” (or Named Product or Change Setpoint?)
Screen will appear. See Figure 98.
1.
Standard Display
2.
Product/Setpoint Soft Key
Figure 97: Changing Setpoint for Named Product
4.
Press the CHANGE SP soft key. See Figure 98.
5.
The “Change Setpoint for XXXXX” Screen briefly
appears, then the “Current Setpoint for XXXXX &
Setpoint Range Is XX to XX” Screen will appear. See
Figure 98.
6.
Press the + or - soft keys to change the setpoint reading.
See Figure 98.
139
Operating Instructions
7.
Press the YES or NO soft keys accordingly as
describedbelow. See Figure 98.
•
If the NO key is pressed the named product setpoint
change made with the “+” or “-” soft keys will not be
accepted, the named product setpoint will not be changed
and the display will return to the Standard Display.
•
If the YES soft key is pressed, the named product setpoint
change made with the “+” or “-” soft keys will be
accepted, and the following screens will appear.
8.
The “Programming New Setpoint for XXXXX” Screen
will briefly appear. See Figure 98.
9.
The “New Setpoint Is XX” Screen briefly appears. See
Figure 98.
10. The Standard Display appears with the new setpoint. See
Figure 96.
NOTE: Pressing the EXIT soft key at any point will return to
the Standard Display.
NOTE: If no keys are pressed for 30 seconds while in the
Named Product Changer Screens, the HMI Control Panel
will return to the Standard Display.
140
Operating Instructions
7.
Press the YES or NO soft keys accordingly as
describedbelow. See Figure 98.
•
If the NO key is pressed the named product setpoint
change made with the “+” or “-” soft keys will not be
accepted, the named product setpoint will not be changed
and the display will return to the Standard Display.
•
If the YES soft key is pressed, the named product setpoint
change made with the “+” or “-” soft keys will be
accepted, and the following screens will appear.
8.
The “Programming New Setpoint for XXXXX” Screen
will briefly appear. See Figure 98.
9.
The “New Setpoint Is XX” Screen briefly appears. See
Figure 98.
10. The Standard Display appears with the new setpoint. See
Figure 96.
NOTE: Pressing the EXIT soft key at any point will return to
the Standard Display.
NOTE: If no keys are pressed for 30 seconds while in the
Named Product Changer Screens, the HMI Control Panel
will return to the Standard Display.
140
Operating Instructions
PRODUCT/SETPOINT Key
+ or – Key
CHANGE SP Key
YES Key
Figure 98: Changing Setpoint for Named Product Screen Sequence
141
Operating Instructions
PRODUCT/SETPOINT Key
CHANGE SP Key
+ or – Key
YES Key
Figure 98: Changing Setpoint for Named Product Screen Sequence
141
Operating Instructions
Selecting a Setpoint
3.
The “Named Product / Numeric Setpoint?” Screen briefly
appears, then the “Named Product or Numeric Setpoint?”
Screen will appear. See Figure 100.
4.
Press the NUMERIC soft key. See Figure 100.
5.
The “Setpoint” Screen briefly appears, then the “Current
Setpoint Is” Screen will appear. See Figure 100.
6.
Press the + or - soft keys to change the setpoint. See
Figure 100.
7.
Press the YES or NO soft key accordingly as described
below. See Figure 100.
•
If the NO key is pressed the setpoint change made with the
“+” or “-” soft keys will not be accepted, the setpoint will
not be changed and the display will return to the Standard
Display.
•
If the YES soft key is pressed, the setpoint change made
with the “+” or “-” soft keys will be accepted, and the
following screens will appear.
8.
The “Programming New Setpoint” Screen will appear. See
Figure 100.
3.
The “Named Product / Numeric Setpoint?” Screen briefly
appears, then the “Named Product or Numeric Setpoint?”
Screen will appear. See Figure 100.
4.
Press the NUMERIC soft key. See Figure 100.
5.
The “Setpoint” Screen briefly appears, then the “Current
Setpoint Is” Screen will appear. See Figure 100.
6.
Press the + or - soft keys to change the setpoint. See
Figure 100.
7.
Press the YES or NO soft key accordingly as described
below. See Figure 100.
•
If the NO key is pressed the setpoint change made with the
“+” or “-” soft keys will not be accepted, the setpoint will
not be changed and the display will return to the Standard
Display.
•
If the YES soft key is pressed, the setpoint change made
with the “+” or “-” soft keys will be accepted, and the
following screens will appear.
8.
The “Programming New Setpoint” Screen will appear. See
Figure 100.
To select or change a setpoint complete the following steps.
1.
Begin at the Standard Display.
If the Temperature Watch Display is showing, press the
MENU soft key once to return to the Standard Display.
Press the PRODUCT/SETPOINT soft key on the Standard
Display. See Figure 99.
2.
1
2
1.
Standard Display
2.
Product/Setpoint Soft Key
Figure 99: Selecting or Changing Setpoint
142
Operating Instructions
Selecting a Setpoint
To select or change a setpoint complete the following steps.
1.
Begin at the Standard Display.
If the Temperature Watch Display is showing, press the
MENU soft key once to return to the Standard Display.
Press the PRODUCT/SETPOINT soft key on the Standard
Display. See Figure 99.
2.
1
2
1.
Standard Display
2.
Product/Setpoint Soft Key
Figure 99: Selecting or Changing Setpoint
142
Operating Instructions
9.
The “New Setpoint Is XX” Screen briefly appears. See
Figure 100.
10. The Standard Display appears with setpoint changed to the
new setpoint. See Figure 100.
NOTE: Pressing the EXIT soft key at any point will return to
the Standard Display.
NOTE: If no keys are pressed for 30 seconds while in the
Named Product Changer Screens, the HMI Control Panel
will return to the Standard Display.
143
Operating Instructions
9.
The “New Setpoint Is XX” Screen briefly appears. See
Figure 100.
10. The Standard Display appears with setpoint changed to the
new setpoint. See Figure 100.
NOTE: Pressing the EXIT soft key at any point will return to
the Standard Display.
NOTE: If no keys are pressed for 30 seconds while in the
Named Product Changer Screens, the HMI Control Panel
will return to the Standard Display.
143
Operating Instructions
PRODUCT/SETPOINT Key
+ or – Key
YES Key
NUMERIC Key
Figure 100: Selecting or Changing Numeric Setpoint Screen Sequence
144
Operating Instructions
PRODUCT/SETPOINT Key
+ or – Key
NUMERIC Key
YES Key
Figure 100: Selecting or Changing Numeric Setpoint Screen Sequence
144
Optional Rear Remote Control Panel
The optional Rear Remote Control Panel is connected to the
control system and is used to operate the unit from a remote
location, typically at the rear of the trailer. In the illustration
below all display segments are turned on.
Rear Remote Control Panel
Functionality
The Rear Remote Control Panel functions that are available to
the user are determined by the setting of the Rear Remote
Control Action features in the Guarded Access / Unit
Configuration Menu. The Rear Remote Control Action can be
set to either RUN or STAND BY.
When the unit is turned on at the Rear Remote Control Panel
either the Standard Display or [STAnd by] will appear on the
display.
Figure 101: Rear Remote Control Panel
Rear Remote Control Action set to
Run
If the Rear Remote Control Action is set to RUN the Standard
Display will be present on the Rear Remote Control Panel and
the unit will start and run when the Rear Remote Control Panel
ON Key is pressed. Pressing the Rear Remote Control Panel
OFF Key will turn the unit off.
145
Optional Rear Remote Control Panel
The optional Rear Remote Control Panel is connected to the
control system and is used to operate the unit from a remote
location, typically at the rear of the trailer. In the illustration
below all display segments are turned on.
Rear Remote Control Panel
Functionality
The Rear Remote Control Panel functions that are available to
the user are determined by the setting of the Rear Remote
Control Action features in the Guarded Access / Unit
Configuration Menu. The Rear Remote Control Action can be
set to either RUN or STAND BY.
When the unit is turned on at the Rear Remote Control Panel
either the Standard Display or [STAnd by] will appear on the
display.
Figure 101: Rear Remote Control Panel
Rear Remote Control Action set to
Run
If the Rear Remote Control Action is set to RUN the Standard
Display will be present on the Rear Remote Control Panel and
the unit will start and run when the Rear Remote Control Panel
ON Key is pressed. Pressing the Rear Remote Control Panel
OFF Key will turn the unit off.
145
Optional Rear Remote Control Panel
If the control system is powered up from the Rear Remote
Control Panel the Standard Display will appear in both the
Rear Remote Control Panel display and the unit HMI Control
Panel display. When set to RUN the Rear Remote Control
Panel allows the following:
•
Turn the unit on and off
•
Unit will start and run
•
Change the Setpoint
•
Select Cycle-Sentry or Continuous Mode
•
Display discharge air temperature
•
Display and clear alarm codes
•
Initiate a manual defrost cycle
•
Send a Start of Trip marker to the ServiceWatch and
CargoWatch Data Loggers
•
Initiate a Pretrip Test
Rear Remote Control Action Set to
Stand By
If the Rear Remote Control Action is set to STAND BY,
pressing the Rear Remote Control Panel ON Key will power
up the control system, but the unit will not start and run.
Pressing the Rear Remote Control Panel OFF Key will turn the
unit off. The HMI Control Panel on the unit must be used to
start and stop unit operation.
In addition to turning the unit on and off, when set to STAND
BY the Rear Remote Control Panel allows the following:
•
Turn the unit on and off
•
Unit will not start and run
•
Change the Setpoint
•
Select Cycle Sentry or Continuous Mode (unless
prevented by OptiSet Plus)
•
Display discharge air temperature
•
Display and clear alarm codes
•
Send a Start of Trip marker to the ServiceWatch and
CargoWatch Data Loggers
146
Optional Rear Remote Control Panel
If the control system is powered up from the Rear Remote
Control Panel the Standard Display will appear in both the
Rear Remote Control Panel display and the unit HMI Control
Panel display. When set to RUN the Rear Remote Control
Panel allows the following:
•
Turn the unit on and off
•
Unit will start and run
•
Change the Setpoint
•
Select Cycle-Sentry or Continuous Mode
•
Display discharge air temperature
•
Display and clear alarm codes
•
Initiate a manual defrost cycle
•
Send a Start of Trip marker to the ServiceWatch and
CargoWatch Data Loggers
•
Initiate a Pretrip Test
146
Rear Remote Control Action Set to
Stand By
If the Rear Remote Control Action is set to STAND BY,
pressing the Rear Remote Control Panel ON Key will power
up the control system, but the unit will not start and run.
Pressing the Rear Remote Control Panel OFF Key will turn the
unit off. The HMI Control Panel on the unit must be used to
start and stop unit operation.
In addition to turning the unit on and off, when set to STAND
BY the Rear Remote Control Panel allows the following:
•
Turn the unit on and off
•
Unit will not start and run
•
Change the Setpoint
•
Select Cycle Sentry or Continuous Mode (unless
prevented by OptiSet Plus)
•
Display discharge air temperature
•
Display and clear alarm codes
•
Send a Start of Trip marker to the ServiceWatch and
CargoWatch Data Loggers
Optional Rear Remote Control Panel
When in STAND BY, the unit will not start and run and a
defrost cycle or Pretrip Test cannot be started.
If the control system is powered up from the remote control
panel a stand by message will appear in both the remote control
panel display and the unit HMI Control Panel display as shown
in Figure 102 and Figure 103.
When the StAnd bY display is shown, press the Select Key to
show the Remote Standard Display. When the remote standard
Display is shown, the setpoint and operating mode can be
changed, the discharge air temperature can be displayed and
alarms can be viewed and cleared. In addition, a Start of Trip
can be sent to the data loggers.
After the last key is pressed, the display will return to the
StAnd bY display shown in Figure 104 in about 10 seconds.
Figure 102: Rear Remote Control Panel Display
Figure 104: Press Select Key
Figure 103: Unit HMI Control Panel Display
147
Optional Rear Remote Control Panel
When in STAND BY, the unit will not start and run and a
defrost cycle or Pretrip Test cannot be started.
If the control system is powered up from the remote control
panel a stand by message will appear in both the remote control
panel display and the unit HMI Control Panel display as shown
in Figure 102 and Figure 103.
When the StAnd bY display is shown, press the Select Key to
show the Remote Standard Display. When the remote standard
Display is shown, the setpoint and operating mode can be
changed, the discharge air temperature can be displayed and
alarms can be viewed and cleared. In addition, a Start of Trip
can be sent to the data loggers.
After the last key is pressed, the display will return to the
StAnd bY display shown in Figure 104 in about 10 seconds.
Figure 102: Rear Remote Control Panel Display
Figure 104: Press Select Key
Figure 103: Unit HMI Control Panel Display
147
Optional Rear Remote Control Panel
Keypad
The nine touch sensitive keys are used to turn the unit on and
off. They also allow the setpoint to be changed, Cycle Sentry
or Continuous Mode to be selected, Alarm Codes and other
operating data to be displayed and Pretrip Tests and Defrost
Cycles to be performed. A Start of Trip marker can also be
sent to the data loggers.
Figure 105: Rear Remote Control Panel
ON Key
Turns the unit on as determined
by the setting of Rear Remote
Control Action.
OFF Key
Turns the unit off.
Up Arrow
Key
Increases setpoint or changes
other setting.
Down
Arrow Key
Decreases setpoint or changes
other setting.
Select Key
Allows Cycle-Sentry to be turned
on and off, displays the discharge
air temperature and alarms.
Enter Key
Executes a prompt or loads a
new setpoint or other setting.
Pretrip Key Initiates a Pretrip Test.
148
Optional Rear Remote Control Panel
Keypad
The nine touch sensitive keys are used to turn the unit on and
off. They also allow the setpoint to be changed, Cycle Sentry
or Continuous Mode to be selected, Alarm Codes and other
operating data to be displayed and Pretrip Tests and Defrost
Cycles to be performed. A Start of Trip marker can also be
sent to the data loggers.
Figure 105: Rear Remote Control Panel
ON Key
Turns the unit on as determined
by the setting of Rear Remote
Control Action.
OFF Key
Turns the unit off.
Up Arrow
Key
Increases setpoint or changes
other setting.
Down
Arrow Key
Decreases setpoint or changes
other setting.
Select Key
Allows Cycle-Sentry to be turned
on and off, displays the discharge
air temperature and alarms.
Enter Key
Executes a prompt or loads a
new setpoint or other setting.
Pretrip Key Initiates a Pretrip Test.
148
Optional Rear Remote Control Panel
TK Logo
Key
Sends a Start of Trip marker to
the data logger.
Defrost Key
Initiates a defrost cycle if
conditions allow.
Display
The display normally shows the Standard Display of return air
temperature and setpoint. The icons on either side of the
display indicate operating modes and alarms. The display
shown here has all possible segments lighted. The display
icons are defined below.
Cool Icon
This icon appears when the unit is
cooling.
Heat Icon
This icon appears when the unit is
heating.
Modulation
Icon
This icon appears when the unit is
in modulation.
Defrost Icon
This icon appears when the unit is
defrosting.
Cycle-Sentry This icon appears when the unit is
Icon
operating in Cycle-Sentry mode.
Alarm Icon
This icon appears when an alarm
condition has been detected.
This icon appears when the unit is
Electric
operating in the optional electric
Standby Icon
standby mode.
Setpoint
Icon
This icon appears when the
setpoint is being shown in the
display.
Not Used
This icon appears during a remote
control panel test but is not
currently used.
Figure 106: Rear Remote Control Panel
149
Optional Rear Remote Control Panel
TK Logo
Key
Sends a Start of Trip marker to
the data logger.
Defrost Key
Initiates a defrost cycle if
conditions allow.
Display
The display normally shows the Standard Display of return air
temperature and setpoint. The icons on either side of the
display indicate operating modes and alarms. The display
shown here has all possible segments lighted. The display
icons are defined below.
Cool Icon
This icon appears when the unit is
cooling.
Heat Icon
This icon appears when the unit is
heating.
Modulation
Icon
This icon appears when the unit is
in modulation.
Defrost Icon
This icon appears when the unit is
defrosting.
Cycle-Sentry This icon appears when the unit is
Icon
operating in Cycle-Sentry mode.
Alarm Icon
This icon appears when an alarm
condition has been detected.
This icon appears when the unit is
Electric
operating in the optional electric
Standby Icon
standby mode.
Figure 106: Rear Remote Control Panel
Setpoint
Icon
This icon appears when the
setpoint is being shown in the
display.
Not Used
This icon appears during a remote
control panel test but is not
currently used.
149
Optional Rear Remote Control Panel
Reading a Typical Remote
Standard Display
The Remote Standard Display shows the temperature and
setpoint. The icons at the sides of the display indicate operating
conditions.
•
The unit is cooling as shown by the icon at the upper left
side of the display.
•
The unit is operating in Cycle Sentry mode as shown by
the icon at the upper right side of the display.
Remote Control Panel Lockout
The remote control panel may be locked out during some
control system functions such as Service Test Mode, Interface
Board Test Mode and while setting programmable features. If
this is the case the display shown in Figure 108 will appear.
The display will return to the Remote Standard Display when
allowed by the control system.
Figure 107: Remote Standard Display
The Remote Standard Display in Figure 107 shows the
following information:
•
The temperature (typically return air temperature) is
35.8°F.
•
The setpoint is 35°F.
Figure 108: Remote Lock Out Display
150
Optional Rear Remote Control Panel
Reading a Typical Remote
Standard Display
The Remote Standard Display shows the temperature and
setpoint. The icons at the sides of the display indicate operating
conditions.
•
The unit is cooling as shown by the icon at the upper left
side of the display.
•
The unit is operating in Cycle Sentry mode as shown by
the icon at the upper right side of the display.
Remote Control Panel Lockout
The remote control panel may be locked out during some
control system functions such as Service Test Mode, Interface
Board Test Mode and while setting programmable features. If
this is the case the display shown in Figure 108 will appear.
The display will return to the Remote Standard Display when
allowed by the control system.
Figure 107: Remote Standard Display
The Remote Standard Display in Figure 107 shows the
following information:
•
The temperature (typically return air temperature) is
35.8°F.
•
The setpoint is 35°F.
150
Figure 108: Remote Lock Out Display
Optional Rear Remote Control Panel
Turning the Unit ON or OFF
(Configured for STAND BY
Operation)
The control system is turned on by pressing the ON Key and
off by pressing the OFF Key. When the On Key is pressed the
remote display briefly shows all segments and then StAnd by
as shown in Figure 109. A stand by message will also appear
on the unit HMI Control Panel display. The setpoint can be
changed but the unit will not start and run. Only the Select Key,
Enter Key and Up and Down Arrow Keys are functional. The
unit can be started and run by pressing the unit HMI Control
Panel ON Key.
IMPORTANT: To change the setpoint, press the Select Key to
show the Remote Standard Display. The setpoint can now be
changed as shown on page 152.
Figure 109: Stand By Display
Turning the Unit On and Off
(Configured for RUN Operation)
The unit is turned on by pressing the ON key and off by
pressing the OFF key. When the ON key is pressed the remote
display briefly shows all segments and then COn FIg as the
control system initializes. Then the Remote Standard Display
will appear as shown in Figure 110. The unit will start and run
if necessary.
151
Optional Rear Remote Control Panel
Turning the Unit ON or OFF
(Configured for STAND BY
Operation)
The control system is turned on by pressing the ON Key and
off by pressing the OFF Key. When the On Key is pressed the
remote display briefly shows all segments and then StAnd by
as shown in Figure 109. A stand by message will also appear
on the unit HMI Control Panel display. The setpoint can be
changed but the unit will not start and run. Only the Select Key,
Enter Key and Up and Down Arrow Keys are functional. The
unit can be started and run by pressing the unit HMI Control
Panel ON Key.
IMPORTANT: To change the setpoint, press the Select Key to
show the Remote Standard Display. The setpoint can now be
changed as shown on page 152.
Figure 109: Stand By Display
Turning the Unit On and Off
(Configured for RUN Operation)
The unit is turned on by pressing the ON key and off by
pressing the OFF key. When the ON key is pressed the remote
display briefly shows all segments and then COn FIg as the
control system initializes. Then the Remote Standard Display
will appear as shown in Figure 110. The unit will start and run
if necessary.
151
Optional Rear Remote Control Panel
Changing the Setpoint
The setpoint can be changed when the Remote Standard
Display is shown.
1.
When the Remote Standard Display is shown, press the
Up or Down Arrow Keys to select the desired setpoint
(Figure 111).
Figure 110: Standard Display
Figure 111: Press Up or Down Arrow Keys
152
Optional Rear Remote Control Panel
Changing the Setpoint
The setpoint can be changed when the Remote Standard
Display is shown.
1.
When the Remote Standard Display is shown, press the
Up or Down Arrow Keys to select the desired setpoint
(Figure 111).
Figure 110: Standard Display
Figure 111: Press Up or Down Arrow Keys
152
Optional Rear Remote Control Panel
2.
When the desired setpoint is shown on the display,
immediately press the Enter Key to load the new setpoint.
The display will briefly show [Lod] and then the new
setpoint will reappear in the display.
IMPORTANT: The Enter key (Figure 112) must be pressed
or the setpoint will not be changed. The display will return to
the Standard Display and the setpoint will return to the old
setpoint in about 10 seconds if the Enter Key is not pressed.
Alarm Code 127 Setpoint Not Entered is set, to indicate that
the setpoint change was started but not completed.
Selecting Cycle-Sentry or
Continuous Mode
Cycle Sentry or Continuous Mode operation can be changed
using the Select Key.
1.
When the Remote Standard Display is shown, press the
Select key once to display the Cycle Sentry prompt.
Figure 113: Press Select Key
2.
Figure 112: Press Enter Key
Use the Up and Down Arrow Keys to chose either YES or
nO. Yes = Cycle Sentry Mode. nO = Continuous Mode.
IMPORTANT: Confirm that the correct setpoint is set.
153
Optional Rear Remote Control Panel
2.
When the desired setpoint is shown on the display,
immediately press the Enter Key to load the new setpoint.
The display will briefly show [Lod] and then the new
setpoint will reappear in the display.
IMPORTANT: The Enter key (Figure 112) must be pressed
or the setpoint will not be changed. The display will return to
the Standard Display and the setpoint will return to the old
setpoint in about 10 seconds if the Enter Key is not pressed.
Alarm Code 127 Setpoint Not Entered is set, to indicate that
the setpoint change was started but not completed.
Selecting Cycle-Sentry or
Continuous Mode
Cycle Sentry or Continuous Mode operation can be changed
using the Select Key.
1.
When the Remote Standard Display is shown, press the
Select key once to display the Cycle Sentry prompt.
Figure 113: Press Select Key
2.
Figure 112: Press Enter Key
Use the Up and Down Arrow Keys to chose either YES or
nO. Yes = Cycle Sentry Mode. nO = Continuous Mode.
IMPORTANT: Confirm that the correct setpoint is set.
153
Optional Rear Remote Control Panel
Displaying the Discharge Air
Temperature
The discharge air temperature can be shown using the Select
Key.
1.
Figure 114: Press Up or Down Arrow Keys
3.
When the Remote Standard Display is shown, press the
Select Key twice. The discharge air temperature will be
shown in the display for about 10 seconds.
When the desired selection is shown, press the Enter Key
(Figure 115) to load the setting. The display will briefly
show [Lod] and then the new selection will briefly appear
in the display.
Figure 116: Press Select Key Twice
2.
The display will then return to the Remote Standard
Display.
Figure 115: Press Enter Key
4.
The display will then return to the Remote Standard
Display.
154
Optional Rear Remote Control Panel
Displaying the Discharge Air
Temperature
The discharge air temperature can be shown using the Select
Key.
1.
Figure 114: Press Up or Down Arrow Keys
3.
When the Remote Standard Display is shown, press the
Select Key twice. The discharge air temperature will be
shown in the display for about 10 seconds.
When the desired selection is shown, press the Enter Key
(Figure 115) to load the setting. The display will briefly
show [Lod] and then the new selection will briefly appear
in the display.
Figure 116: Press Select Key Twice
2.
Figure 115: Press Enter Key
4.
154
The display will then return to the Remote Standard
Display.
The display will then return to the Remote Standard
Display.
Optional Rear Remote Control Panel
Viewing and Clearing Alarm
Codes
Alarm Codes can be displayed and cleared using the Select
Key.
1.
When the Remote Standard Display is shown, press the
Select Key three times. Any alarm codes present will be
shown in the display, with the most recent alarm code
shown first. If no alarm codes are present the display will
show [00].
Figure 118: Press Enter Key
3.
If any additional alarms are present, the next alarm will be
shown. If no other alarms are present the display will
briefly show [00].
Figure 117: Press Select Key Three Times
2.
To clear a displayed alarm code, press the Enter Key. The
display will briefly show CLEAr ALm.
Figure 119: No Alarms Display
4.
The display will then return to the Remote Standard
Display.
155
Optional Rear Remote Control Panel
Viewing and Clearing Alarm
Codes
Alarm Codes can be displayed and cleared using the Select
Key.
1.
When the Remote Standard Display is shown, press the
Select Key three times. Any alarm codes present will be
shown in the display, with the most recent alarm code
shown first. If no alarm codes are present the display will
show [00].
Figure 118: Press Enter Key
3.
If any additional alarms are present, the next alarm will be
shown. If no other alarms are present the display will
briefly show [00].
Figure 117: Press Select Key Three Times
2.
To clear a displayed alarm code, press the Enter Key. The
display will briefly show CLEAr ALm.
Figure 119: No Alarms Display
4.
The display will then return to the Remote Standard
Display.
155
Optional Rear Remote Control Panel
Starting a Manual Defrost Cycle
If conditions allow, a manual defrost cycle can be initiated
using the Defrost Key.
1.
Press the Defrost Key. The defrost prompt [EnTEr dEF]
will appear in the display.
Figure 121: Press Enter Key
3.
The display will return to the Remote Standard Display.
The Defrost Icon will be shown in the display.
Figure 120: Press Defrost Key
2.
When the defrost prompt is shown, press the Enter Key to
start a manual defrost. The display will briefly show
LOAd dEF and then a defrost cycle will begin if
conditions allow.
Figure 122: Defrost Icon Displayed
4.
The defrost cycle will terminate automatically.
156
Optional Rear Remote Control Panel
Starting a Manual Defrost Cycle
If conditions allow, a manual defrost cycle can be initiated
using the Defrost Key.
1.
Press the Defrost Key. The defrost prompt [EnTEr dEF]
will appear in the display.
Figure 121: Press Enter Key
3.
The display will return to the Remote Standard Display.
The Defrost Icon will be shown in the display.
Figure 120: Press Defrost Key
2.
When the defrost prompt is shown, press the Enter Key to
start a manual defrost. The display will briefly show
LOAd dEF and then a defrost cycle will begin if
conditions allow.
Figure 122: Defrost Icon Displayed
4.
156
The defrost cycle will terminate automatically.
Optional Rear Remote Control Panel
Sending a Start of Trip Marker
2.
A Start of Trip marker can be sent to the data loggers using the
TK Logo Key.
1.
When the Start of Trip prompt is shown, press the Enter
Key to send a Start of Trip marker to the CargoWatch and
ServiceWatch data loggers. The display will briefly show
LOAd SOt.
Press the TK Logo Key. The Start of Trip [EnTEr SOt]
prompt will appear in the display.
Figure 124: Press Enter Key
Figure 123: Press TK Logo Key
3.
The display will then return to the Remote Standard
Display.
157
Optional Rear Remote Control Panel
Sending a Start of Trip Marker
2.
A Start of Trip marker can be sent to the data loggers using the
TK Logo Key.
1.
When the Start of Trip prompt is shown, press the Enter
Key to send a Start of Trip marker to the CargoWatch and
ServiceWatch data loggers. The display will briefly show
LOAd SOt.
Press the TK Logo Key. The Start of Trip [EnTEr SOt]
prompt will appear in the display.
Figure 124: Press Enter Key
Figure 123: Press TK Logo Key
3.
The display will then return to the Remote Standard
Display.
157
Optional Rear Remote Control Panel
Running a Pretrip Test
3.
A Pretrip Test can be started using the Pretrip Key as long as
the unit is not in STAND BY. If the unit is not running when
the Pretrip Test is started a Full Pretrip Test will be performed.
If the unit is running when the Pretrip Test is started a Running
Pretrip Test will be performed.
1.
Clear any alarm codes as shown previously.
2.
Press the Pretrip Key. The Pretrip [EntEr PrE] prompt will
appear in the display.
When the Pretrip prompt is shown, press the Enter Key to
start a Pretrip Test. The display will briefly show LOAd
PrE. If the unit is not running a Full Pretrip Test will be
performed. If the unit is running a Running Pretrip Test
will be performed.
Figure 126: Press Enter Key
Figure 125: Press Pretrip Key
158
Optional Rear Remote Control Panel
Running a Pretrip Test
A Pretrip Test can be started using the Pretrip Key as long as
the unit is not in STAND BY. If the unit is not running when
the Pretrip Test is started a Full Pretrip Test will be performed.
If the unit is running when the Pretrip Test is started a Running
Pretrip Test will be performed.
1.
Clear any alarm codes as shown previously.
2.
Press the Pretrip Key. The Pretrip [EntEr PrE] prompt will
appear in the display.
3.
When the Pretrip prompt is shown, press the Enter Key to
start a Pretrip Test. The display will briefly show LOAd
PrE. If the unit is not running a Full Pretrip Test will be
performed. If the unit is running a Running Pretrip Test
will be performed.
Figure 126: Press Enter Key
Figure 125: Press Pretrip Key
158
Optional Rear Remote Control Panel
4.
When the Pretrip Test is running the display will show PrE
trP. The HMI Control Panel will show the Pretrip Test
progress.
5.
Figure 127: Pretrip Display
When the Pretrip Test is complete the display will show
PASS, CHEC or FAIL. Pressing the Select Key will return
to the Remote Standard Display.
Figure 128: Pass Pretrip Display
159
Optional Rear Remote Control Panel
4.
When the Pretrip Test is running the display will show PrE
trP. The HMI Control Panel will show the Pretrip Test
progress.
Figure 127: Pretrip Display
5.
When the Pretrip Test is complete the display will show
PASS, CHEC or FAIL. Pressing the Select Key will return
to the Remote Standard Display.
Figure 128: Pass Pretrip Display
159
Optional Rear Remote Control Panel
160
Optional Rear Remote Control Panel
160
Loading and Enroute Inspections
This chapter describes pre-loading, post loading, and enroute
inspection procedures. Thermo King refrigeration units are
designed to maintain the required product load temperature
during transit. Follow these recommended loading and enroute
procedures to help minimize temperature related problems.
4.
Verify that the setpoint temperature is correct for your
cargo. Pre-cool the trailer as required.
5.
Supervise product loading to ensure sufficient air space
around and through the load. Airflow around the cargo
must not be restricted.
NOTE: If the warehouse is not refrigerated, operate the
unit with doors closed until cargo is ready to be loaded.
Then turn off the unit, open cargo doors and load cargo.
When cargo is loaded, close trailer doors and restart the
unit.
The unit can be operated with the cargo box doors open
if the truck is backed into a refrigerated warehouse and
the dock door seals fit tightly around the trailer.
Pre-Loading Inspection
1.
Pre-cool products before loading. Note any variances on
the manifest.
2.
Inspect door seals and vent doors for condition and a tight
seal with no air leakage.
3.
Inspect the trailer inside and out. Look for:
•
Damaged or loose trailer skin and insulation
•
Damaged walls, air ducts, floor channels or “T”
flooring
•
Clogged defrost drain tubes
•
Blocked return air bulkhead
161
Loading and Enroute Inspections
This chapter describes pre-loading, post loading, and enroute
inspection procedures. Thermo King refrigeration units are
designed to maintain the required product load temperature
during transit. Follow these recommended loading and enroute
procedures to help minimize temperature related problems.
Pre-Loading Inspection
1.
Pre-cool products before loading. Note any variances on
the manifest.
2.
Inspect door seals and vent doors for condition and a tight
seal with no air leakage.
3.
Inspect the trailer inside and out. Look for:
•
Damaged or loose trailer skin and insulation
•
Damaged walls, air ducts, floor channels or “T”
flooring
•
Clogged defrost drain tubes
•
Blocked return air bulkhead
4.
Verify that the setpoint temperature is correct for your
cargo. Pre-cool the trailer as required.
5.
Supervise product loading to ensure sufficient air space
around and through the load. Airflow around the cargo
must not be restricted.
NOTE: If the warehouse is not refrigerated, operate the
unit with doors closed until cargo is ready to be loaded.
Then turn off the unit, open cargo doors and load cargo.
When cargo is loaded, close trailer doors and restart the
unit.
The unit can be operated with the cargo box doors open
if the truck is backed into a refrigerated warehouse and
the dock door seals fit tightly around the trailer.
161
Loading and Enroute Inspections
1
2
9
3
8
4
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
7
6
6.
7.
8.
9.
5
Correct load height (trailers without chutes)
Tight doors and gaskets
Good air circulation around load
Proper cargo temperature (prior to loading)
Interior/exterior walls and insulation in good
condition
Clear defrost drains
Good outside air circulation
Unit inspection
Tight seals
ADZ30
Figure 129: Loading Considerations
162
Loading and Enroute Inspections
1
2
9
3
8
4
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
7
6
5
6.
7.
8.
9.
Correct load height (trailers without chutes)
Tight doors and gaskets
Good air circulation around load
Proper cargo temperature (prior to loading)
Interior/exterior walls and insulation in good
condition
Clear defrost drains
Good outside air circulation
Unit inspection
Tight seals
ADZ30
Figure 129: Loading Considerations
162
Loading and Enroute Inspections
Post-Loading Inspection
4.
Post-loading inspections ensure the cargo has been loaded
properly. To perform a post-load inspection:
Close or supervise the closing of the cargo box doors.
Make sure they are securely locked.
5.
Make sure the setpoint is at the temperature listed on the
manifest.
6.
If the unit was stopped, restart using the correct starting
procedure. See the Operating Instruction chapter in this
manual.
7.
Start a manual defrost cycle 30 minutes after loading. See
the Manual Defrost procedure in this manual.
1.
Inspect the evaporator outlets for blockage.
2.
Turn the unit off before opening the cargo box doors to
maintain efficient operation.
NOTE: The unit can be operated with the cargo box
doors open if the truck is backed into a refrigerated
warehouse and the dock door seals fit tightly around the
trailer.
3.
Perform a final check of the load temperature. If the load
is above or below temperature, make a final notation on
the manifest.
CAUTION: Cargo must be pre-cooled to the proper
temperature before loading. The unit is designed to
maintain temperature, not cool an above-temperature
load.
163
Loading and Enroute Inspections
Post-Loading Inspection
4.
Post-loading inspections ensure the cargo has been loaded
properly. To perform a post-load inspection:
Close or supervise the closing of the cargo box doors.
Make sure they are securely locked.
5.
Make sure the setpoint is at the temperature listed on the
manifest.
6.
If the unit was stopped, restart using the correct starting
procedure. See the Operating Instruction chapter in this
manual.
7.
Start a manual defrost cycle 30 minutes after loading. See
the Manual Defrost procedure in this manual.
1.
Inspect the evaporator outlets for blockage.
2.
Turn the unit off before opening the cargo box doors to
maintain efficient operation.
NOTE: The unit can be operated with the cargo box
doors open if the truck is backed into a refrigerated
warehouse and the dock door seals fit tightly around the
trailer.
3.
Perform a final check of the load temperature. If the load
is above or below temperature, make a final notation on
the manifest.
CAUTION: Cargo must be pre-cooled to the proper
temperature before loading. The unit is designed to
maintain temperature, not cool an above-temperature
load.
163
Loading and Enroute Inspections
Enroute Inspections
2.
Repeat the Enroute Inspection every 30 minutes until the
compartment temperature is within the desired
temperature range. Stop the unit if the compartment
temperature is not within the desired temperature range on
two consecutive 30 minute inspections, especially if the
compartment temperature appears to be moving away
from the setpoint.
Complete the following enroute inspection every four hours.
This will help minimize temperature related problems.
Inspection Procedure
1.
Verify setpoint is correct.
2.
Check the return air temperature reading. It should be
within the desired temperature range.
3.
Immediately contact the nearest Thermo King Service
Center or your company office.
3.
Initiate a manual defrost cycle after each enroute
inspection.
4.
Take all necessary steps to protect and maintain proper
load temperature.
CAUTION: Stop the unit if the compartment
temperature remains higher than the desired
temperature range from the setpoint on two
consecutive 30 minute inspections. Contact the
nearest Thermo King Service Center or your
company office immediately. Take all necessary steps
to protect and maintain proper load temperature.
Inspection Troubleshooting
1.
If a temperature reading is not within the desired
temperature range, refer to the troubleshooting table on the
following pages. Correct problem as required.
164
Loading and Enroute Inspections
Enroute Inspections
2.
Repeat the Enroute Inspection every 30 minutes until the
compartment temperature is within the desired
temperature range. Stop the unit if the compartment
temperature is not within the desired temperature range on
two consecutive 30 minute inspections, especially if the
compartment temperature appears to be moving away
from the setpoint.
Complete the following enroute inspection every four hours.
This will help minimize temperature related problems.
Inspection Procedure
1.
Verify setpoint is correct.
2.
Check the return air temperature reading. It should be
within the desired temperature range.
3.
Immediately contact the nearest Thermo King Service
Center or your company office.
3.
Initiate a manual defrost cycle after each enroute
inspection.
4.
Take all necessary steps to protect and maintain proper
load temperature.
Inspection Troubleshooting
1.
164
If a temperature reading is not within the desired
temperature range, refer to the troubleshooting table on the
following pages. Correct problem as required.
CAUTION: Stop the unit if the compartment
temperature remains higher than the desired
temperature range from the setpoint on two
consecutive 30 minute inspections. Contact the
nearest Thermo King Service Center or your
company office immediately. Take all necessary steps
to protect and maintain proper load temperature.
Loading and Enroute Inspections
Inspection Troubleshooting
Problem
Cause
Remedy
A return air
temperature
reading is not
within desired
temperature
range of the
setpoint.
The unit has not
had time to cool
down to correct
temperature.
Refer to the load log history. Look for above temperature load records,
properly pre-cooled cargo compartment, length of time on road, etc. Correct
as required. Continue monitoring return air temperature until the reading is
within the desired temperature range of the setpoint.
The unit may have
a low refrigerant
charge.
Check the receiver tank sight glass for refrigerant level. If liquid is not
showing in the receiver tank sight glass, the refrigerant charge may be low.
A competent refrigeration technician is required to add refrigerant or repair
the system. Contact the nearest Thermo King dealer, authorized Service
Center, or call the Thermo King Cold Line for referral. Consult the Table of
Contents for Cold Line information.
The unit is in defrost Monitor the return air temperature after the defrost cycle is completed to see
or has just
if the temperature returns to the desired temperature range of the setpoint.
completed a defrost
cycle.
The evaporator is
plugged with frost.
Initiate a manual defrost cycle. The defrost cycle will automatically terminate
when complete. Continue monitoring the return air temperature until the
reading is within the desired temperature range of the setpoint.
165
Loading and Enroute Inspections
Inspection Troubleshooting
Problem
Cause
Remedy
A return air
temperature
reading is not
within desired
temperature
range of the
setpoint.
The unit has not
had time to cool
down to correct
temperature.
Refer to the load log history. Look for above temperature load records,
properly pre-cooled cargo compartment, length of time on road, etc. Correct
as required. Continue monitoring return air temperature until the reading is
within the desired temperature range of the setpoint.
The unit may have
a low refrigerant
charge.
Check the receiver tank sight glass for refrigerant level. If liquid is not
showing in the receiver tank sight glass, the refrigerant charge may be low.
A competent refrigeration technician is required to add refrigerant or repair
the system. Contact the nearest Thermo King dealer, authorized Service
Center, or call the Thermo King Cold Line for referral. Consult the Table of
Contents for Cold Line information.
The unit is in defrost Monitor the return air temperature after the defrost cycle is completed to see
or has just
if the temperature returns to the desired temperature range of the setpoint.
completed a defrost
cycle.
The evaporator is
plugged with frost.
Initiate a manual defrost cycle. The defrost cycle will automatically terminate
when complete. Continue monitoring the return air temperature until the
reading is within the desired temperature range of the setpoint.
165
Loading and Enroute Inspections
Problem
Cause
Remedy
Improper air
Inspect the unit and cargo compartment to determine if the evaporator fan(s)
circulation in the
are working and properly circulating the air. Poor air circulation may be due
cargo compartment. to improper loading of the cargo, shifting of the load, or fan belt slippage.
Correct as required. Continue monitoring return air temperature until
problem is corrected.
The unit did not
start automatically.
Determine the cause for not starting. Correct as required. Continue
monitoring the return air temperature until the reading is within the desired
temperature range of the setpoint.
166
Loading and Enroute Inspections
Problem
Cause
Remedy
Improper air
Inspect the unit and cargo compartment to determine if the evaporator fan(s)
circulation in the
are working and properly circulating the air. Poor air circulation may be due
cargo compartment. to improper loading of the cargo, shifting of the load, or fan belt slippage.
Correct as required. Continue monitoring return air temperature until
problem is corrected.
The unit did not
start automatically.
166
Determine the cause for not starting. Correct as required. Continue
monitoring the return air temperature until the reading is within the desired
temperature range of the setpoint.
Alarm Codes
Introduction
An alarm code is generated when the microprocessor senses an
abnormal condition. Alarms direct an operator or service
technician to the source of a problem.
Multiple alarms can be present at one time. All generated
alarms will be stored in memory until cleared by the operator.
Document all alarm occurrences and report them to the service
technician.
See “Alarms Menu” in the Operation Instructions Chapter for
information about viewing and clearing alarms.
NOTE: Some alarms (3, 4, 74, 203, and 204) cannot be
cleared in the Alarms Menu, they must be cleared in the
Maintenance Menu or the Guarded Access Menu. Contact
your supervisor or a Thermo King dealer about clearing
those alarms.
IMPORTANT: Always record any Alarm Codes that occur in the order that they occur - as well as any other pertinent
information. This information is extremely valuable to
service personnel.
NOTE: In some cases alarms cannot be cleared, or cannot be
cleared after they have occurred a specified number of times.
If such is the case, these alarms must be cleared by service
personnel. See “Clearing Alarm Codes” on page 170.
Alarm Types
The four types of alarms are described below.
Log Alarms: Log Alarms are indicated by the Log Alarms
screen, which appears for approximately 30 seconds (just
before the Standard Display appears) each time the unit is
turned on. The Alarm Display must be used to view the
existing alarms. This level of alarm serves as a notice to take
167
Alarm Codes
Introduction
An alarm code is generated when the microprocessor senses an
abnormal condition. Alarms direct an operator or service
technician to the source of a problem.
Multiple alarms can be present at one time. All generated
alarms will be stored in memory until cleared by the operator.
Document all alarm occurrences and report them to the service
technician.
See “Alarms Menu” in the Operation Instructions Chapter for
information about viewing and clearing alarms.
NOTE: Some alarms (3, 4, 74, 203, and 204) cannot be
cleared in the Alarms Menu, they must be cleared in the
Maintenance Menu or the Guarded Access Menu. Contact
your supervisor or a Thermo King dealer about clearing
those alarms.
IMPORTANT: Always record any Alarm Codes that occur in the order that they occur - as well as any other pertinent
information. This information is extremely valuable to
service personnel.
NOTE: In some cases alarms cannot be cleared, or cannot be
cleared after they have occurred a specified number of times.
If such is the case, these alarms must be cleared by service
personnel. See “Clearing Alarm Codes” on page 170.
Alarm Types
The four types of alarms are described below.
Log Alarms: Log Alarms are indicated by the Log Alarms
screen, which appears for approximately 30 seconds (just
before the Standard Display appears) each time the unit is
turned on. The Alarm Display must be used to view the
existing alarms. This level of alarm serves as a notice to take
167
Alarm Codes
corrective action before a problem becomes severe.
Maintenance items such as a maintenance reminder hour meter
reaching its time limit are log alarms.
Figure 131: Alarm Display
Figure 130: Log Alarms Screen
Check Alarms: Check Alarms are indicated by the Alarm
Display in which the large Alarm Icon will appears on the
Standard Display as shown below in Figure 131. The Alarm
Menu must be used to view the existing alarms. This level of
alarm serves as a notice to take corrective action before a
problem becomes severe. The unit will run with check alarms
but some features and functions may be inhibited.
Prevent Alarms: Prevent Alarms are also indicated by the
Alarm Display as shown in Figure 131. The Alarm Menu must
be used to view the existing alarms. The unit may stop running
and wait a timed interval or until conditions allow and then
restart. If the unit is waiting to restart, Alarm Code 84 Restart
Null will be present along with the Prevent Alarm. In other
cases the unit may restart or run with reduced performance to
determine if continued operation is possible. If the alarm does
not reoccur with reduced performance the unit will then return
to full performance. If the unit is operating with reduced
performance Alarm Code 85 Forced Unit Operation will also
be present.
168
Alarm Codes
corrective action before a problem becomes severe.
Maintenance items such as a maintenance reminder hour meter
reaching its time limit are log alarms.
Figure 131: Alarm Display
Figure 130: Log Alarms Screen
Check Alarms: Check Alarms are indicated by the Alarm
Display in which the large Alarm Icon will appears on the
Standard Display as shown below in Figure 131. The Alarm
Menu must be used to view the existing alarms. This level of
alarm serves as a notice to take corrective action before a
problem becomes severe. The unit will run with check alarms
but some features and functions may be inhibited.
168
Prevent Alarms: Prevent Alarms are also indicated by the
Alarm Display as shown in Figure 131. The Alarm Menu must
be used to view the existing alarms. The unit may stop running
and wait a timed interval or until conditions allow and then
restart. If the unit is waiting to restart, Alarm Code 84 Restart
Null will be present along with the Prevent Alarm. In other
cases the unit may restart or run with reduced performance to
determine if continued operation is possible. If the alarm does
not reoccur with reduced performance the unit will then return
to full performance. If the unit is operating with reduced
performance Alarm Code 85 Forced Unit Operation will also
be present.
Alarm Codes
Shutdown Alarms: Shutdown Alarms are indicated by the
Alarm Display. Shutdown alarms also cause the display and
backlight to flash on and off, and the display will switch from
normal video to reverse video and back to normal video (light
areas become dark and dark areas become light as shown in
Figure 132). Shutdown alarms force the unit into shutdown.
The unit will remain in shutdown and will not restart until the
shutdown alarm is cleared. Exceptions are some engine and
electric shutdown alarms become that log alarms when
switched to the alternate operating mode (diesel to electric or
electric to diesel).
If a shutdown alarm occurs that affects only diesel mode
operation and the unit is switched to electric (either manually
or automatically), the diesel mode shutdown alarm becomes an
electric mode log alarm. This allows the unit to run in electric
mode without clearing the shutdown alarm that is preventing
diesel mode operation. If the unit is switched back to diesel
mode, the alarm again becomes a diesel mode shutdown alarm
and prevents unit operation. If the unit is configured for
electric to diesel autoswitch, it automatically starts and runs in
diesel mode if an electric shutdown occurs.
In the same manner, if a shutdown alarm occurs that affects
only electric mode operation and the unit is switched to diesel
(either manually or automatically), the electric mode shutdown
alarm becomes a diesel mode log alarm to allow diesel mode
operation. If the unit is switched back to electric mode, the
alarm reverts to an electric mode shutdown alarm and prevents
unit operation.
Figure 132: Shutdown Alarm Display
Pretrip Alarm Codes
If an alarm occurs during a Pretrip Test the alarm code will be
displayed as Pretrip Alarm XX, where XX is the alarm code.
169
Alarm Codes
Shutdown Alarms: Shutdown Alarms are indicated by the
Alarm Display. Shutdown alarms also cause the display and
backlight to flash on and off, and the display will switch from
normal video to reverse video and back to normal video (light
areas become dark and dark areas become light as shown in
Figure 132). Shutdown alarms force the unit into shutdown.
The unit will remain in shutdown and will not restart until the
shutdown alarm is cleared. Exceptions are some engine and
electric shutdown alarms become that log alarms when
switched to the alternate operating mode (diesel to electric or
electric to diesel).
If a shutdown alarm occurs that affects only diesel mode
operation and the unit is switched to electric (either manually
or automatically), the diesel mode shutdown alarm becomes an
electric mode log alarm. This allows the unit to run in electric
mode without clearing the shutdown alarm that is preventing
diesel mode operation. If the unit is switched back to diesel
mode, the alarm again becomes a diesel mode shutdown alarm
and prevents unit operation. If the unit is configured for
electric to diesel autoswitch, it automatically starts and runs in
diesel mode if an electric shutdown occurs.
In the same manner, if a shutdown alarm occurs that affects
only electric mode operation and the unit is switched to diesel
(either manually or automatically), the electric mode shutdown
alarm becomes a diesel mode log alarm to allow diesel mode
operation. If the unit is switched back to electric mode, the
alarm reverts to an electric mode shutdown alarm and prevents
unit operation.
Figure 132: Shutdown Alarm Display
Pretrip Alarm Codes
If an alarm occurs during a Pretrip Test the alarm code will be
displayed as Pretrip Alarm XX, where XX is the alarm code.
169
Alarm Codes
Clearing Alarm Codes
Most alarm codes can be cleared by the operator from the
Alarm Menu using the CLEAR key.
The following control and display sensor alarm codes can only
be cleared from the Maintenance Menu or Guarded Access
Menu:
•
Alarm Code 03 Check Control Return Air Sensor
•
Alarm Code 04 Check Control Discharge Air Sensor
•
Alarm Code 203 Check Display Return Air Sensor
•
Alarm Code 204 Check Display Discharge Air Sensor
The following alarm codes clear automatically:
•
Alarm Code 64 Pretrip Reminder - Clears when a Pretrip
Test is performed.
•
Alarm Code 84 Restart Null - Clears when the unit is no
longer in a restart null due to a Prevent Alarm.
•
Alarm Code 85 Forced Unit Operation - Clears when the
unit is no longer running in a forced mode due to a Prevent
Alarm.
•
Alarm Code 91 Check Electric Ready Input - Clears
automatically when the unit starts running.
The operator should contact a supervisor or a Thermo King
dealer about clearing alarms using the Guarded Access Menu.
Refer to the table on the following pages for alarm corrective
action.
NOTE: Document all alarm faults and report them to the
service technician.
There are three levels of corrective action that can be taken
when an alarm condition occurs.
OK To Run: An alarm condition exists but does not affect
unit operation. Corrective action can occur at a later date.
Check As Specified: An alarm condition exists that could
affect unit operation. Follow directions in the Corrective
Action column on the following chart.
Take Immediate Action: An alarm condition exists that
will damage the unit or load. Take immediate action to correct
the problem.
170
Alarm Codes
Clearing Alarm Codes
Most alarm codes can be cleared by the operator from the
Alarm Menu using the CLEAR key.
The following control and display sensor alarm codes can only
be cleared from the Maintenance Menu or Guarded Access
Menu:
•
Alarm Code 03 Check Control Return Air Sensor
•
Alarm Code 04 Check Control Discharge Air Sensor
•
Alarm Code 203 Check Display Return Air Sensor
•
Alarm Code 204 Check Display Discharge Air Sensor
The following alarm codes clear automatically:
•
Alarm Code 64 Pretrip Reminder - Clears when a Pretrip
Test is performed.
•
Alarm Code 84 Restart Null - Clears when the unit is no
longer in a restart null due to a Prevent Alarm.
•
170
Alarm Code 85 Forced Unit Operation - Clears when the
unit is no longer running in a forced mode due to a Prevent
Alarm.
•
Alarm Code 91 Check Electric Ready Input - Clears
automatically when the unit starts running.
The operator should contact a supervisor or a Thermo King
dealer about clearing alarms using the Guarded Access Menu.
Refer to the table on the following pages for alarm corrective
action.
NOTE: Document all alarm faults and report them to the
service technician.
There are three levels of corrective action that can be taken
when an alarm condition occurs.
OK To Run: An alarm condition exists but does not affect
unit operation. Corrective action can occur at a later date.
Check As Specified: An alarm condition exists that could
affect unit operation. Follow directions in the Corrective
Action column on the following chart.
Take Immediate Action: An alarm condition exists that
will damage the unit or load. Take immediate action to correct
the problem.
Alarm Codes
NOTE: The corrective actions listed above and on the
following chart are suggestions only. Always consult your
company for final decisions.
NOTE: The chart on the following pages shows all possible
alarm codes for all possible applications. Not all codes will be
applicable to each individual unit.
171
Alarm Codes
NOTE: The corrective actions listed above and on the
following chart are suggestions only. Always consult your
company for final decisions.
NOTE: The chart on the following pages shows all possible
alarm codes for all possible applications. Not all codes will be
applicable to each individual unit.
171
Alarm Codes
Table of Alarm Codes
NOTE: Not all alarm codes are available with all microprocessor controllers or all revisions of software.
00
No Alarms Exist
None required
2
Evaporator Coil Sensor
Manually monitor load temperature with independent
thermometer. Report alarm at end of day.
X
3
Control Return Air Sensor
Manually monitor load temperature with independent
thermometer. Report alarm at end of day.
X
4
Control Discharge Air Sensor
Manually monitor load temperature with independent
thermometer. Report alarm at end of day.
X
5
Ambient Air Sensor
Report alarm at end of day.
X
6
Coolant Temp Sensor
Report alarm at end of day.
X
7
Engine RPM Sensor
Report alarm at end of day.
X
9
High Evaporator Temperature
Manually monitor load temperature. Report alarm at end of
the day.
X
Shut
Down
Level Of
Action
Check
Corrective Action
Ok To
Run
Code Description
X
172
Alarm Codes
Table of Alarm Codes
NOTE: Not all alarm codes are available with all microprocessor controllers or all revisions of software.
00
No Alarms Exist
None required
2
Evaporator Coil Sensor
Manually monitor load temperature with independent
thermometer. Report alarm at end of day.
X
3
Control Return Air Sensor
Manually monitor load temperature with independent
thermometer. Report alarm at end of day.
X
4
Control Discharge Air Sensor
Manually monitor load temperature with independent
thermometer. Report alarm at end of day.
X
5
Ambient Air Sensor
Report alarm at end of day.
X
6
Coolant Temp Sensor
Report alarm at end of day.
X
7
Engine RPM Sensor
Report alarm at end of day.
X
9
High Evaporator Temperature
Manually monitor load temperature. Report alarm at end of
the day.
X
172
X
Shut
Down
Level Of
Action
Check
Corrective Action
Ok To
Run
Code Description
Alarm Codes
Table of Alarm Codes
NOTE: Not all alarm codes are available with all microprocessor controllers or all revisions of software.
10
High Discharge Pressure
If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
11
Unit Controlling on Alternate
Sensor
Manually monitor load temperature with independent
thermometer. Report alarm at end of day.
12
Sensor or Digital Input Shutdown
The indicated zone is no longer able to operate and has
been shut down. Repair immediately.
13
Sensor Check
Manually monitor load temperature with independent
thermometer. Report alarm at end of day.
X
15
Check Glow Plugs/Intake Air
Heater
If unit is shut down, repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
X
17
Engine Failed to Crank
If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
X
18
High Engine Coolant
Temperature
If unit is shutdown repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
X
Shut
Down
Level Of
Action
Check
Corrective Action
Ok To
Run
Code Description
X
X
X
173
Alarm Codes
Table of Alarm Codes
NOTE: Not all alarm codes are available with all microprocessor controllers or all revisions of software.
10
High Discharge Pressure
If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
11
Unit Controlling on Alternate
Sensor
Manually monitor load temperature with independent
thermometer. Report alarm at end of day.
12
Sensor or Digital Input Shutdown
The indicated zone is no longer able to operate and has
been shut down. Repair immediately.
13
Sensor Check
Manually monitor load temperature with independent
thermometer. Report alarm at end of day.
X
15
Check Glow Plugs/Intake Air
Heater
If unit is shut down, repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
X
17
Engine Failed to Crank
If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
X
18
High Engine Coolant
Temperature
If unit is shutdown repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
X
Shut
Down
Level Of
Action
Check
Corrective Action
Ok To
Run
Code Description
X
X
X
173
Alarm Codes
Table of Alarm Codes
NOTE: Not all alarm codes are available with all microprocessor controllers or all revisions of software.
Shut
Down
Level Of
Action
Check
Corrective Action
Ok To
Run
Code Description
19
Low Engine Oil Pressure
It unit is shutdown repair immediately. Otherwise report
alarm at end of day.
X
20
Engine Failed to Start
If unit is shutdown repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
X
21
Cooling Cycle Check
Manually monitor load temperature with independent
thermometer. Report alarm at end of day.
X
22
Heating Cycle Check
Manually monitor load temperature with independent
thermometer. Report alarm at end of day.
X
23
Cooling Cycle Fault
The indicated zone is no longer able to operate and has
been shut down. Repair immediately.
X
24
Heating Cycle Fault
The indicated zone is no longer able to operate and has
been shut down. Repair immediately.
X
25
Alternator Check
If unit is shutdown repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
X
174
Alarm Codes
Table of Alarm Codes
NOTE: Not all alarm codes are available with all microprocessor controllers or all revisions of software.
Shut
Down
Level Of
Action
Check
Corrective Action
Ok To
Run
Code Description
19
Low Engine Oil Pressure
It unit is shutdown repair immediately. Otherwise report
alarm at end of day.
X
20
Engine Failed to Start
If unit is shutdown repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
X
21
Cooling Cycle Check
Manually monitor load temperature with independent
thermometer. Report alarm at end of day.
X
22
Heating Cycle Check
Manually monitor load temperature with independent
thermometer. Report alarm at end of day.
X
23
Cooling Cycle Fault
The indicated zone is no longer able to operate and has
been shut down. Repair immediately.
X
24
Heating Cycle Fault
The indicated zone is no longer able to operate and has
been shut down. Repair immediately.
X
25
Alternator Check
If unit is shutdown repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
174
X
Alarm Codes
Table of Alarm Codes
NOTE: Not all alarm codes are available with all microprocessor controllers or all revisions of software.
26
Refrigeration Capacity
Manually monitor load temperature with independent
thermometer. Report alarm at end of day.
28
Pretrip or Self Check Abort
Report alarm at end of day.
29
Defrost Damper Circuit
If unit is shutdown, repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
30
Defrost Damper Stuck
If unit is shutdown, repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
31
Oil Pressure Switch
If unit is shutdown repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
32
Refrigeration Capacity Low
The indicated zone is no longer able to operate and has
been shut down. Repair immediately.
33
Check Engine RPM
Report alarm at end of day.
Shut
Down
Level Of
Action
Check
Corrective Action
Ok To
Run
Code Description
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
175
Alarm Codes
Table of Alarm Codes
NOTE: Not all alarm codes are available with all microprocessor controllers or all revisions of software.
26
Refrigeration Capacity
Manually monitor load temperature with independent
thermometer. Report alarm at end of day.
28
Pretrip or Self Check Abort
Report alarm at end of day.
29
Defrost Damper Circuit
If unit is shutdown, repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
30
Defrost Damper Stuck
If unit is shutdown, repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
31
Oil Pressure Switch
If unit is shutdown repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
32
Refrigeration Capacity Low
The indicated zone is no longer able to operate and has
been shut down. Repair immediately.
33
Check Engine RPM
Report alarm at end of day.
Shut
Down
Level Of
Action
Check
Corrective Action
Ok To
Run
Code Description
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
175
Alarm Codes
Table of Alarm Codes
NOTE: Not all alarm codes are available with all microprocessor controllers or all revisions of software.
Shut
Down
Level Of
Action
Check
Corrective Action
Ok To
Run
Code Description
35
Run Relay Circuit
If unit is shutdown, repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
X
36
Electric Motor Failed to Run
If unit is shutdown, repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
X
37
Engine Coolant Level
Check coolant level, add as needed. Report alarm at end of
day.
38
Electric Phase Reversed
If unit is shutdown, repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
39
Water Valve Circuit
If unit is shutdown, repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
X
40
High Speed Circuit
If unit is shutdown, repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
X
41
Check Engine Coolant
Temperature
If unit is shutdown, repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
X
X
X
176
Alarm Codes
Table of Alarm Codes
NOTE: Not all alarm codes are available with all microprocessor controllers or all revisions of software.
Shut
Down
Level Of
Action
Check
Corrective Action
Ok To
Run
Code Description
35
Run Relay Circuit
If unit is shutdown, repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
X
36
Electric Motor Failed to Run
If unit is shutdown, repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
X
37
Engine Coolant Level
Check coolant level, add as needed. Report alarm at end of
day.
38
Electric Phase Reversed
If unit is shutdown, repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
39
Water Valve Circuit
If unit is shutdown, repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
X
40
High Speed Circuit
If unit is shutdown, repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
X
41
Check Engine Coolant
Temperature
If unit is shutdown, repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
176
X
X
X
Alarm Codes
Table of Alarm Codes
NOTE: Not all alarm codes are available with all microprocessor controllers or all revisions of software.
Level Of
Action
42
Unit Forced to Low Speed
Report alarm at end of day.
X
43
Unit Forced to Low Speed
Modulation
Report alarm at end of day.
X
44
Check Fuel System
Refill fuel tank.
X
X
45
Hot Gas Bypass or Hot Gas
Bypass Circuit
If unit is shutdown repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
X
46
Check Air Flow
If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of the day. Cargo may be restricting air flow,
check load.
X
48
Check Belts/Clutch
If unit is shutdown, repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
50
Reset Clock
Report alarm at end of day.
Ok To
Run
Shut
Down
Corrective Action
Check
Code Description
X
X
177
Alarm Codes
Table of Alarm Codes
NOTE: Not all alarm codes are available with all microprocessor controllers or all revisions of software.
Level Of
Action
42
Unit Forced to Low Speed
Report alarm at end of day.
X
43
Unit Forced to Low Speed
Modulation
Report alarm at end of day.
X
44
Check Fuel System
Refill fuel tank.
X
X
45
Hot Gas Bypass or Hot Gas
Bypass Circuit
If unit is shutdown repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
X
46
Check Air Flow
If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of the day. Cargo may be restricting air flow,
check load.
X
48
Check Belts/Clutch
If unit is shutdown, repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
50
Reset Clock
Report alarm at end of day.
Ok To
Run
Shut
Down
Corrective Action
Check
Code Description
X
X
177
Alarm Codes
Table of Alarm Codes
NOTE: Not all alarm codes are available with all microprocessor controllers or all revisions of software.
Shut
Down
Level Of
Action
Check
Corrective Action
Ok To
Run
Code Description
52
Heat Circuit
If unit is shutdown, repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
54
Test Mode Time-out
Service Test or Interface Board Test time out after 15
minutes. Report alarm at end of day.
61
Low Battery Voltage
If unit is shutdown, repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
62
Ammeter Out of Calibration
If unit is shutdown, repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
X
63
Engine Stopped
If unit is shutdown, repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
X
64
Pretrip Reminder
Report alarm at end of day.
65
Abnormal Temperature
Differential
If unit is shutdown, repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day
X
X
X
X
X
178
Alarm Codes
Table of Alarm Codes
NOTE: Not all alarm codes are available with all microprocessor controllers or all revisions of software.
Shut
Down
Level Of
Action
Check
Corrective Action
Ok To
Run
Code Description
52
Heat Circuit
If unit is shutdown, repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
54
Test Mode Time-out
Service Test or Interface Board Test time out after 15
minutes. Report alarm at end of day.
61
Low Battery Voltage
If unit is shutdown, repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
62
Ammeter Out of Calibration
If unit is shutdown, repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
X
63
Engine Stopped
If unit is shutdown, repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
X
64
Pretrip Reminder
Report alarm at end of day.
65
Abnormal Temperature
Differential
If unit is shutdown, repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day
178
X
X
X
X
X
Alarm Codes
Table of Alarm Codes
NOTE: Not all alarm codes are available with all microprocessor controllers or all revisions of software.
Shut
Down
Level Of
Action
Check
Corrective Action
Ok To
Run
Code Description
66
Low Engine Oil Level
Check engine oil level. If unit is shutdown, repair
immediately. Otherwise, report alarm at end of day.
X
67
Liquid Line Solenoid Circuit
If unit is shutdown, repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
X
68
Internal Controller Fault
Report alarm at end of day.
X
70
Hourmeter Failure
Report alarm at end of day.
X
74
Controller Reset to Defaults
Report alarm at end of day.
X
77
Controller EPROM Checksum
Failure
If unit is shutdown, repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
79
Internal Data Logger Overflow
Report alarm at end of day.
X
80
Compressor Temp Sensor
Report alarm at end of day.
X
High Compressor Temp
If unit is shutdown repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
81
X
X
179
Alarm Codes
Table of Alarm Codes
NOTE: Not all alarm codes are available with all microprocessor controllers or all revisions of software.
Shut
Down
Level Of
Action
Check
Corrective Action
Ok To
Run
Code Description
66
Low Engine Oil Level
Check engine oil level. If unit is shutdown, repair
immediately. Otherwise, report alarm at end of day.
X
67
Liquid Line Solenoid Circuit
If unit is shutdown, repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
X
68
Internal Controller Fault
Report alarm at end of day.
X
70
Hourmeter Failure
Report alarm at end of day.
X
74
Controller Reset to Defaults
Report alarm at end of day.
X
77
Controller EPROM Checksum
Failure
If unit is shutdown, repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
79
Internal Data Logger Overflow
Report alarm at end of day.
X
80
Compressor Temp Sensor
Report alarm at end of day.
X
High Compressor Temp
If unit is shutdown repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
81
X
X
179
Alarm Codes
Table of Alarm Codes
NOTE: Not all alarm codes are available with all microprocessor controllers or all revisions of software.
Shut
Down
Level Of
Action
Check
Corrective Action
Ok To
Run
Code Description
82
High Compressor Temperature
Shutdown
If unit is shutdown repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
X
83
Low Engine Coolant Temperature
If unit is shutdown repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
X
84
Restart Null
Report alarm at end of day.
X
85
Forced Unit Operation
Report alarm at end of day.
X
86
Discharge Pressure Sensor
Report alarm at end of day.
X
87
Suction Pressure Sensor
Report alarm at end of day.
X
89
Check Electronic Throttling Valve If unit is shutdown repair immediately. Otherwise, report
Circuit
alarm at end of day.
90
Electric Overload
X
If unit is shutdown, repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
X
180
Alarm Codes
Table of Alarm Codes
NOTE: Not all alarm codes are available with all microprocessor controllers or all revisions of software.
Shut
Down
Level Of
Action
Check
Corrective Action
Ok To
Run
Code Description
82
High Compressor Temperature
Shutdown
If unit is shutdown repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
X
83
Low Engine Coolant Temperature
If unit is shutdown repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
X
84
Restart Null
Report alarm at end of day.
X
85
Forced Unit Operation
Report alarm at end of day.
X
86
Discharge Pressure Sensor
Report alarm at end of day.
X
87
Suction Pressure Sensor
Report alarm at end of day.
X
89
Check Electronic Throttling Valve If unit is shutdown repair immediately. Otherwise, report
Circuit
alarm at end of day.
90
Electric Overload
180
If unit is shutdown, repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
X
X
Alarm Codes
Table of Alarm Codes
NOTE: Not all alarm codes are available with all microprocessor controllers or all revisions of software.
91
Electric Ready Input
If unit is shutdown, repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
92
Sensor Grades Not Set
Report alarm at end of day.
93
Low Compressor Suction
Pressure
If unit is shutdown, repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
94
Loader #1 Circuit
If unit is shutdown, repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
X
95
Loader #2 Circuit
If unit is shutdown, repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
X
96
Low Fuel Level
Check engine fuel level and add fuel. If unit is shutdown,
repair immediately. Otherwise, report alarm at end of day.
X
98
Fuel Level Sensor
Report alarm at end of day.
Shut
Down
Level Of
Action
Check
Corrective Action
Ok To
Run
Code Description
X
X
X
X
181
Alarm Codes
Table of Alarm Codes
NOTE: Not all alarm codes are available with all microprocessor controllers or all revisions of software.
91
Electric Ready Input
If unit is shutdown, repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
92
Sensor Grades Not Set
Report alarm at end of day.
93
Low Compressor Suction
Pressure
If unit is shutdown, repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
94
Loader #1 Circuit
If unit is shutdown, repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
X
95
Loader #2 Circuit
If unit is shutdown, repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
X
96
Low Fuel Level
Check engine fuel level and add fuel. If unit is shutdown,
repair immediately. Otherwise, report alarm at end of day.
X
98
Fuel Level Sensor
Report alarm at end of day.
Shut
Down
Level Of
Action
Check
Corrective Action
Ok To
Run
Code Description
X
X
X
X
181
Alarm Codes
Table of Alarm Codes
NOTE: Not all alarm codes are available with all microprocessor controllers or all revisions of software.
99
High Compressor Pressure Ratio
If unit is shutdown, repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
Shut
Down
Level Of
Action
Check
Corrective Action
Ok To
Run
Code Description
X
108 Door Open Time-out
Close Doors. Report alarm at end of day.
X
111
Unit Not Configured Correctly
Report alarm at end of day.
113
Electric Heat Circuit
If unit is shutdown, repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
114
Multiple Alarms - Cannot Run
If unit is shutdown repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
117
Auto switch from Diesel to
Electric
Report alarm at end of day.
X
118
Auto switch from Electric to
Diesel
Report alarm at end of day.
X
X
X
X
182
Alarm Codes
Table of Alarm Codes
NOTE: Not all alarm codes are available with all microprocessor controllers or all revisions of software.
99
High Compressor Pressure Ratio
If unit is shutdown, repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
X
108 Door Open Time-out
Close Doors. Report alarm at end of day.
111
Unit Not Configured Correctly
Report alarm at end of day.
113
Electric Heat Circuit
If unit is shutdown, repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
114
Multiple Alarms - Cannot Run
If unit is shutdown repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
117
Auto switch from Diesel to
Electric
Report alarm at end of day.
X
118
Auto switch from Electric to
Diesel
Report alarm at end of day.
X
182
Shut
Down
Level Of
Action
Check
Corrective Action
Ok To
Run
Code Description
X
X
X
X
Alarm Codes
Table of Alarm Codes
NOTE: Not all alarm codes are available with all microprocessor controllers or all revisions of software.
120 Alternator Exciter Circuit
If unit is shutdown, repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
X
121 Liquid Injection Circuit
If unit is shutdown, repair immediately. Otherwise report
alarm at end of day.
X
122 Diesel/Electric Relay Circuit
If unit is shutdown, repair immediately. Otherwise, report at
end of day.
X
127 Setpoint Not Entered
Be sure the setpoint is set to the required temperature.
X
Engine Run Time Maintenance
128
Reminder #1
Report alarm at end of day.
X
129
Engine Run Time Maintenance
Reminder #2
Report alarm at end of day.
X
130
Electric Run Time Maintenance
Reminder #1
Report alarm at end of day.
X
Shut
Down
Level Of
Action
Check
Corrective Action
Ok To
Run
Code Description
183
Alarm Codes
Table of Alarm Codes
NOTE: Not all alarm codes are available with all microprocessor controllers or all revisions of software.
120 Alternator Exciter Circuit
If unit is shutdown, repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
X
121 Liquid Injection Circuit
If unit is shutdown, repair immediately. Otherwise report
alarm at end of day.
X
122 Diesel/Electric Relay Circuit
If unit is shutdown, repair immediately. Otherwise, report at
end of day.
X
127 Setpoint Not Entered
Be sure the setpoint is set to the required temperature.
X
Engine Run Time Maintenance
128
Reminder #1
Report alarm at end of day.
X
129
Engine Run Time Maintenance
Reminder #2
Report alarm at end of day.
X
130
Electric Run Time Maintenance
Reminder #1
Report alarm at end of day.
X
Shut
Down
Level Of
Action
Check
Corrective Action
Ok To
Run
Code Description
183
Alarm Codes
Table of Alarm Codes
NOTE: Not all alarm codes are available with all microprocessor controllers or all revisions of software.
131
Electric Run Time Maintenance
Reminder #2
Report alarm at end of day.
X
132
Total Unit Run Time Maintenance
Report alarm at end of day.
Reminder #1
X
133
Total Unit Run Time Maintenance
Report alarm at end of day.
Reminder #2
X
134 Controller Power On Hours
Report alarm at end of day.
X
135 Check Spare Digital Inputs
Report alarm at end of day.
X
136 Check Spare Digital Outputs
Report alarm at end of day.
X
137
Check Damper Motor Heater
Output
Report alarm at end of day.
X
141
Autoswitch Diesel to Electric
Disabled
Report alarm at end of the day.
X
Shut
Down
Level Of
Action
Check
Corrective Action
Ok To
Run
Code Description
184
Alarm Codes
Table of Alarm Codes
NOTE: Not all alarm codes are available with all microprocessor controllers or all revisions of software.
131
Electric Run Time Maintenance
Reminder #2
Report alarm at end of day.
X
132
Total Unit Run Time Maintenance
Report alarm at end of day.
Reminder #1
X
133
Total Unit Run Time Maintenance
Report alarm at end of day.
Reminder #2
X
134 Controller Power On Hours
Report alarm at end of day.
X
135 Check Spare Digital Inputs
Report alarm at end of day.
X
136 Check Spare Digital Outputs
Report alarm at end of day.
X
137
Check Damper Motor Heater
Output
Report alarm at end of day.
X
141
Autoswitch Diesel to Electric
Disabled
Report alarm at end of the day.
X
184
Shut
Down
Level Of
Action
Check
Corrective Action
Ok To
Run
Code Description
Alarm Codes
Table of Alarm Codes
NOTE: Not all alarm codes are available with all microprocessor controllers or all revisions of software.
145
Loss of Controller "On" Feedback If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
Signal
alarm at end of the day.
X
If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of the day.
X
146 Software Version Mismatch
148
Autoswitch Electric to Diesel
Disabled
Report alarm at end of the day.
Shut
Down
Level Of
Action
Check
Corrective Action
Ok To
Run
Code Description
X
149 Alarm Not Identified
If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of the day.
150 Out of Range Low
Manually monitor load temperature. Report alarm at end of
the day.
X
151 Out of Range High
Manually monitor load temperature. Report alarm at end of
the day.
X
157 OptiSet Plus Mismatch
Manually monitor load temperature. Report alarm at the end
of the day
X
X
185
Alarm Codes
Table of Alarm Codes
NOTE: Not all alarm codes are available with all microprocessor controllers or all revisions of software.
145
Loss of Controller "On" Feedback If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
Signal
alarm at end of the day.
X
If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of the day.
X
146 Software Version Mismatch
148
Autoswitch Electric to Diesel
Disabled
Report alarm at end of the day.
Shut
Down
Level Of
Action
Check
Corrective Action
Ok To
Run
Code Description
X
149 Alarm Not Identified
If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of the day.
150 Out of Range Low
Manually monitor load temperature. Report alarm at end of
the day.
X
151 Out of Range High
Manually monitor load temperature. Report alarm at end of
the day.
X
157 OptiSet Plus Mismatch
Manually monitor load temperature. Report alarm at the end
of the day
X
X
185
Alarm Codes
Table of Alarm Codes
NOTE: Not all alarm codes are available with all microprocessor controllers or all revisions of software.
203 Display Return Air Sensor
Manually monitor load temperature with independent
thermometer. Report alarm at end of day.
X
204 Display Discharge Air Sensor
Manually monitor load temperature with independent
thermometer. Report alarm at end of day.
X
If unit is shutdown, repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
X
252
Check Fresh Air Exchange
Circuit
Shut
Down
Level Of
Action
Check
Corrective Action
Ok To
Run
Code Description
186
Alarm Codes
Table of Alarm Codes
NOTE: Not all alarm codes are available with all microprocessor controllers or all revisions of software.
203 Display Return Air Sensor
Manually monitor load temperature with independent
thermometer. Report alarm at end of day.
X
204 Display Discharge Air Sensor
Manually monitor load temperature with independent
thermometer. Report alarm at end of day.
X
If unit is shutdown, repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of day.
X
252
186
Check Fresh Air Exchange
Circuit
Shut
Down
Level Of
Action
Check
Corrective Action
Ok To
Run
Code Description
Jump Starting
If the battery in a unit is discharged or run down, the unit may
be jump started using jumper cables and another battery or
vehicle. Consider the following precautions and be careful
when jump starting a unit.
WARNING: A battery can be dangerous. A battery
contains a flammable gas that can ignite or
explode. A battery stores enough electricity to burn
you if it discharges quickly. A battery contains
battery acid that can burn you. Always wear
goggles or safety glasses and personal protective
equipment when working with a battery. If you get
battery acid on you, immediately flush it with water
and get medical attention.
CAUTION: Unhook the semi tractor from the
trailer before using the tractor to jump start the
unit on the trailer. The negative ground circuit is
complete when the tractor is hooked to the trailer.
This can cause dangerous sparks when the positive
connection is made at the battery.
IMPORTANT: Make sure to use a 12-volt battery to jump
start the unit. If you are using a vehicle, make sure it has a
12-volt battery with a negative ground system. Do not use a
“hot shot” booster device or a 24-volt source.
Read and understand the following procedure completely
before connecting any jumper cables. Use good jumper cables
made with #2 gauge (or larger) cables.
1.
Make sure the unit is turned off. If you are using a vehicle,
make sure its ignition is also turned off.
2.
Open the front doors on the unit. The battery is located to
the right of the engine.
3.
Check the discharged battery to make sure it is not
damaged or frozen. Do not jump start a damaged or frozen
battery. Check the vent caps to make sure they are tight.
4.
Identify the positive (+) and negative (–) battery terminals.
187
Jump Starting
If the battery in a unit is discharged or run down, the unit may
be jump started using jumper cables and another battery or
vehicle. Consider the following precautions and be careful
when jump starting a unit.
WARNING: A battery can be dangerous. A battery
contains a flammable gas that can ignite or
explode. A battery stores enough electricity to burn
you if it discharges quickly. A battery contains
battery acid that can burn you. Always wear
goggles or safety glasses and personal protective
equipment when working with a battery. If you get
battery acid on you, immediately flush it with water
and get medical attention.
CAUTION: Unhook the semi tractor from the
trailer before using the tractor to jump start the
unit on the trailer. The negative ground circuit is
complete when the tractor is hooked to the trailer.
This can cause dangerous sparks when the positive
connection is made at the battery.
IMPORTANT: Make sure to use a 12-volt battery to jump
start the unit. If you are using a vehicle, make sure it has a
12-volt battery with a negative ground system. Do not use a
“hot shot” booster device or a 24-volt source.
Read and understand the following procedure completely
before connecting any jumper cables. Use good jumper cables
made with #2 gauge (or larger) cables.
1.
Make sure the unit is turned off. If you are using a vehicle,
make sure its ignition is also turned off.
2.
Open the front doors on the unit. The battery is located to
the right of the engine.
3.
Check the discharged battery to make sure it is not
damaged or frozen. Do not jump start a damaged or frozen
battery. Check the vent caps to make sure they are tight.
4.
Identify the positive (+) and negative (–) battery terminals.
187
Jump Starting
1
CAUTION: Do not use a match or lighter as a
light near the battery. Use a flashlight. A flame or
a spark can ignite the gas in the battery and cause
it to explode.
5.
2
Unit
(Discharged)
12-Volt
Battery
Remove the red cover from the positive (+) battery
terminal on the unit’s battery.
Good
12-Volt
Battery
Unit
Engine
3
4
1
1.
Red Cover on Positive (+) Battery Terminal
Figure 133: Unit Battery
1.
Positive (+) Terminal on Unit Battery
2.
Positive (+) Terminal on Good Battery
3.
Negative (–) Terminal on Good Battery
4.
Starter Mounting Bolt on Unit Engine
Figure 134: Sequence for Connecting Jumper Cables
188
Jump Starting
1
CAUTION: Do not use a match or lighter as a
light near the battery. Use a flashlight. A flame or
a spark can ignite the gas in the battery and cause
it to explode.
5.
2
Unit
(Discharged)
12-Volt
Battery
Remove the red cover from the positive (+) battery
terminal on the unit’s battery.
Good
12-Volt
Battery
Unit
Engine
3
4
1
1.
Red Cover on Positive (+) Battery Terminal
Figure 133: Unit Battery
188
1.
Positive (+) Terminal on Unit Battery
2.
Positive (+) Terminal on Good Battery
3.
Negative (–) Terminal on Good Battery
4.
Starter Mounting Bolt on Unit Engine
Figure 134: Sequence for Connecting Jumper Cables
Jump Starting
6.
Connect the red positive (+) jumper cable to the positive
(+) battery terminal on the unit’s battery. Do not let the
other end of the jumper cable touch anything that conducts
electricity.
CAUTION: Allowing the positive (+) jumper cable
to short can produce dangerous sparks.
7.
Connect the other end of the red positive (+) jumper cable
to the positive (+) battery terminal on the good battery.
8.
Connect the black negative (–) jumper cable to the
negative (–) battery terminal on the good battery. Do not
let the other end of the jumper cable touch anything that
conducts electricity.
9.
Connect the black negative (–) jumper cable to the lower
starter mounting bolt on the unit’s engine.
1
1.
Lower Starter Mounting Bolt
Figure 135: Unit Engine
189
Jump Starting
6.
Connect the red positive (+) jumper cable to the positive
(+) battery terminal on the unit’s battery. Do not let the
other end of the jumper cable touch anything that conducts
electricity.
CAUTION: Allowing the positive (+) jumper cable
to short can produce dangerous sparks.
7.
Connect the other end of the red positive (+) jumper cable
to the positive (+) battery terminal on the good battery.
8.
Connect the black negative (–) jumper cable to the
negative (–) battery terminal on the good battery. Do not
let the other end of the jumper cable touch anything that
conducts electricity.
9.
Connect the black negative (–) jumper cable to the lower
starter mounting bolt on the unit’s engine.
1
1.
Lower Starter Mounting Bolt
Figure 135: Unit Engine
189
Jump Starting
10. If you are using a vehicle to jump start the unit, start the
vehicle and let it run for a few minutes. This will help
charge the discharged battery.
4
3
Unit
(Discharged)
12-Volt
Battery
CAUTION: Be careful around fans and belts.
Keep your hands away from moving parts when an
engine is running.
Good
12-Volt
Battery
11. Turn the unit on and let it start automatically or start it
manually. If the unit will not crank or start, contact a
qualified technician.
NOTE: Some units with microprocessors will show an
alarm code and will not try to start until the battery
voltage is above 10 volts.
12. After the unit starts, remove the jumper cables in reverse
order: black negative (–) from the unit starter mounting
bolt, black negative (–) from the good battery, red positive
(+) from the good battery, and red positive (+) from the
unit battery (that was discharged).
Unit
Engine
2
1
1.
Starter Mounting Bolt on Unit Engine
2.
Negative (–) Terminal on Good Battery
3.
Positive (+) Terminal on Good Battery
4.
Positive (+) Terminal on Unit Battery
Figure 136: Sequence for Disconnecting Jumper Cables
190
Jump Starting
10. If you are using a vehicle to jump start the unit, start the
vehicle and let it run for a few minutes. This will help
charge the discharged battery.
4
3
Unit
(Discharged)
12-Volt
Battery
CAUTION: Be careful around fans and belts.
Keep your hands away from moving parts when an
engine is running.
Good
12-Volt
Battery
11. Turn the unit on and let it start automatically or start it
manually. If the unit will not crank or start, contact a
qualified technician.
NOTE: Some units with microprocessors will show an
alarm code and will not try to start until the battery
voltage is above 10 volts.
12. After the unit starts, remove the jumper cables in reverse
order: black negative (–) from the unit starter mounting
bolt, black negative (–) from the good battery, red positive
(+) from the good battery, and red positive (+) from the
unit battery (that was discharged).
Unit
Engine
2
1
1.
Starter Mounting Bolt on Unit Engine
2.
Negative (–) Terminal on Good Battery
3.
Positive (+) Terminal on Good Battery
4.
Positive (+) Terminal on Unit Battery
Figure 136: Sequence for Disconnecting Jumper Cables
190
Specifications
Engine
Model:
SB-130 and SB-230
SB-330
TK486V (Tier 2)
TK486VH (Tier 2)
Number of Cylinders
4
Cylinder Arrangement
In-line vertical, number 1 on flywheel end
Firing Order
1-3-4-2
Direction of Rotation
Counterclockwise viewed from flywheel end
Fuel Type
No. 2 diesel fuel under normal conditions
No. 1 diesel fuel is acceptable cold weather fuel
Oil Capacity
13 quarts (12.3 liters) crankcase and oil filter
Fill to full mark on dipstick
Oil Type
API Classification CI-4 or better
(ACEA Rating E3 or better for Europe)
191
Specifications
Engine
Model:
SB-130 and SB-230
SB-330
TK486V (Tier 2)
TK486VH (Tier 2)
Number of Cylinders
4
Cylinder Arrangement
In-line vertical, number 1 on flywheel end
Firing Order
1-3-4-2
Direction of Rotation
Counterclockwise viewed from flywheel end
Fuel Type
No. 2 diesel fuel under normal conditions
No. 1 diesel fuel is acceptable cold weather fuel
Oil Capacity
13 quarts (12.3 liters) crankcase and oil filter
Fill to full mark on dipstick
Oil Type
API Classification CI-4 or better
(ACEA Rating E3 or better for Europe)
191
Specifications
Engine
Oil Viscosity
14 F to 122 F (-10 C to 50 C): SAE 15W-40 (Synthetic)
5 to 104 F (-15 to 40 C): SAE 15W-40
-13 to 104 F (-25 to 40 C): SAE 10W-40
-13 to 86 F (-25 to 30 C): SAE 10W-30
-22 to 122 F (-30 to 50 C): SAE 5W-40 (Synthetic)
Below -22 F (-30 C): SAE 0W-30 (Synthetic)
Engine rpm:
SB-130 and SB-230 Low Speed Operation
SB-130 and SB-230 High Speed Operation
SB-330 Low Speed Operation
SB-330 High Speed Operation
Engine Oil Pressure
1450 ± 25 rpm
2200 ± 25 rpm
1450 ± 25 rpm
(1720 ± 25 rpm with High Capacity Fresh Option)
2600 ± 25 rpm
The microprocessor will display OK if the oil pressure is
within the acceptable range and LOW if the oil pressure is
below the acceptable range.
Low Oil Pressure Switch (Normally Closed)
17 ± 3 psi (117 ± 21 kPa)
Engine Coolant Thermostat
160 F (71 C)
192
Specifications
Engine
Oil Viscosity
14 F to 122 F (-10 C to 50 C): SAE 15W-40 (Synthetic)
5 to 104 F (-15 to 40 C): SAE 15W-40
-13 to 104 F (-25 to 40 C): SAE 10W-40
-13 to 86 F (-25 to 30 C): SAE 10W-30
-22 to 122 F (-30 to 50 C): SAE 5W-40 (Synthetic)
Below -22 F (-30 C): SAE 0W-30 (Synthetic)
Engine rpm:
SB-130 and SB-230 Low Speed Operation
SB-130 and SB-230 High Speed Operation
SB-330 Low Speed Operation
SB-330 High Speed Operation
Engine Oil Pressure
1450 ± 25 rpm
2200 ± 25 rpm
1450 ± 25 rpm
(1720 ± 25 rpm with High Capacity Fresh Option)
2600 ± 25 rpm
The microprocessor will display OK if the oil pressure is
within the acceptable range and LOW if the oil pressure is
below the acceptable range.
Low Oil Pressure Switch (Normally Closed)
17 ± 3 psi (117 ± 21 kPa)
Engine Coolant Thermostat
160 F (71 C)
192
Specifications
Engine
Engine Coolant Type
ELC (Extended Life Coolant), which is “RED”
Use a 50/50 concentration of any of the following
equivalents:
Chevron Dex-Cool
Texaco ELC
Havoline Dex-Cool®
Havoline XLC for Europe
Shell Dexcool®
Shell Rotella
Saturn/General Motors Dex-Cool®
Caterpillar ELC
Detroit Diesel POWERCOOL® Plus
CAUTION: Do not add “GREEN” or “BLUE-GREEN”
conventional coolant to cooling systems using “RED”
Extended Life Coolant, except in an emergency. If
conventional coolant is added to Extended Life Coolant,
the coolant must be changed after 2 years instead of
5 years.
Coolant System Capacity
7.5 quarts (7.1 liters)
Radiator Cap Pressure
7 psi (48 kPa)
193
Specifications
Engine
Engine Coolant Type
ELC (Extended Life Coolant), which is “RED”
Use a 50/50 concentration of any of the following
equivalents:
Chevron Dex-Cool
Texaco ELC
Havoline Dex-Cool®
Havoline XLC for Europe
Shell Dexcool®
Shell Rotella
Saturn/General Motors Dex-Cool®
Caterpillar ELC
Detroit Diesel POWERCOOL® Plus
CAUTION: Do not add “GREEN” or “BLUE-GREEN”
conventional coolant to cooling systems using “RED”
Extended Life Coolant, except in an emergency. If
conventional coolant is added to Extended Life Coolant,
the coolant must be changed after 2 years instead of
5 years.
Coolant System Capacity
7.5 quarts (7.1 liters)
Radiator Cap Pressure
7 psi (48 kPa)
193
Specifications
Engine
Drive:
Model 30
Direct to compressor; belts to fans, alternator, and water
pump
Model 50
Centrifugal clutch to compressor; belts to electric standby
motor, fans, alternator, and water pump
Belt Tension
Tension No. on TK Gauge P/N 204-427
New Belt
Field Reset
Alternator Belt:
SB-130 and SB-230 with 37 Amp Alternator
SB-130 and SB-230 with 65 Amp Alternator
SB-330 with 37 Amp Alternator
SB-330 with 65 Amp Alternator
Model 30
74
75
73
74
71
72
70
71
Lower Fan Belt (Engine to Idler):
SB-130 and SB-230
SB-330
88
87
84
84
Upper Fan Belt (Fan to Idler)
88
85
194
Specifications
Engine
Drive:
Model 30
Direct to compressor; belts to fans, alternator, and water
pump
Model 50
Centrifugal clutch to compressor; belts to electric standby
motor, fans, alternator, and water pump
Belt Tension
Tension No. on TK Gauge P/N 204-427
New Belt
Field Reset
Alternator Belt:
SB-130 and SB-230 with 37 Amp Alternator
SB-130 and SB-230 with 65 Amp Alternator
SB-330 with 37 Amp Alternator
SB-330 with 65 Amp Alternator
Model 30
74
75
73
74
71
72
70
71
Lower Fan Belt (Engine to Idler):
SB-130 and SB-230
SB-330
88
87
84
84
Upper Fan Belt (Fan to Idler)
88
85
194
Specifications
Belt Tension
Model 50 (SB-230 Only)
Alternator Belt:
14 HP Electric Motor and 37 Amp Alternator
14 HP Electric Motor and 65 Amp Alternator
24 HP Electric Motor and 37 Amp Alternator
24 HP Electric Motor and 65 Amp Alternator
76
77
74
75
73
74
71
72
Compressor Drive Belts
94
91
Fan Belt:
91
90
88
86
74
71
14 HP Electric Motor
24 HP Electric Motor
Water Pump Belt
195
Specifications
Belt Tension
Model 50 (SB-230 Only)
Alternator Belt:
14 HP Electric Motor and 37 Amp Alternator
14 HP Electric Motor and 65 Amp Alternator
24 HP Electric Motor and 37 Amp Alternator
24 HP Electric Motor and 65 Amp Alternator
76
77
74
75
73
74
71
72
Compressor Drive Belts
94
91
Fan Belt:
91
90
88
86
74
71
Water Pump Belt
14 HP Electric Motor
24 HP Electric Motor
195
Specifications
Refrigeration System
Compressor:
SB-130
SB-230 and SB-330
Thermo King X426LSC5
Thermo King X430LSC5
Refrigerant Charge—Type: SB-130 and SB-230
SB-330
13 lb (5.9 kg)—R404A
16 lb (7.3 kg)—R404A
Compressor Oil Charge
4.3 qt (4.1 liters)*
Compressor Oil Type
Heat/Defrost Method:
Polyol Ester type P/N 203-513
Engine Operation
Electric Operation
Hot gas
Hot gas and electric heater strips
* When the compressor is removed from the unit, oil level should be noted or the oil removed from the
compressor should be measured so that the same amount of oil can be added before placing the
replacement compressor in the unit.
196
Specifications
Refrigeration System
Compressor:
SB-130
SB-230 and SB-330
Thermo King X426LSC5
Thermo King X430LSC5
Refrigerant Charge—Type: SB-130 and SB-230
SB-330
13 lb (5.9 kg)—R404A
16 lb (7.3 kg)—R404A
Compressor Oil Charge
4.3 qt (4.1 liters)*
Compressor Oil Type
Heat/Defrost Method:
Polyol Ester type P/N 203-513
Engine Operation
Electric Operation
Hot gas
Hot gas and electric heater strips
* When the compressor is removed from the unit, oil level should be noted or the oil removed from the
compressor should be measured so that the same amount of oil can be added before placing the
replacement compressor in the unit.
196
Specifications
Electrical Control System
Voltage
12.5 Vdc
Battery
One, group C31, 12 volt, (950 CCA recommended for
operation below -15 F [-26 C])
Fuses
See “Fuses” on page 85.
Battery Charging
12 volt, 37 amp, brush type, Thermo King Alternator
(65 amp alternator optional)
Voltage Regulator Setting
13.95 to 14.35 volts @ 77 F (25 C)
NOTE: Fuse F4 (Bypass resistor for Prestolite Alternator) must be removed for the Thermo King
Alternator. Thermo King Alternators are painted black.
197
Specifications
Electrical Control System
Voltage
12.5 Vdc
Battery
One, group C31, 12 volt, (950 CCA recommended for
operation below -15 F [-26 C])
Fuses
See “Fuses” on page 85.
Battery Charging
12 volt, 37 amp, brush type, Thermo King Alternator
(65 amp alternator optional)
Voltage Regulator Setting
13.95 to 14.35 volts @ 77 F (25 C)
NOTE: Fuse F4 (Bypass resistor for Prestolite Alternator) must be removed for the Thermo King
Alternator. Thermo King Alternators are painted black.
197
Specifications
Electrical Standby (Model 50 Units Only)
Electric Motor and Overload Relay
Voltage/Phase/Frequency
Horsepower
Kilowatts
rpm
Full Load
(amps)
Overload Relay
Setting (amps)
230/3/60
14.0
10.4
1755
37.8
38
460/3/60
14.0
10.4
1755
18.9
20
460/3/60
24.0
17.9
3500
29
31
Electric Heater Strips
Number
3
Watts
1000 watts (each)
Resistance
48 ohms (each)
198
Specifications
Electrical Standby (Model 50 Units Only)
Electric Motor and Overload Relay
Voltage/Phase/Frequency
Horsepower
Kilowatts
rpm
Full Load
(amps)
Overload Relay
Setting (amps)
230/3/60
14.0
10.4
1755
37.8
38
460/3/60
14.0
10.4
1755
18.9
20
460/3/60
24.0
17.9
3500
29
31
Electric Heater Strips
Number
3
Watts
1000 watts (each)
Resistance
48 ohms (each)
198
Specifications
Standby Power Cord Requirements
Supply Circuit Breaker: 14 HP Motor 230/3/60
70 amps
14 HP Motor 460/3/60
40 amps
24 HP Motor 460/3/60
60 amps
Extension Cord Size: 14 HP Motor 230/3/60
8 AWG Power Cable, 25 to 50-foot length
14 HP Motor 230/3/60
6 AWG Power Cable, 75-foot length
14 HP Motor 460/3/60
10 AWG Power Cable, up to 75-foot length
24 HP Motor 460/3/60
8 AWG, 4-Conductor, 2000V, Type W Power Cable, up to
75-foot length
199
Specifications
Standby Power Cord Requirements
Supply Circuit Breaker: 14 HP Motor 230/3/60
70 amps
14 HP Motor 460/3/60
40 amps
24 HP Motor 460/3/60
60 amps
Extension Cord Size: 14 HP Motor 230/3/60
8 AWG Power Cable, 25 to 50-foot length
14 HP Motor 230/3/60
6 AWG Power Cable, 75-foot length
14 HP Motor 460/3/60
10 AWG Power Cable, up to 75-foot length
24 HP Motor 460/3/60
8 AWG, 4-Conductor, 2000V, Type W Power Cable, up to
75-foot length
199
Specifications
Electric Fuel Heater (Optional)
Electric Fuel Heater:
Resistance
Current Draw at 12.5 Vdc
Internal Thermostat Minimum Closing Temp.
Internal Thermostat Maximum Opening Temp.
0.9 to 1.1 ohms
11.4 to 13.9 amps
30 F (-1 C)
75 F (24 C)
W Fuse
3 amps
Diesel Power Fuse
3 amps
2A/2FH Circuit Breaker
20 amps, manual reset
200
Specifications
Electric Fuel Heater (Optional)
Electric Fuel Heater:
Resistance
Current Draw at 12.5 Vdc
Internal Thermostat Minimum Closing Temp.
Internal Thermostat Maximum Opening Temp.
0.9 to 1.1 ohms
11.4 to 13.9 amps
30 F (-1 C)
75 F (24 C)
W Fuse
3 amps
Diesel Power Fuse
3 amps
2A/2FH Circuit Breaker
20 amps, manual reset
200
Warranty
Terms of the Thermo King Warranty are available on request.
Please reference document TK 50046 for the Thermo King
Trailer Unit Warranty.
See the “EPA Emission Control System Warranty Statement”
chapter earlier in this manual for the EPA Emission Control
System Warranty.
201
Warranty
Terms of the Thermo King Warranty are available on request.
Please reference document TK 50046 for the Thermo King
Trailer Unit Warranty.
See the “EPA Emission Control System Warranty Statement”
chapter earlier in this manual for the EPA Emission Control
System Warranty.
201
Warranty
202
Warranty
202
Glossary
This glossary is published for informational purposes only and
the information being furnished herein should not be
considered as all-inclusive or meant to cover all contingencies.
NOTE: Additional terms not found in the glossary may be
located in the index section of this manual.
accumulator: A device located in the suction line to collect
liquid refrigerant and meter it safety back to the compressor as
gas.
ambient air temperature: Temperature of the air
surrounding an object.
amp: Abbreviation for ampere. The basic measuring unit of
electrical current.
bar: A metric unit of pressure. 1 bar = 100 kPa = 14.5 psi.
Battery Sentry: Part of the CYCLE-SENTRY™ system. The
Battery Sentry module monitors alternator charge rate and will
keep the unit running until the battery is adequately charged.
box temperature: The temperature within a
temperature-controlled compartment.
Btu (british thermal unit): The quantity of heat required to
raise the temperature of one pound of water by one degree
Fahrenheit. 1 Btu = 252 calories.
bulkhead: 1) return air bulkhead. A metal or plastic “wall”
placed at the front of the box to prevent loading of product
tightly against the Thermo King unit. (Loading too close to the
unit restricts air flow and system efficiency.) 2) bulkhead
divider. A thick, insulated “wall” used to separate
compartments of a multi-temperature truck or trailer.
calorie: The amount of heat required to raise temperature of
one gram of water one degree Celsius. 1 calorie = 0.004 Btu.
Celsius: The metric unit of temperature measurement. The
preferred alternate to the term centigrade. Abbreviated “C.”
centigrade. See Celsius.
203
001
Glossary
This glossary is published for informational purposes only and
the information being furnished herein should not be
considered as all-inclusive or meant to cover all contingencies.
NOTE: Additional terms not found in the glossary may be
located in the index section of this manual.
accumulator: A device located in the suction line to collect
liquid refrigerant and meter it safety back to the compressor as
gas.
ambient air temperature: Temperature of the air
surrounding an object.
amp: Abbreviation for ampere. The basic measuring unit of
electrical current.
bar: A metric unit of pressure. 1 bar = 100 kPa = 14.5 psi.
Battery Sentry: Part of the CYCLE-SENTRY™ system. The
Battery Sentry module monitors alternator charge rate and will
keep the unit running until the battery is adequately charged.
001
box temperature: The temperature within a
temperature-controlled compartment.
Btu (british thermal unit): The quantity of heat required to
raise the temperature of one pound of water by one degree
Fahrenheit. 1 Btu = 252 calories.
bulkhead: 1) return air bulkhead. A metal or plastic “wall”
placed at the front of the box to prevent loading of product
tightly against the Thermo King unit. (Loading too close to the
unit restricts air flow and system efficiency.) 2) bulkhead
divider. A thick, insulated “wall” used to separate
compartments of a multi-temperature truck or trailer.
calorie: The amount of heat required to raise temperature of
one gram of water one degree Celsius. 1 calorie = 0.004 Btu.
Celsius: The metric unit of temperature measurement. The
preferred alternate to the term centigrade. Abbreviated “C.”
centigrade. See Celsius.
203
Glossary
CFC: Chlorofluorocarbon. A chlorine-based refrigerant
consisting of chlorine, fluorine and carbon. Example: R12. In
many countries it is illegal to release this type of refrigerant to
the atmosphere because chlorine damages the earth’s
atmosphere. CFC refrigerants are not used in modern Thermo
King units.
circuit breaker: A thermal device that automatically
interrupts an electrical circuit when the current in the circuit
exceeds the predetermined amperage rating of the breaker. See
amp.
coil: A cooling or heating element made of pipe or tube,
formed into a helical or serpentine shape, that may be equipped
with thin metal fins to aid heat transfer.
cold curtains: Flexible vinyl curtains used to reduce air
exchange between the refrigerated compartment and the
outside during door openings.
compound gauge: A gauge calibrated in psig (or kPa) to
measure pressure, and in inches of mercury (Kg/cm2) to
measure vacuum.
compressor: The refrigeration component that compresses
refrigerant vapor and creates refrigerant flow.
condenser: An arrangement of tubing in which the
vaporized and compressed refrigerant is liquefied as heat is
removed.
cycles per second: See Hertz.
damper door: A door on the evaporator section that closes
during defrost to prevent hot air from entering the refrigerated
cargo compartment.
data logger: An electronic device that monitors and stores
unit operating and temperature data for later review. Examples:
DMS, DAS, DRS and AccuTrac.
DE: Dual Evaporator. A multi-temp host unit with two
evaporators capable of refrigerating two separate, longitudinal
compartments.
defrost: The removal of accumulated ice from an evaporator
coil. Periodic defrost is necessary when the evaporator coil is
operating below freezing. Defrost is required more frequently
when the air passing through the evaporator has a high
moisture content.
defrost termination switch: A component that terminates
defrost operation at a specific temperature.
204
Glossary
CFC: Chlorofluorocarbon. A chlorine-based refrigerant
consisting of chlorine, fluorine and carbon. Example: R12. In
many countries it is illegal to release this type of refrigerant to
the atmosphere because chlorine damages the earth’s
atmosphere. CFC refrigerants are not used in modern Thermo
King units.
circuit breaker: A thermal device that automatically
interrupts an electrical circuit when the current in the circuit
exceeds the predetermined amperage rating of the breaker. See
amp.
coil: A cooling or heating element made of pipe or tube,
formed into a helical or serpentine shape, that may be equipped
with thin metal fins to aid heat transfer.
cold curtains: Flexible vinyl curtains used to reduce air
exchange between the refrigerated compartment and the
outside during door openings.
compound gauge: A gauge calibrated in psig (or kPa) to
measure pressure, and in inches of mercury (Kg/cm2) to
measure vacuum.
compressor: The refrigeration component that compresses
refrigerant vapor and creates refrigerant flow.
204
condenser: An arrangement of tubing in which the
vaporized and compressed refrigerant is liquefied as heat is
removed.
cycles per second: See Hertz.
damper door: A door on the evaporator section that closes
during defrost to prevent hot air from entering the refrigerated
cargo compartment.
data logger: An electronic device that monitors and stores
unit operating and temperature data for later review. Examples:
DMS, DAS, DRS and AccuTrac.
DE: Dual Evaporator. A multi-temp host unit with two
evaporators capable of refrigerating two separate, longitudinal
compartments.
defrost: The removal of accumulated ice from an evaporator
coil. Periodic defrost is necessary when the evaporator coil is
operating below freezing. Defrost is required more frequently
when the air passing through the evaporator has a high
moisture content.
defrost termination switch: A component that terminates
defrost operation at a specific temperature.
Glossary
defrost timer: A solid state module that initiates defrost at
selected intervals. Also establishes a maximum defrost
duration if normal circuits malfunction.
dehydrator: A device used to remove moisture from
refrigerant. Also called a drier.
discharge air temperature: The temperature of air leaving
the evaporator.
drier: See dehydrator.
ECT: A ceiling-mounted Thermo King remote evaporator. See
EW and TLE.
ERC: Extended Remote Unit Control. (Door switches) An
option on Thermo King multi-temperature units to improve
temperature control when doors are opened during delivery.
When a compartment door is opened, the refrigeration unit for
that compartment may be forced to NULL, defrost, or some
other mode. Opening a compartment door may also affect the
operating mode of other compartments. ERC systems are
connected in a variety of ways to meet customer needs.
evaporator: The part of the refrigeration system that absorbs
heat during the cooling cycle.
EW: A wall-mounted Thermo King remote evaporator. See
ECT and TLE.
F: See Fahrenheit.
Fahrenheit: A unit of temperature measurement used in the
United States. Abbreviated “F.”
freeze up: 1) Failure of a refrigeration system to operate
normally due to moisture in the refrigerant and the formation
of ice at the expansion valve. The expansion valve may be
frozen shut or open, causing improper unit operation in either
case. 2) The formation of a solid ice mass over the evaporator
coil reducing air flow.
fuse: An electrical safety device (typically a cartridge)
inserted into an electrical circuit. It contains material that will
melt or break when the current is increased beyond a specific
value. When this occurs, the circuit is opened and electrical
current flow is stopped.
ETV (Electronic Throttling Valve) : A device used with a
microprocessor to precisely control the refrigeration system.
205
Glossary
defrost timer: A solid state module that initiates defrost at
selected intervals. Also establishes a maximum defrost
duration if normal circuits malfunction.
dehydrator: A device used to remove moisture from
refrigerant. Also called a drier.
discharge air temperature: The temperature of air leaving
the evaporator.
drier: See dehydrator.
ECT: A ceiling-mounted Thermo King remote evaporator. See
EW and TLE.
ERC: Extended Remote Unit Control. (Door switches) An
option on Thermo King multi-temperature units to improve
temperature control when doors are opened during delivery.
When a compartment door is opened, the refrigeration unit for
that compartment may be forced to NULL, defrost, or some
other mode. Opening a compartment door may also affect the
operating mode of other compartments. ERC systems are
connected in a variety of ways to meet customer needs.
evaporator: The part of the refrigeration system that absorbs
heat during the cooling cycle.
EW: A wall-mounted Thermo King remote evaporator. See
ECT and TLE.
F: See Fahrenheit.
Fahrenheit: A unit of temperature measurement used in the
United States. Abbreviated “F.”
freeze up: 1) Failure of a refrigeration system to operate
normally due to moisture in the refrigerant and the formation
of ice at the expansion valve. The expansion valve may be
frozen shut or open, causing improper unit operation in either
case. 2) The formation of a solid ice mass over the evaporator
coil reducing air flow.
fuse: An electrical safety device (typically a cartridge)
inserted into an electrical circuit. It contains material that will
melt or break when the current is increased beyond a specific
value. When this occurs, the circuit is opened and electrical
current flow is stopped.
ETV (Electronic Throttling Valve) : A device used with a
microprocessor to precisely control the refrigeration system.
205
Glossary
fusible link: An electrical safety device (typically a short
piece of wire) inserted into an electrical circuit. The wire melts
or breaks when the current is increased beyond a specific
value. When this occurs, the circuit is opened and electrical
current flow is stopped.
HCFC: Hydrochlorofluorocarbon. A chlorine-based
refrigerant containing hydrogen, chlorine, fluorine and carbon.
Example: R22. Because chlorine damages the earth’s
atmosphere, in many countries, it is illegal to release this type
of refrigerant to the atmosphere. HCFC refrigerants are not
used in modern Thermo King units.
Hertz: A unit of frequency equal to one cycle per second.
Abbreviated “Hz.”
HFC: A refrigerant consisting of hydrogen, fluorine and
carbon. Examples: R134a and 404A. HFC refrigerants contain
no chlorine and are, therefore, considered “safe” for the
environment.
high pressure relief valve: A safety valve on the
refrigeration system that allows refrigerant to escape from the
system if pressure exceeds a predetermined value.
hp (horsepower): A unit of power equivalent to 746 watts
or 550 foot-pounds per second.
HPCO (High Pressure Cut Out Switch): A
pressure-operated switch that opens to stop unit operation
when discharge pressure reaches a predetermined maximum.
invertible: A multi-temperature truck or trailer unit designed
to allow the placement of deep-frozen cargo in any
compartment. See Multi-Temp.
kPa: Kilopascals. A metric unit of pressure. 1 kPa = 0.01 bar =
0.145 psi.
load: 1) The product being refrigerated and transported.
2) The amount of heat being removed by the refrigeration
system. (For example, a compressor is under a heavy heat load
when expected to cool a very warm box.)
LPCO (Low Pressure Cut Out Switch): A
pressure-operated switch that opens to stop unit operation
when suction pressure reaches a predetermined minimum.
modulation: An optional system that reduces load (product)
dehydration and avoids “top freeze.”
206
Glossary
fusible link: An electrical safety device (typically a short
piece of wire) inserted into an electrical circuit. The wire melts
or breaks when the current is increased beyond a specific
value. When this occurs, the circuit is opened and electrical
current flow is stopped.
HCFC: Hydrochlorofluorocarbon. A chlorine-based
refrigerant containing hydrogen, chlorine, fluorine and carbon.
Example: R22. Because chlorine damages the earth’s
atmosphere, in many countries, it is illegal to release this type
of refrigerant to the atmosphere. HCFC refrigerants are not
used in modern Thermo King units.
Hertz: A unit of frequency equal to one cycle per second.
Abbreviated “Hz.”
HFC: A refrigerant consisting of hydrogen, fluorine and
carbon. Examples: R134a and 404A. HFC refrigerants contain
no chlorine and are, therefore, considered “safe” for the
environment.
high pressure relief valve: A safety valve on the
refrigeration system that allows refrigerant to escape from the
system if pressure exceeds a predetermined value.
206
hp (horsepower): A unit of power equivalent to 746 watts
or 550 foot-pounds per second.
HPCO (High Pressure Cut Out Switch): A
pressure-operated switch that opens to stop unit operation
when discharge pressure reaches a predetermined maximum.
invertible: A multi-temperature truck or trailer unit designed
to allow the placement of deep-frozen cargo in any
compartment. See Multi-Temp.
kPa: Kilopascals. A metric unit of pressure. 1 kPa = 0.01 bar =
0.145 psi.
load: 1) The product being refrigerated and transported.
2) The amount of heat being removed by the refrigeration
system. (For example, a compressor is under a heavy heat load
when expected to cool a very warm box.)
LPCO (Low Pressure Cut Out Switch): A
pressure-operated switch that opens to stop unit operation
when suction pressure reaches a predetermined minimum.
modulation: An optional system that reduces load (product)
dehydration and avoids “top freeze.”
Glossary
movable bulkhead: A thick, insulated, portable wall-like
device used to compartmentalize a temperature-controlled
truck or trailer. See bulkhead.
psi: Pounds per square inch. A unit of pressure.
1 psi = 0.069 bar = 6.89 kPa.
Multi-Temp: A Thermo King truck or trailer unit capable of
maintaining different set-points in multiple compartments.
psig: Pounds per Square Inch Gauge. Pressure in pounds per
square inch as displayed by a gauge calibrated to zero when
open to the atmosphere.
no. 1 diesel fuel: A grade of diesel fuel formulated to
prevent “jelling” in low ambient temperatures.
receiver tank: A refrigerant storage device included in
nearly all Thermo King units.
no. 2 diesel fuel: A grade of diesel fuel formulated for
moderate to warm ambient temperatures.
refrigerant: The medium of heat transfer in a refrigeration
system which absorbs heat by evaporating at a low temperature
and releases heat by condensing at a higher temperature.
ohm: An electrical unit measuring the amount of resistance
(opposition to the current flow) in an electrical circuit.
pre-cooling: 1) To cool down an empty box
(temperature-controlled area) to the desired load temperature
prior to loading. 2) To cool cargo to a desired temperature
before loading.
pre-heat: The heating of diesel engine glow plugs prior to
start-up. Some engines use an intake manifold heater rather
than glow plugs.
pre-trip inspection: Checking the operation of a
refrigeration system before loading.
refrigerant oil: A special oil used to lubricate compressors in
refrigeration systems.
remote evaporator: A separate evaporator unit located in a
second or third compartment of a multi-temperature truck or
trailer unit.
return air bulkhead: A structure (metal or plastic) mounted
in the front of a trailer and designed to prevent restriction of
return air flow to the Thermo King unit due to improper
loading. See bulkhead.
207
Glossary
movable bulkhead: A thick, insulated, portable wall-like
device used to compartmentalize a temperature-controlled
truck or trailer. See bulkhead.
psi: Pounds per square inch. A unit of pressure.
1 psi = 0.069 bar = 6.89 kPa.
Multi-Temp: A Thermo King truck or trailer unit capable of
maintaining different set-points in multiple compartments.
psig: Pounds per Square Inch Gauge. Pressure in pounds per
square inch as displayed by a gauge calibrated to zero when
open to the atmosphere.
no. 1 diesel fuel: A grade of diesel fuel formulated to
prevent “jelling” in low ambient temperatures.
receiver tank: A refrigerant storage device included in
nearly all Thermo King units.
no. 2 diesel fuel: A grade of diesel fuel formulated for
moderate to warm ambient temperatures.
refrigerant: The medium of heat transfer in a refrigeration
system which absorbs heat by evaporating at a low temperature
and releases heat by condensing at a higher temperature.
ohm: An electrical unit measuring the amount of resistance
(opposition to the current flow) in an electrical circuit.
pre-cooling: 1) To cool down an empty box
(temperature-controlled area) to the desired load temperature
prior to loading. 2) To cool cargo to a desired temperature
before loading.
pre-heat: The heating of diesel engine glow plugs prior to
start-up. Some engines use an intake manifold heater rather
than glow plugs.
pre-trip inspection: Checking the operation of a
refrigeration system before loading.
refrigerant oil: A special oil used to lubricate compressors in
refrigeration systems.
remote evaporator: A separate evaporator unit located in a
second or third compartment of a multi-temperature truck or
trailer unit.
return air bulkhead: A structure (metal or plastic) mounted
in the front of a trailer and designed to prevent restriction of
return air flow to the Thermo King unit due to improper
loading. See bulkhead.
207
Glossary
return air temperature: The temperature of the air
returning to the evaporator. See box temperature.
Vac (volts alternating current): An electric current that
reverses direction at regularly recurring intervals.
rpm: Revolutions per minute.
Vdc (volts direct current): An electric current that flows in
one direction only and is constant in value.
setpoint: The temperature selected on a thermostat or
microprocessor controller. This is normally the desired box
temperature.
volts: The basic measuring unit of electrical potential.
watt: The basic measuring unit of electrical power.
short cycling: When a refrigeration unit cycles between the
heat and cool modes more often than normal.
sight glass: A system component that permits visual
inspection of oil or refrigerant level and condition.
thermostat: A device that controls unit modes of operation to
maintain a selected box temperature.
TLE: Thin-line evaporator. A Thermo King remote evaporator
designed to be compact (thin) while supplying superior air
flow. See ECT and EW.
top freeze: When the top portion of perishable cargo is
damaged by freezing temperatures discharged from the
refrigeration unit. This may occur near the front of the box
when product is placed too close to the cold, discharge air flow.
208
Glossary
return air temperature: The temperature of the air
returning to the evaporator. See box temperature.
Vac (volts alternating current): An electric current that
reverses direction at regularly recurring intervals.
rpm: Revolutions per minute.
Vdc (volts direct current): An electric current that flows in
one direction only and is constant in value.
setpoint: The temperature selected on a thermostat or
microprocessor controller. This is normally the desired box
temperature.
short cycling: When a refrigeration unit cycles between the
heat and cool modes more often than normal.
sight glass: A system component that permits visual
inspection of oil or refrigerant level and condition.
thermostat: A device that controls unit modes of operation to
maintain a selected box temperature.
TLE: Thin-line evaporator. A Thermo King remote evaporator
designed to be compact (thin) while supplying superior air
flow. See ECT and EW.
top freeze: When the top portion of perishable cargo is
damaged by freezing temperatures discharged from the
refrigeration unit. This may occur near the front of the box
when product is placed too close to the cold, discharge air flow.
208
volts: The basic measuring unit of electrical potential.
watt: The basic measuring unit of electrical power.
Maintenance Inspection Schedule
Pretrip
Every
1,500
Hours
Every Annual/4
3,000
,500
Inspect/Service These Items
Hours* Hours
Microprocessor
•
Run Pretrip Test (see Pretrip Test in this manual).
Engine
•
Check fuel supply.
•
Check engine oil level.
•
•
•
•
Inspect/clean fuel pre-strainer.
•
•
•
•
Inspect belts for condition and proper tension (belt tension tool
No. 204-427).
•
•
•
•
Check engine oil pressure hot, on high speed (should display “OK”).
•
•
•
•
Listen for unusual noises, vibrations, etc.
•
•
•
•
Check engine coolant level and antifreeze protection (-30 F [-40 C]).
*3,000 hours or two years, whichever occurs first.
** Based on EPA 40 CFR Part 89.
209
Maintenance Inspection Schedule
Pretrip
Every
1,500
Hours
Every Annual/4
3,000
,500
Inspect/Service These Items
Hours* Hours
Microprocessor
•
Run Pretrip Test (see Pretrip Test in this manual).
Engine
•
Check fuel supply.
•
Check engine oil level.
•
•
•
•
Inspect/clean fuel pre-strainer.
•
•
•
•
Inspect belts for condition and proper tension (belt tension tool
No. 204-427).
•
•
•
•
Check engine oil pressure hot, on high speed (should display “OK”).
•
•
•
•
Listen for unusual noises, vibrations, etc.
•
•
•
•
Check engine coolant level and antifreeze protection (-30 F [-40 C]).
*3,000 hours or two years, whichever occurs first.
** Based on EPA 40 CFR Part 89.
209
Maintenance Inspection Schedule
Pretrip
Every
1,500
Hours
Every Annual/4
3,000
,500
Inspect/Service These Items
Hours* Hours
Check air cleaner restriction indicator (change filter when indicator
reaches 25 in.). Replace EMI 3000 air cleaner element at 3,000 hours or
two years (whichever occurs first) if indicator has not reached 25 in.
•
•
•
•
Drain water from fuel tank and check vent.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect/clean fuel transfer pump inlet strainer (prefilter).
Check and adjust engine speeds (high and low speed).
•
•
•
Check condition of drive coupling bushings per Service Bulletin T&T 171.
•
Check engine mounts for wear.
•
Replace fuel filter/water separator.
•
Change engine oil and oil filter (hot). Requires oil with API Rating CI-4 or
better (ACEA Rating E3 for Europe).
—
•
Change ELC (red) engine coolant every 5 years or 12,000 hours. Units
equipped with ELC have an ELC nameplate on the expansion tank.
Test fuel injection nozzles at least every 3,000 hours. **
*3,000 hours or two years, whichever occurs first.
** Based on EPA 40 CFR Part 89.
210
Maintenance Inspection Schedule
Pretrip
Every
1,500
Hours
Every Annual/4
3,000
,500
Inspect/Service These Items
Hours* Hours
Check air cleaner restriction indicator (change filter when indicator
reaches 25 in.). Replace EMI 3000 air cleaner element at 3,000 hours or
two years (whichever occurs first) if indicator has not reached 25 in.
•
•
•
•
Drain water from fuel tank and check vent.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect/clean fuel transfer pump inlet strainer (prefilter).
Check and adjust engine speeds (high and low speed).
•
•
•
Check condition of drive coupling bushings per Service Bulletin T&T 171.
•
Check engine mounts for wear.
•
Replace fuel filter/water separator.
•
Change engine oil and oil filter (hot). Requires oil with API Rating CI-4 or
better (ACEA Rating E3 for Europe).
—
•
Change ELC (red) engine coolant every 5 years or 12,000 hours. Units
equipped with ELC have an ELC nameplate on the expansion tank.
Test fuel injection nozzles at least every 3,000 hours. **
*3,000 hours or two years, whichever occurs first.
** Based on EPA 40 CFR Part 89.
210
Maintenance Inspection Schedule
Pretrip
Every
1,500
Hours
Every Annual/4
3,000
,500
Inspect/Service These Items
Hours* Hours
—
Replace fuel return lines between fuel injection nozzles every 10,000
hours.
Electrical
•
•
•
•
Inspect battery terminals and electrolyte level.
•
•
•
Inspect wire harness for damaged wires or connections.
•
•
•
Check operation of damper door (closes on defrost initiation and opens on
defrost termination).
•
Inspect alternator wire connections for tightness.
•
Inspect electric motor, replace bearings yearly or every 6,000 hours.
*3,000 hours or two years, whichever occurs first.
** Based on EPA 40 CFR Part 89.
211
Maintenance Inspection Schedule
Pretrip
Every
1,500
Hours
Every Annual/4
3,000
,500
Inspect/Service These Items
Hours* Hours
—
Replace fuel return lines between fuel injection nozzles every 10,000
hours.
Electrical
•
•
•
•
Inspect battery terminals and electrolyte level.
•
•
•
Inspect wire harness for damaged wires or connections.
•
•
•
Check operation of damper door (closes on defrost initiation and opens on
defrost termination).
•
Inspect alternator wire connections for tightness.
•
Inspect electric motor, replace bearings yearly or every 6,000 hours.
*3,000 hours or two years, whichever occurs first.
** Based on EPA 40 CFR Part 89.
211
Maintenance Inspection Schedule
Pretrip
Every
1,500
Hours
Every Annual/4
3,000
,500
Inspect/Service These Items
Hours* Hours
Refrigeration
•
•
•
•
Check refrigerant level.
•
•
•
Check for proper suction pressure.
•
•
•
Check compressor oil level and condition.
•
•
•
Check throttling valve regulating pressure (units with mechanical throttling
valve only).
•
Check compressor efficiency and pump down refrigeration system.
•
Empty oil collection container mounted on compressor (if so equipped).
—
Replace dehydrator and check discharge and suction pressure every two
(2) years.
*3,000 hours or two years, whichever occurs first.
** Based on EPA 40 CFR Part 89.
212
Maintenance Inspection Schedule
Pretrip
Every
1,500
Hours
Every Annual/4
3,000
,500
Inspect/Service These Items
Hours* Hours
Refrigeration
•
•
•
•
Check refrigerant level.
•
•
•
Check for proper suction pressure.
•
•
•
Check compressor oil level and condition.
•
•
•
Check throttling valve regulating pressure (units with mechanical throttling
valve only).
•
Check compressor efficiency and pump down refrigeration system.
•
Empty oil collection container mounted on compressor (if so equipped).
—
Replace dehydrator and check discharge and suction pressure every two
(2) years.
*3,000 hours or two years, whichever occurs first.
** Based on EPA 40 CFR Part 89.
212
Maintenance Inspection Schedule
Pretrip
Every
1,500
Hours
Every Annual/4
3,000
,500
Inspect/Service These Items
Hours* Hours
Structural
•
•
•
•
Visually inspect unit for fluid leaks.
•
•
•
•
Visually inspect unit for damaged, loose or broken parts (includes air ducts
and bulkheads).
•
•
•
Inspect tapered roller bearing fanshaft and idlers for leakage and bearing
wear (noise).
•
•
•
Clean entire unit including condenser and evaporator coils and defrost
drains.
•
•
•
Check all unit and fuel tank mounting bolts, brackets, lines, hoses, etc.
•
•
•
Check evaporator damper door adjustment and operation.
*3,000 hours or two years, whichever occurs first.
** Based on EPA 40 CFR Part 89.
213
Maintenance Inspection Schedule
Pretrip
Every
1,500
Hours
Every Annual/4
3,000
,500
Inspect/Service These Items
Hours* Hours
Structural
•
•
•
•
Visually inspect unit for fluid leaks.
•
•
•
•
Visually inspect unit for damaged, loose or broken parts (includes air ducts
and bulkheads).
•
•
•
Inspect tapered roller bearing fanshaft and idlers for leakage and bearing
wear (noise).
•
•
•
Clean entire unit including condenser and evaporator coils and defrost
drains.
•
•
•
Check all unit and fuel tank mounting bolts, brackets, lines, hoses, etc.
•
•
•
Check evaporator damper door adjustment and operation.
*3,000 hours or two years, whichever occurs first.
** Based on EPA 40 CFR Part 89.
213
Maintenance Inspection Schedule
214
Maintenance Inspection Schedule
214
Serial Number Locations
Unit: Nameplates on the bulkhead above the compressor
inside the curbside door and on the roadside of the evaporator.
Engine: See the engine identification plate located on the
engine valve cover.
Compressor: Stamped between the cylinders on the front
end above the oil pump.
215
Serial Number Locations
Unit: Nameplates on the bulkhead above the compressor
inside the curbside door and on the roadside of the evaporator.
Engine: See the engine identification plate located on the
engine valve cover.
Compressor: Stamped between the cylinders on the front
end above the oil pump.
215
Serial Number Locations
Figure 137: Compressor Serial Number Location
Figure 138: Engine Serial Number Location
216
Serial Number Locations
Figure 137: Compressor Serial Number Location
216
Figure 138: Engine Serial Number Location
Serial Number Locations
1
2
3
4
ARA793
1.
2.
3.
4.
Figure 139: Unit Serial Number Plate Locations
(on the bulkhead above compressor inside
curbside door and on roadside of evaporator)
Unit Serial Number
Bill of Material Number
Unit Model
Unit ID
Figure 140: Unit Serial Number Plate
217
Serial Number Locations
1
2
3
4
ARA793
1.
2.
3.
4.
Figure 139: Unit Serial Number Plate Locations
(on the bulkhead above compressor inside
curbside door and on roadside of evaporator)
Unit Serial Number
Bill of Material Number
Unit Model
Unit ID
Figure 140: Unit Serial Number Plate
217
Serial Number Locations
218
Serial Number Locations
218
Emergency Cold Line
The answering service at the factory will assist you in reaching
a dealer to get the help you need. The Cold Line is answered 24
hours a day by personnel who will do their best to get you
quick service at an authorized Thermo King Dealer.
AKB12
If you can’t get your rig rolling, and you have tried the Thermo
King North American Service Directory (available from any
Thermo King dealer) to reach a dealer without success, then
call the Toll Free Emergency Cold Line Number
(888) 887-2202.
219
Emergency Cold Line
The answering service at the factory will assist you in reaching
a dealer to get the help you need. The Cold Line is answered 24
hours a day by personnel who will do their best to get you
quick service at an authorized Thermo King Dealer.
AKB12
If you can’t get your rig rolling, and you have tried the Thermo
King North American Service Directory (available from any
Thermo King dealer) to reach a dealer without success, then
call the Toll Free Emergency Cold Line Number
(888) 887-2202.
219
Recover Refrigerant
At Thermo King, we recognize the need to preserve the environment
and limit the potential harm to the ozone layer that can result from
allowing refrigerant to escape into the atmosphere.
We strictly adhere to a policy that promotes the recovery and limits
the loss of refrigerant into the atmosphere.
In addition, service personnel must be aware of Federal regulations
concerning the use of refrigerants and the certification of technicians.
For additional information on regulations and technician certification
programs, contact your local THERMO KING dealer.
220
Recover Refrigerant
At Thermo King, we recognize the need to preserve the environment
and limit the potential harm to the ozone layer that can result from
allowing refrigerant to escape into the atmosphere.
We strictly adhere to a policy that promotes the recovery and limits
the loss of refrigerant into the atmosphere.
In addition, service personnel must be aware of Federal regulations
concerning the use of refrigerants and the certification of technicians.
For additional information on regulations and technician certification
programs, contact your local THERMO KING dealer.
220
CALIFORNIA
Proposition 65 Warning
Diesel exhaust is a chemical known to
the State of California to cause cancer.
221
001
CALIFORNIA
Proposition 65 Warning
Diesel exhaust is a chemical known to
the State of California to cause cancer.
001
221
222
222
Index
A
adjust brightness menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
air cleaner restriction indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
alarm codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
corrective action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
amber status light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
automatic start/stop safety precautions . . . . . . . . . 20
B
battery inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
belt tension, specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
belts inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
C
coils inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
compressor oil sight glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
continuous mode
selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
continuous run operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
50
39
78
32
53
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
CYCLE-SENTRY
selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
start-stop controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
D
damper inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
data logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
datalogger menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
defrost drain inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Defrost key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
diesel mode, selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
door inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
E
ELC (extended life coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
electric power receptacle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
electric standby
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
223
Index
A
adjust brightness menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
air cleaner restriction indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
alarm codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
corrective action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
amber status light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
automatic start/stop safety precautions . . . . . . . . . 20
B
battery inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
belt tension, specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
belts inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
C
coils inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
compressor oil sight glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
continuous mode
selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
continuous run operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
50
39
78
32
53
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
CYCLE-SENTRY
selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
start-stop controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
D
damper inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
data logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
datalogger menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
defrost drain inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Defrost key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
diesel mode, selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
door inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
E
ELC (extended life coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
electric power receptacle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
electric standby
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
223
selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
starting unit on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
electrical control system, specifications . . . . . . . . . 197
electrical hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
electrical inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
electrical standby, specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
electronic throttling valve (ETV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Emergency Cold Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
EMI 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
engine compartment components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
engine oil dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
engine, specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
enroute inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
ETV (electronic throttling valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
extended life coolant (ELC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
F
first aid for refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
first aid for refrigerant oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
FreshSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
front doors
closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
fuse link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
G
gauge readings, viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
H
high pressure cutout switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
high pressure relief valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
HMI control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
hourmeters menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
I
introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
J
jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
K
keypad lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
224
selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
starting unit on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
electrical control system, specifications . . . . . . . . . 197
electrical hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
electrical inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
electrical standby, specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
electronic throttling valve (ETV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Emergency Cold Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
EMI 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
engine compartment components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
engine oil dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
engine, specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
enroute inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
ETV (electronic throttling valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
extended life coolant (ELC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
F
first aid for refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
first aid for refrigerant oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
FreshSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
front doors
closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
224
opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
fuse link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
G
gauge readings, viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
H
high pressure cutout switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
high pressure relief valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
HMI control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
hourmeters menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
I
introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
J
jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
K
keypad lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
L
language menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
loading procedures
enroute inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
post-loading inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
pre-loading inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
low oil level switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
low oil pressure switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
M
main menu
choices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
navigating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
maintenance inspection schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
manual defrost cycle, initiating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
manual pretrip inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
microprocessor On/Off switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Mode key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
O
Off key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
On key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
OptiSet Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 132
overload relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
P
post-loading inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
preheat buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
pre-loading inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
pretrip inspection, manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
pretrip tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
protection devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
R
rear remote control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
receiver tank sight glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
refrigerant oil safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
refrigerant safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
refrigeration system, specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
remote status light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
225
L
language menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
loading procedures
enroute inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
post-loading inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
pre-loading inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
low oil level switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
low oil pressure switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
M
main menu
choices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
navigating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
maintenance inspection schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
manual defrost cycle, initiating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
manual pretrip inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
microprocessor On/Off switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Mode key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
O
Off key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
On key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
OptiSet Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 132
overload relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
P
post-loading inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
preheat buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
pre-loading inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
pretrip inspection, manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
pretrip tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
protection devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
R
rear remote control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
receiver tank sight glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
refrigerant oil safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
refrigerant safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
refrigeration system, specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
remote status light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
225
S
safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
automatic start/stop operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
decal locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
electrical hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
first aid for refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
first aid for refrigerant oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
general safety practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
refrigerant oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
selection of operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
sensor readings, viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Serial Number Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
setpoint, changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
sleep mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
sleep mode, selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
smart FETs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
SMART REEFER 3 (SR-3) Controller . . . . . . . . 32, 51
soft keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
specifications
electric fuel heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
SR-3 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 51
standard display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 62
start of trip, initiating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
status light, remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
structural inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
T
temperature watch display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
time display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
trip report, printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
U
unit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
W
warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
226
S
safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
automatic start/stop operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
decal locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
electrical hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
first aid for refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
first aid for refrigerant oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
general safety practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
refrigerant oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
selection of operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
sensor readings, viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Serial Number Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
setpoint, changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
sleep mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
sleep mode, selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
smart FETs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
SMART REEFER 3 (SR-3) Controller . . . . . . . . 32, 51
soft keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
specifications
electric fuel heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
SR-3 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 51
standard display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 62
start of trip, initiating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
226
status light, remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
structural inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
T
temperature watch display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
time display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
trip report, printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
U
unit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
W
warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement